SBC 306 CR

THE SAUDI BUILDING CODE for STEEL
STRUCTURES
SBC 306 - CR
Code Requirements
2018
The Saudi Building Code for
STEEL STRUCTURES
(SBC 306-CR)
Key List of the Saudi Codes: Designations and brief titles
Title Code Req.1 Code & Com.2 Arabic Prov. 3
The General Building Code SBC 201-CR SBC 201-CC SBC 201-AR
Structural – Loading and Forces SBC 301-CR SBC 301-CC SBC 301-AR
Structural – Construction SBC 302- CR SBC 302-AR
Structural – Soil and Foundations SBC 303- CR SBC 303-CC SBC 303-AR
Structural – Concrete Structures SBC 304- CR SBC 304-CC SBC 304-AR
Structural – Masonry Structures SBC 305- CR SBC 305-CC SBC 305-AR
–
Structural Steel Structures SBC 306-CR SBC 306-CC SBC 306-AR
Electrical Code SBC 401- CR SBC 401-AR
Mechanical Code SBC 501-CR SBC 501-CC SBC 501-AR
Energy Conservation- Nonresidential SBC 601- CR SBC 601- CC SBC 601- AR
Energy Conservation-Residential
Conservation-Residential SBC 602- CR SBC 602- CC SBC 602- AR
Plumbing Code SBC 701- CR SBC 701-CC SBC 701-AR
Private sewage Code SBC 702- CR SBC 702-AR
Fire Code SBC 801- CR SBC 801-CC SBC 801-AR
Existing Buildings Code SBC 901- CR SBC 901-CC SBC 901-AR
Green Construction Code SBC 1001- CR SBC 1001-CC SBC 1001-AR
Residential Building Code-V1 SBC 1101- CR SBC 1101-CC SBC 1101-AR
Arch. Planning and Structural Reqs.
Residential Building Code-V2 SBC 1102- CR SBC 1102-CC SBC 1102-AR
MEP, Gas and Energy Requirements
1. CR: Code Requirements without Commentary
2. CC: Code Requirements with Commentary
3. AR: Arabic Code Provisions
SBC 306-CR-18 i
STEEL STRUCTURES
(SBC 306-CR)
COPYRIGHT © 2018
by
The Saudi Building Code National Committee (SBCNC).
(Edition 200923)
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. All intellectual property rights of this Saudi Code are owned by the National
Committee of Saudi Building Code as per the Saudi laws of the intellectual property. No part of this code may
be reproduced, distributed or leased in any form or by any means, including but not limited to publishing on
cloud sites, computer networks or any electronic means of communication, without prior written permission
from the National Committee of the Saudi Building Code. The purchase of an electronic or a paper copy does
not exempt the individual or entity from complying with the above limitations.
SBC 306-CR-18 i
THE TECHNICAL COMMITTEE
(SBC 306-CR)
STEEL STRUCTURES
1 Dr. Saleh Ibrahim Aldeghaither Chairman
2 Dr. Shehab Eldin M. Mourad Member
3 Dr. Mohamed Nour Eldin Fayed Member
4 Dr. Abdelrahim Badawy Abdelrahim Member
5 Dr. Sherif Mohamed Ibrahim Member
REVIEW COMMITTEE
THE SAUDI BUILDING CODE NATIONAL
1 Dr. Naif M. Alabbadi Chairman
COMMITTEE (SBCNC)
2 Dr. Khaled M. Aljammaz Member
1 H. E. Dr. Saad O. AlKasabi Chairman 3 Dr. Abdulrahman G. Al-enizi Member
2 Dr. Naif M. Alabbadi Vice Chairman 4 Eng. Saeed K. Kadasah Member
3 Dr. Abdulrahman G. Al-Enizi Member 5 Eng. Tawifik I. Aljrayed Member
4 Engr. Saeed K. Kadasah Member
REVIEWERS
5 Dr. Hassan S. Alhazmi Member Prof. Mostafa Morsi Elshami RCJY team
6 Engr. Badr S. AL-maayoof Member
7 Engr. Fayez A. Alghamdi Member
EDITORIAL COMMITTEE
8 Engr. Mohammed A. Alwaily Member
9 Dr. Bandar S. Alkahlan Member 1 Prof. Ahmed B. Shuraim Chairman
10 Engr. Ahmad N. Hassan Member 2 Dr. Abdallah M. Al-Shehri Member
11 Engr. Abdulnasser S. Alabdullatif Member 3 Eng. Tawifik I. Aljrayed Member
12 Dr. Hani M. Zahran Member
EDITORIAL SUPPORT
13 Engr. Khalifa S. Alyahyai Member
14 Dr. Khaled M. Aljammaz Member
15 Dr. Ibrahim O. Habiballah Member
16 Dr. Saeed A. Asiri Member
17 Dr. Abdallah M. Al-Shehri Member
18 Engr. Saad S. Shuail Member
THE ADVISORY COMMITTEE
1 Dr. Khaled M. Aljammaz Chairman
2 Eng. Khalifa S. Alyahyai Vice Chairman
3 Dr. Hani M. Zahran Member
4 Prof. Ali A. Shash Member
5 Prof. Ahmed B. Shuraim Member
6 Dr. Khalid M. Wazira Member
7 Dr. Abdulhameed A. Al Ohaly Member
8 Dr. Hamza A. Ghulman Member
9 Engr. Hakam A. Al-Aqily Member
10 Prof. Saleh F. Magram Member
11 Engr. Nasser M. Al-Dossari Member
12 Dr. Waleed H. Khushefati Member
13 Dr. Waleed M. Abanomi Member
14 Dr. Fahad S. Al-Lahaim Member
SBC 306-CR-18 ii
PREFACE
PREFACE
The Saudi Building Code for Steel Structures (SBC 306) provides minimum requirements for the
structural design and construction of structural steel system or systems with structural steel acting
compositely with reinforced concrete. The first edition of SBC 306 was published in the year of 2007.
SBC 306-18 is the second edition of SBC 306. The current edition of the Code has been substantially
reorganized and reformatted relative to its 2007 version. The code is reorganized into 16 chapters and
six appendices. The reorganization was in response to past requests concerning the difficulty in finding
provisions. The new layout is more user-friendly and will better facilitate the use of the design
provisions.
ANSI/AISC 360-10 is the base code in the development of this Code. Saudi Building Code National
Committee (SBCNC) has made an agreement with the American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC)
to use their materials and modify them as per the local construction needs and regulatory requirements
of Saudi Arabia. AISC is not responsible for any modifications or changes the SBCNC has made to
accommodate
accommodate local conditions.
The writing process of SBC 306-18 followed the methodology approved by the Saudi Building Code
National Committee. Many changes
changes and modifications were m
made
ade in its base code (ANSI/AISC 360-
10) to meet the local weather, materials, construction and regulatory requirements.
The committees responsible for SBC 306 Code and Commentary have taken all precautions to avoid
ambiguities, omissions, and errors in the document. Despite these efforts, the users of SBC 306 may
find information or requirements that may be subject to more than one interpretation or may be
incomplete. The SBCNC alone possesses the authority and responsibility for updating, modifying and
interpreting the Code.
It is a common assumption that engineering knowledge is a prerequisite in understanding code
provisions and requirements; thus, the code is oriented towards individuals who possess the
background knowledge to evaluate the significance and limitations of its content and
recommendations.. They shall be able to determine the applicability
recommendations applicability of all regulatory limitations before
applying the Code and must comply with all applicable laws and regulations.
The requirements related to administration and enforcement of this Code are advisory only. SBCNC
and governmental organizations, in charge of enforcing this Code, possess the authority to modify
these administrative requirements.
SBC 306-CR-18 iii

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Table of Contents
CHAPTER 1 —GENERAL PROVISIONS.............................................................

.........................................................................................................
............................................ 29
1.1 —SCOPE ........................................................................................................................................................................ 29
1.2 —REFEREN
REFERENCED
CED SPECIFICATIONS,
SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS.............................................................
.......................................................................................
.......................... 30
1.3 —MATERIA
MATERIALL .............................................................................................................................
............................................................. .....................................................................................................
..................................... 32
1.4 —STRUCTURAL DESIGN DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIO SPECIFICATIONS NS ........................................................................................
................................................................................... ..... 34
CHAPTER 2 —DESIGN REQUIREMENTS..........................................................
......................................................................................................
............................................ 36
2.1 —GENER
GENERAL
AL PROVISIONS...............................................................................................................................
.............................................................. .................................................................................
................ 36
2.2 —LOADS AND LOAD COMBINATIONS................................................................
...........................................................................................................................
........................................................... 36
2.3 —DESIGN BASIS ............................................................................................................................................................ 36
2.4 —MEMBE
MEMBER R PROPERTIES .........................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................
...................................... 38
2.5 —MEMBE
MEMBER R LENGTHS ..........................................................................................................................
.......................................................... ..........................................................................................
.......................... 39
2.6 —FABRICATIO
FABRICATIONN AND ERECTION ..............................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
..................................... 39
2.7 —QUALITY CONTROL AND QUALITY ASSURANCE ASSURANCE ........................................................
........................................................................................................
................................................ 39
2.8 —EVALUATION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES...................................................................................................................
STRUCTURES................................................................................................................... 39
CHAPTER 3 —DESIGN FOR STABILITY................
STABILITY...................................................................................
........................................................................................
..................... 43
3.1 —GENE
GENERAL
RAL STAB
STABILIT
ILITY
Y REQUIREM
REQUIREMENTS
ENTS........................................................................................................................
............................................................. ........................................................... 43
3.2 —CALCULATION OF REQUIRED STRENGTHS .............................................................................................................. 43
3.3 CALCULATION OF DESIGN STRENGTHS ..............................................................
.........................................................................................................................
........................................................... 46
CHAPTER 4 —DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR TENSION...........................................................
.................................................................................
...................... 48
4.1 —SLENDERN
SLENDERNESS
ESS LIMITA
LIMITATIO TIONSNS ................................................................
................................................................................................................................
......................................................................
...... 48
4.2 —DESIGN TENSILE STRENGTH
STRENGTH ......................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................
................................................ 48
4.3 —EFFECTIVE NET AREA ................................................................
................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................
................. 48
4.4 —BUILT-UP MEMBER
MEMBERS S ......................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
........................... 48
4.5 —PIN-CON
PIN-CONNECTED
NECTED MEMBERS ................................................................
................................................................................................................................
......................................................................
...... 49
4.6 —EYEBARS .................................................................................................................................................................... 49
CHAPTER 5 —DESIGN FOR COMPRESSIO
COMPRESSION
N ...............................................................................................
............................................................................................... 52
5.1 —GENER
GENERAL
AL PROVISIONS...............................................................................................................................
.............................................................. .................................................................................
................ 52
5.2 —EFFECTIVE LENGTH..........................................................
..........................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................
.......................... 52
5.3 —FLEXURAL BUCKLING OF MEMBERS WITHOUT SLENDER ELEMENTS ....................................................................... 52
5.4 —TORSIONA
TORSIONALL AND FLEXURAL-TORSIONAL
FLEXURAL-TORSIONAL BUCKLING OF MEMBER MEMBERS S WITHOUT SLENDER ELEMENTS ........................ 53
5.5 —SINGLE ANGLE COMPRESSION MEMBERS...........................................................................
MEMBERS.................................................................................................................
...................................... 54
5.6 —BUILT-UP MEMBERS.......................................................................................................................
...................................................... ............................................................................................
........................... 54
5.7 —MEMBE
MEMBERSRS WITH SLENDER ELEMENTS ...........................................................
......................................................................................................................
........................................................... 56
CHAPTER 6 —DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR FLEXURE..........................................................
................................................................................
...................... 61
6.1 —GENER
GENERAL
AL PROVISIONS...............................................................................................................................
.............................................................. .................................................................................
................ 61
6.2 —DOUB
DOUBLY
LY SYMMETRIC COM COMPAC PACT T I-SHAPED MEMBERS AND CHANNELS BENT ABOUT THEIR MAJOR AXIS ........... ...... ....... 62
6.3 —DOUBLY SYMMETRIC I-SHAPED MEMBERS WITH COMPECT WEBS AND NONCOMPECT OR SLENDER FLANGES
BENT ABOUT THEIR MAJOR AXIS .......................................................................................................................
...................................................... .................................................................................
................ 63
6.4 —OTHER I-SHAPED MEMBERS WITH COMPACT OR NONCOMPACT WEBS BENT ABOUT THEIR MAJOR AXIS ......... 63
6.5 —DOUBLY SYMMECTRIC AND SINGLY SYMMETRIC I-SHAPED MEMBERS WITH SLENDER WEBS BENT ABOUT THEIR
MAJOUT AXIS ................................................................
................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................
...................................... 65
6.6 —I-SHAPED MEMBERS AND CHANNELS BENT ABOUT THEIR MINOR AXIS ...........................................................
................................................................
..... 66
6.7 —SQU
SQUARE
ARE AND RECTANG
RECTANGULAR ULAR HSS AND BOX- BOX-SHAPSHAPED ED MEMBERS
MEMBERS ............................................................................
............................................................ ................ 67
6.8 —ROUND HSS ..........................................................
..........................................................................................................................
.....................................................................................................
..................................... 67
6.9 —TEES AND DOUBLE ANGLES LOADED IN THE PLANE OF SYMMETRY ..................................................................... 68
6.10 —SINGLE ANGLES .............................................................
.............................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................
.......................... 69
6.11 —RECTANG
RECTANGULAR
ULAR BARS AND ROUNDS............................................................
.......................................................................................................................
........................................................... 70
6.12 —UNSYMMETR
UNSYMMETRICAL
ICAL SHAPES................................................................
................................................................................................................................
......................................................................
...... 70
SBC 306-CR-18 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
6.13 —PROPORTIONS OF BEAMS AND GIRDERS .............................................................................................................. 71

CHAPTER 7 —DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR SHEAR ..............................................................
....................................................................................
...................... 75
7.1 —GENER
GENERAL
AL PROVISION
PROVISIONS S .............................................................
..............................................................................................................................
.................................................................................
................ 75
7.2 —MEMBERS WITH UNSTIFFENED OR STIFFENED WEBS ........................................................................................... 75
7.3 —TENSION FIELD ACTIO
ACTION N ............................................................
.............................................................................................................................
.................................................................................
................ 76
7.4 —SINGLE ANGLES ...............................................................
...............................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................
.......................... 77
7.5 —RECTANG
RECTANGULAR
ULAR HSS A ANDND BOX-SHAP
BOX-SHAPED ED MEMBERS
MEMBERS..............................................................
...................................................................................................
..................................... 77
7.6 —ROUND HSS ..........................................................
..........................................................................................................................
.....................................................................................................
..................................... 77
7.7 —WEAK AXIS
AXIS SHEAR I N DOUBLY DOUBLY SYMMETRIC AND AND SIN SINGLY
GLY SYMMETRIC SHAPES ..................................................... 78
7.8 —BEAMS AND
AND GIRDERS WITH WEB OPENINGS ..........................................................
..........................................................................................................
................................................ 78
CHAPTER 8 —DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR COMBINED FORCES AND TORSION .................................. 80
8.1 —DOUBLY AND SINGLY SYMMETRIC MEMBERS SUBJECT TO FLEXURE AND AXIAL FORCE ......................................... 80
8.2 —UNSYMME
UNSYMMETRIC
TRIC AN
AND
D OTHER MEMBERS SUBJECT TO FLEXURE A N D AXIAL FORCE.............................................. 81
8.3 —MEMBERS SUBJECT TO TORSION AND COMBINED TORSION, F FLEXURE,
LEXURE, S SHEAR
HEAR AND/OR AXIAL FORCE ........... ...... ..........
..... 81
8.4 RUPTURE OF FLANGES WITH HOLES SUBJECT TO TENSION ...............................................................
.........................................................................................
.......................... 83
CHAPTER 9 —DESIG
DESIGN
N OF COMPOSITE MEMBERS .................................................................................... 85
9.1 —GENE
GENERAL
RAL PROVISIONS ...............................................................................................................................
.............................................................. .................................................................................
................ 85
9.2 —AXIAL FORCE ............................................................................................................................................................. 86
9.3 —FLEXURE .................................................................................................................................................................... 88
9.4 —SHEAR ........................................................................................................................
........................................................ ................................................................................................................
................................................ 90
9.5 —COMBINE
COMBINED D FLEXURE AND AXIAL FORCE .......................................................................................
..................................................................................................................
........................... 91
9.6 —LOAD TRANSFER..............................................................................................................................
.............................................................. ..........................................................................................
.......................... 91
9.7 —COMPOSITE DIAPHRAGMS AND COLLECTOR COLLECTOR BEAMS ..............................................................................................
......................................................... ..................................... 93
9.8 —STEEL ANCHORS ..............................................................................................................................
.............................................................. ..........................................................................................
.......................... 93
9.9 —SPECIAL CASES ..........................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................... ................................................ 97
CHAPTER 10 —DESIGN OF CONNECTIONS ...............................................................
..............................................................................................
............................... 100
10.1 —GENERA
GENERALL PROVISION
PROVISIONS S ............................................................
.............................................................................................................................
...............................................................................
.............. 100
10.2 —WELDS ................................................................................................................................................................... 102
10.3 —BOLTS AND THREADED
THREADED PARTS..........................................................
...........................................................................................................................
....................................................................
... 105
10.4 —AFFECTED ELEMENTS O F MEMBE MEMBERS RS AND CONNECTING
CONNECTING ELEMEN ELEMENTS TS ..............................................................
.................................................................
... 109
10.5 —FILLERS .................................................................................................................................................................. 110
10.6 —SPLICES .................................................................................................................................................................. 110
10.7 —BEARING STRENGTH................................................................................................................................
............................................................... ...............................................................................
.............. 110
10.8 —COLUMN BASES AND BEARING O N CONCRET CONCRETE E ...................................................................................................
................................................................ ................................... 111
10.9 —ANCHOR RODS AND EMBEDME EMBEDMENTS NTS.....................................................................................................................
............................................................ ......................................................... 111
—
10.10 FLANGES AND WEBS WITH CONCENTRATED
CONCENTRATED FORCES ....................................................................................... 111
CHAPTER 11 —DESIGN OF HSS AND BOX MEMBER CONNECTIONS ................................................... 122
11.1 —CONCENTRATED FORCES ON HSS ........................................................................................................................ 122
11.2 —HSS-T
HSS-TO-HS
O-HSS
S TRUSS CONNECTIONS .......................................................................................................................
.................................................................................... ................................... 122
11.3 —HSS-TO-HSS MOMENT CONNECTIONS.........................................................
..................................................................................................................
......................................................... 124
11.4 —WELDS O F PLATES
PLATES AND BRANCHES TO RECTANGULAR
RECTANGULAR HSS ...............................................................................
................................................................ ............... 125
125
CHAPTER 12 —SEISMIC PROVISIONS FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDINGS ................................... 143
12.1 —GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.....................................................................................................................................
REQUIREMENTS..................................................................................................................................... 143
12.2 —GENER
GENERAL
AL SEISMIC DESIGN REQUIREM
REQUIREMENTS ENTS..........................................................................................................
............................................................ .............................................. 146
12.3 —MOMENT
MOMENT-FRAME
-FRAME AND BRACED-FRAME SYSTEMS ......................................
...............................................................................................
......................................................... 155
12.4 —COMPOSITE MOMENT-FRAME
MOMENT-FRAME AND BRACED-FBRACED-FRAME RAME SYSTEMS ........................................................................... 165
12.5 —FABRICATIO
FABRICATIONN AND ERECTION ............................................................................................................................
........................................................... ....................................................................
... 167
12.6 —QUALITY CONTROL AND QUALITY ASSURANCE
ASSURANCE ......................................................
....................................................................................................
.............................................. 169
12.7 —PREQUA
PREQUALIFICATION
LIFICATION AND CYCLIC QUALIFICATION TESTING PROVISION PROVISIONS S ............................................................. 169
CHAPTER 13 —DESIGN FOR SERVICEABLILITY ...................................................................
......................................................................................
................... 181
SBC 306-CR-18 2
TABLE OF CONTENTS
13.1 —GENERA
GENERALL PROVISION
PROVISIONS S ............................................................
.............................................................................................................................
...............................................................................
.............. 181
13.2 —CAMBER................................................................................................................................................................. 181
13.3 —DEFLECTION........................................................................................................................................................... 181
13.4 —DRIFT ..................................................................................................................................................................... 181
13.5 —VIBRATION..........................................................
..........................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................
................................... 181
13.6 —WIND-INDUC
WIND-INDUCED ED MOTION ........................................................................................................................
....................................................... ...............................................................................
.............. 181
13.7 —EXPANSIO
EXPANSION N AND CONTRACTION........................................................................................................................
....................................................... ....................................................................
... 181
13.8 —CONNECTIO
CONNECTION N SLIP ........................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
......................................................... 182
CHAPTER 14 —FABRICATION AND ERECTION ........................................................................................

........................................................................................ 184
14.1 —SHOP AND ERECTION DRAWINGS................................................................
.........................................................................................................................
......................................................... 184
14.2 —FABRICATIO
FABRICATIONN................................................................................................................................
................................................................ .........................................................................................
......................... 184
14.3 —SHOP PAINTING .............................................................
.............................................................................................................................
........................................................................................
........................ 186
14.4 —ERECTION .............................................................................................................................................................. 186
CHAPTER 15 —QUALITY CONTROL AND QUALITY ASSURANCE .........................................................
......................................................... 188
15.1 —SCOPE ................................................................
................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................
.................................... 188
15.2 —FABR
FABRICA
ICATOR
TOR AND ERECTOR QUA QUALIT LITYY CONTROL PROGRA PROGRAM M .............................................................................
................................................................................
... 188
15.3 —FABRICATO
FABRICATOR R AND
AN D ERECERECTOR TOR DOCUMENTS
DOCUMENTS ...........................................................................................................
............................................................. .............................................. 189
15.4 —INSPECTION AND NONDESTR NONDESTRECTIV ECTIVE E TESTING PERSONNPERSONNEL EL ................................................................................. 190
15.5 —MINIMUM REQUIREM
REQUIREMENTS ENTS F O R INSPECTION O OF F STRUCTURAL STEEL BULIDINGS.......................................... 1 191
91
15.6 —MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS
REQUIREMENTS FOR INSPECT INSPECTION ION OF COMPOSITE CONSTRUCTION CONSTRUCTION..................................................
.................................................. 195
15.7 —APP
APPROV
ROVEDED FABRICATORS A ANDND EREC
ERECTORSTORS ............................................................................................................ 195
15.8 —NONCON
NONCONFORMING
FORMING MAT MATERI ERIALAL AND WORKMAWORKMANSHIP NSHIP ............................................................................................
................................... ......................................................... 196
CHAPTER 16 —EVALUATION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES ....................................................................
.................................................................... 204
16.1 —GENER
GENERAL
AL PROVISIONS ..................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
......................... 204
16.2 —MAT
MATERI
ERIAL
AL PROPERTIES
PROPERTIES .....................................................................
.....................................................................................................................................
....................................................................
.... 204
16.3 —EVALUATIO
EVALUATION
N B Y STRUCTURAL A ANALYSIS
NALYSIS ..............................................................
............................................................................................................
.............................................. 2205
05
16.4 —EVALUATION BY LOAD TESTS...............................................................................................................................
TESTS............................................................................................................................... 205
16.5 —EVALUATIO
EVALUATION
N REPORT ............................................................
.............................................................................................................................
...............................................................................
.............. 205
205
APPENDIX A —DESIGN BY INELASTIC ANALYSIS ...............................................................
...................................................................................
.................... 207
A.1 — GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
REQUIREMENTS ......................................................
.......................................................................................................................
...............................................................................
.............. 207
A.2 — DUCTILITY REQUIREM
REQUIREMENTS.
ENTS. ................................................................................................................................
............................................................... ....................................................................
... 207
A.3 — ANALYSIS REQUIREMENTS.
REQUIREMENTS. .....................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
.............. 209
APPENDIX B —DESIGN FOR PONDING ............................................................
......................................................................................................
.......................................... 211
B.1 —SIMPLIFIED DESIGN FOR PONDING ...............................................................
........................................................................................................................
......................................................... 211
B.2 — IMPRO
IMPROVE
VEDD DESIGN FOR PONDING ................................................................
.........................................................................................................................
......................................................... 211
APPENDIX C —DESIGN FOR FATIGUE.............................................................
.......................................................................................................
.......................................... 216
C.1 — GENERA
GENERALL PROVISION
PROVISIONS
S ............................................................
.............................................................................................................................
...............................................................................
.............. 216
C.2 — CALCULATION OF MAXIMUM STRESSES AND STRESS RANGES RANGES .........
..........................................................................
....................................................................
... 216
C.3 — DESIGN STRESS RANGE............................................................
.............................................................................................................................
...............................................................................
.............. 217
C.4 — SPECIAL FABRICATION AND ERECTION REQUIREM REQUIREMENTS.....................................................................................
ENTS........................................................................................ ... 218
APPENDIX D —STRUCTURAL DESIGN FOR FIRE CONDITIONS ............................................................. 237
D.1 — GENERAL PROVISIONS
PROVISIONS ........................................................................................................................................
....................................................................... ....................................................................
... 237
D.2 — STRUCTURAL DESIGN FOR FIRE CONDITIONS BY ANALYSIS ...................................................................................
........................................................... ........................ 237
D.3 — DESIGN BY QUALIFICATION TESTING .....................................................................................................................
............................................................ ......................................................... 240
APPENDIX E —STABI
STABILITY
LITY BRACING FOR COLUMNS AND BEAMS ....................................................... 246
E.1 — GENERAL PROVISIONS
PROVISIONS ............................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................... ..................................... 246
E.2 — COLUMN BRACING ........................................................................................................................
....................................................... ..........................................................................................
......................... 246
E.3 — BEAM BRACING ..............................................................................................................................
.............................................................. ........................................................................................
........................ 247
E.4 — BEAM-COLUMN BRACING .......................................................
........................................................................................................................
...............................................................................
.............. 248
SBC 306-CR-18 3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
APPENDIX F —AL
ALTE
TERN
RNAT
ATIV
IVEE METHODS OF DESIGN FOR STABILITY............................................. 250
F.1 — GENE
GENERAL
RAL STABIL
STABILITY
ITY REQUIREMENTS
REQUIREMENTS......................................................................................................................
............................................................. ......................................................... 250
F.2 — EFFECTIVE LENGTH METHOD ................................................................................................................................ 250
F.3 — FIRST-ORDER ANALY
ANALYSIS
SIS METHO
METHOD
D .......................................................
........................................................................................................................
....................................................................
... 251
APPENDIX G —APPROXIMATE SECOND-ORDER ANALYSIS ................................................................. 254
G.1 — LIMITATIONS ................................................................
................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................
.......................... 254
G.2 — CALCULATION PROCEDURE...........................................................................
PROCEDURE....................................................................................................................................
......................................................... 254
SBC 306-CR-18 4
LIST OF SYMBOLS
List of Symbols
Some definitions in the list below have been simplified

simplified in the interest of brevity. In all cases, the definitions
given in the body of the Code govern. Symbols without text definitions, used only in one location and defined
at that location are omitted in some cases. The section or table number in the right-hand column refers to the
Section where the symbol is first used.
Symbol Definition .............................................

...................................................................
............................................
.........................
... Section
ABM Cross-sectional area of the base metal, mm2 ....................

........................................
....................10.2.4
Ab Nominal unthreaded or threaded part, mm2............. 10.3.6
unthreaded body area of bolt or
Abi Cross-sectional area of the overlapping branch, mm2 .....................
..........................
..... 11.2.3
Abj Cross-sectional area of the overlapped branch, mm2 ......................
...........................
..... 11.2.3
Ac Area of concrete, mm2 ...........................................
..................................................................
..............................
....... 9.2.1.2
Ac within effective width, mm2 ...............................
Area of concrete slab within ............................... 9.3.2.3
Ae Effective net area, mm2 ...................
..........................................
..............................................
....................................
............. 4.2
Ae Summation of the effective areas of the cross section based on the reduced
effective width, be, mm2 .............................................
...................................................................
................................
.......... 5.7
Afc Area of compression flange, mm2 .......................................................... 7.3.1
Afg f lange, mm2 ..................................................... 6.13.1
Gross area of tension flange,
Afn Net area of tension flange, mm2 ......................................................... 6.13.1
Aft Area of tension flange, mm2 ....................
..........................................
.............................................
..........................
...7.3.1
Ag Gross cross-sectional area of member, mm2 ....................
..........................................
...................... 2.3.6
Ag Gross area of composite member, mm2 ................................................. 9.2.1
Agv Gross area subject to shear, mm2 ........................................................ 10.4.3
An member, mm2 ..........................................
Net area of member, ................................................................
.............................
....... 2.4.3
An Area of the directly connected elements, mm2 ...............
...............................
.................. Table 4-1
Ant Net area subject to tension, mm2 ..........................................
..........................................................
................ 10.4.3
Anv Net area subject to shear,

shear, mm2 ...................
.........................................
..........................................
.................... 10.4.3
2
Apb Projected area in bearing, mm ......................
............................................
.........................................
...................10.7
As Cross-sectional area of steel section, mm2 ..........................................
.......................................... 9.2.1.2
As Cross-sectional area of the structural steel core, mm2.................. 12.2.5.4 .2
.2
Asa Cross-sectional area of steel headed stud anchor, mm2....................... 9.8.2.1
Asf Area on the shear path, mm2........................................................4.5.1
shear failure path,
Ash Minimum area of tie reinforcement, mm2 ......................................
...................................... 12.2.5.4 .2
.2
Asr Area of continuous mm2 ...........................................
continuous reinforcing bars, mm ..............................................
... 9.2.1
Asr Area of adequately developed longitudinal
longitudinal reinforcing steel within the
effective width of the concrete slab, mm2 ......................
.............................................
.......................9.3.2.4
9.3.2.4
At Net area in tension, mm2 ................................................................. App. C.3.2
Aw Area of web,
web, the overall depth times the web thickness, dtw, mm2 ................ 7.2.1
..............
SBC 306-CR-18 2
LIST OF SYMBOLS
Awe Effective area of the weld, mm2 ...................

.............................................................10.2.4
..........................................
Awei throat of any ith weld element, mm2.................. 10.2.4
Effective area of weld throat
A1 Loaded area of concrete, mm2 ....................
..........................................
.........................................
................... 9.6.3.1
A1 support, mm2 ........... 10.8
Area of steel concentrically bearing on a concrete support,
A2 Maximum area of of the portion of
of the supporting surface
surface that is geometrically
loaded area, mm2 ...............................
similar to and concentric with the loaded ..................... .......... 10.8
B Overall width of rectangular
rectangular HSS member, member, measured 90  to the plane of the
connection, mm ...................
..........................................
.............................................
....................................
................Table 4-1
B Overall width of rectangular steel section along face transferring load, mm
...........................................
.................................................................
............................................
.............................................
....................... 9.6.3.1
Bb Overall width of rectangular HSS branch member, measured 90 to the plane
of the connection, mm ..........................................
.................................................................
...............................
........ 11.2.1
Bbi Overall width of the overlapping branch, mm .....................................
..................................... 11.2.3
Bbj Overall width
width of the overlapped branch,
branch, mm .....................................
..................................... 11.2.3
Bp Width of plate, measured 90  to the plane of the connection, mm....... 11.1.1
B1 Multiplier to account for P- effects ................................................... App.G.2
App.G.2
B2 Multiplier to account for P- Δ effects ................................................ App.G.2
................................................ App.G.2
C HSS torsional constant...........................................

.................................................................. .......... 8.3.1
.................................
Ca Ratio of required strength to design strength ............................
.............................. TABLE 12-2
Cb Lateral-torsional buckling modification factor for nonuniform moment moment
diagrams .............................................
...................................................................
............................................
................................
.......... 6.1
Cd Coefficient relating relative brace stiffness and curvature............. 12.2.5.2.1
Cd Coefficient accounting for increased required bracing stiffne stiffness ss at inflection
inflecti on
point ..........................................
................................................................
............................................
...............................
......... App. E.3.1
Cf Constant from Table
Table A-3.1 for the fatigue category .......................
....................... App.C.3.1
App.C.3.1
Cm Coefficient accounting for nonuniform moment ............................
............................ App. G.2.1
Cp Ponding flexibility coefficient for primary member in a flat roof .. App. B.1
Cr Coefficient for web sidesway buckling .......................
.............................................
.........................
... 10.10.4
Cs Ponding flexibility coefficient for secondary member in a flat roof . App. B.1
Cv Web shear
shear coefficient ............................................
...................................................................
.................................
.......... 7.2.1
Cw Warping constant, mm6 .............................................
...................................................................
................................
.......... 5.4
C2 Edge distance increment ..................
........ ...................
...................
...................
.................
..........TABLE 10-10
D Outside diameter of round HSS, mm ..................
......... ...................
...................
...............
........ Table 2-1
D Outside diameter of round HSS main member,
member, mm ............................
............................ 11.2.1
D Nominal dead
dead load, N ....
......
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
.. App. B.2
D Dead load due to the weight
weight of the structural elements and permanent
features on the building, N............................................
.............................................................
................. 12.2.5.4 .2
.2
Db Outside diameter of round HSS branch member, ......................... 11.2.1
member, mm .........................
Du In slip-critical connections, a multiplier that reflects the ratio of the mean
installed bolt pretension to the specified minimum bolt pretension ..... 10.3.8
E Modulus ofof elasticity of steel  200 000
00 0 MPa ..................................
...................... ..............Table 2-1
SBC 306-CR-18 3
LIST OF SYMBOLS
Ec Modulus of
of elasticity of concrete, MPa .................
............................................... 9.2.1.2
..............................
Ec (T) Modulus of elasticity of concrete at elevated temperature, MPa App. D2.3.2
Emh Horizontal seismic load ffect including overstrength factor, N ............ 12.2.1
Es Modulus of
of elasticity of steel  200 000 MPa .....................................
..................................... 9.2.1.2
E (T) Elastic modulus of elasticity of steel at elevated temperature, MPa .... ......
....
....
....
....
....
................................................................................................................... App. D2.4.3
EIeff Effective stiffness of composite section, N-mm2 .................................. 9.2.1.2

stiffness of
Fc Design stress, MPa ......................
............................................
.............................................
...................................
............ 11.1.1
Fca Design axial stress at the point of consideration,
consideration, MPa ..........................
.......................... 8.2
Fcbw , Fcbz Design flexural ....................... 8.2
flexural stress at the point of consideration, MPa .......................
Fcr Critical stress, MPa ..........................................................
.................................................................................
.........................
.. 5.3
Fcre Critical stress calculated from Specification Chapter E using expected yield
stress, MPa ...........................................
.................................................................
............................................
........................
.. 12.3.4.6
Fcry Critical stress about the y-axis of symmetry, MPa.....................................
..................................... 5.4
Fcrz Critical torsional buckling stress, MPa ..................................................... 5.4
.....................................................
Fe Elastic buckling stress, MPa ..........................................
.................................................................
.........................
.. 5.3
Fe (T) Critical elastic buckling stress with the elastic modulus E (T ) at elevated
temperature, MPa .............................................................
........................................................................
........... App. D2.4.3
Fex Flexural elastic buckling stress about the major principal principal axis, MPa ...... 5.4
FEXX Filler metal classification strength, MPa ..........................................
............................................ 10.2.4
Fey Flexural elastic buckling stress about the minor principal
principal axis, MPa ...... 5.4
Fez Torsional
Torsional elastic buckling
buckling stress, MPa ................................................... 5.4
...................................................
Fin Nominal bond
bond stress, 0.40 MPa
MPa ............................................
........................................................
............ 9.6.3.3
FL Magnitude of flexural stress in compression flange at w
Magnitude which
hich flange local
buckling or lateral-torsional buckling is influenced by yielding, MPa . Table
2-2
Fn Nominal stress, MPa ..........................................
.................................................................
.....................................
.............. 8.3.3
Fn Nominal tensile stress, Fnt, or shear stress, Fnv, from TABLE 10-7, MPa
MPa10.3.6
10.3.6
FnBM Nominal stress of
of the base metal, MPa ............................................
.................................................
..... 10.2.4
Fnt Nominal tensile stress from TABLE 10-7, MPa ....................................
.................................... 10.3.7
F nt Nominal tensile stress modified to include the effects of of shear stress, MPa
...........................................
.................................................................
............................................
.............................................
......................... 10.3.7
Fnv Nominal shear
shear stress from TABLE 10-7, MPa......................................
...................................... 10.3.7
Fnw Nominal stress of
of the weld metal, MPa............................................
.................................................
..... 10.2.4
Fnw Nominal stress ofof the weld metal Chapter 10 with no increase in strength due
to directionality of load, MPa .................................................................. 11.4
..................................................................
Fnwi Nominal stress in ith weld element,
el ement, MPa ..........................................
...............................................
..... 10.2.4
Fnwix x component of nominal
nominal stress, Fnwi, MPa ..........................................
............................................ 10.2.4
Fnwiy y component of nominal
nominal stress, Fnwi, MPa ...........................................
............................................. 10.2.4
Fp (T) Proportional limit at elevated
elevat ed temper
temperatures
atures,, MPa ......
.........
......
......
......
......
......
..... App. D2.3.2
SBC 306-CR-18 4
LIST OF SYMBOLS
FSR Allowable stress range, MPa....

......
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
........ App. C.3
....
FTH Threshold allowable stress range, maximum stress range for indefinite design
life from TABLE C-1, MPa ........................................................................ App. C.1
Fu Specified minimum tensile strength, MPa ............................................
..................................................
...... 4.2
Fu (T) Minimum tensile tensi le strength at elevated elevat ed temper temperature,ature, MPa.......
MPa.......... ......
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
.....
..
................................................................................................................... App. D2.3.2
Fy Specified minimum yield stress, MPa. As used in this Code, “yield stress”
denotes either the specified minimum yield point for those steels that have a
yield point or specified yield strength (for those steel that do not h have
ave a yield
point) ............................................
..................................................................
........................................................... 2.3.6
.....................................
Fyb Specified minimum yield stress of HSS branch member material, MPa .........
...........................................
.................................................................
............................................
.............................................
......................... 11.2.1
Fybi Specified minimum yield stress of the overlapping branch material, MPa ....
...........................................
.................................................................
............................................
.............................................
....................... 11.2.3
Fybj Specified minimum yield stress of the overlapped branch material, MPa11.2.3
MPa11.2.3
Fyf Specified minimum yield stress of the flange, MPa ...........................
........................... 10.10.1
Fyp Specified minimum yield stress of plate, MPa ......................................
...................................... 11.1.1
Fysr Specified minimum yield stress of reinforcing bars, MPa ................... 9.2.1.2
Fyst Specified minimum yield stress of the stiffener material, MPa ............. 7.3.3
Fy (T) Yield stress
str ess at elevat
ele vated
ed tem
temper
peratu
ature,
re, MPa ............
..................
............
............
............
.........
... App. D2.4.3
Fyw Specified minimum yield stress of the web material, MPa ................... 7.3.3
Fysr Specified minimum yield stress of the ties, MPa ............................
............................ 12.2.5.4 .2
G Shear modulus of elasticity of steel  77 200 MPa ...................................
................................... 5.4
G (T) Shear modulus of elasticity of steel at elevated temperature, MPa ................
...........................................
.................................................................
............................................
.....................................
...............App. D2.3.2
H Flexural constant ............................................
....................................................................................... 5.4
...........................................
H Story shear,
shear, in the direction of translation
translation being considered, produced by the
lateral forces used to compute ΔH, N................................
........................................
........ App.
App. G.2.2
H Overall height of rectangular
rectangular HSS member,
member, measured in the plane of the
connection, mm .............................................
...................................................................
................................
............Table 4-1
H Height of story, which is permitted to be taken as the distance between the
centerline of floor framing at each of the levels above and below, or the
distance between the top of floor slabs at each of the levels above and below,
mm ............................................
...................................................................
.............................................
................................
.......... 12.2.6.4.3
Hb Overall height of rectangular HSS branch member, member, measured in the plane of
the connection,
connection, mm ..........................................
.................................................................
...................................
............ 11.2.1
Hbi Overall depth of the overlapping branch, mm .....................................
..................................... 11.2.3
I plane of bending, mm4 ............................. App. G.2.1
Moment of inertia in the plane
Ic Moment of inertia of the concrete
concrete section about the elastic neutral axis of the
4
composite section, mm .................................................................
...................................................................9.2.1.2
Id Moment of inertia of the steel deck secondary members, mm4
deck supported on secondary
......................................................................................................................... App. B.1
Ip Moment of inertia of primary primary members, mm4 ........................................ App. B.1
SBC 306-CR-18 5
LIST OF SYMBOLS
Is secondary members, mm4 ....................

Moment of inertia of secondary ........... App. B.1
...............................
Is Moment of inertia of steel shape
shape about the elastic neutral axis of the
4
composite section, mm ...................
..........................................
..............................................
..............................
.......9.2.1.2
Isr Moment of inertia of reinforcing bars
bars about the elastic neutral axis of the
4
composite section, mm ......................................................................... 9.2.1.2
Ist Moment of inertia of transverse stiffeners about an axis in the web center for
stiffener pairs, or about the face in contact with the web p plate
late for single
stiffeners, mm4 ......................
.............................................
...................................................................7.3.3
............................................
Ist1 Minimum moment
moment of inertia of transverse stiffeners req
required
uired for development
of the web shear buckling resistance in Section 7.3.3 , mm4 ................... 7.3.3
Ist2 Minimum momentmoment of inertia of transverse stiffeners req required
uired for development
of the full web shear buckling plus the web tension field resistance, Vr  Vc2,
mm4 ....................
..........................................
.............................................
.............................................
........................................
..................7.3.3
Ix, I y axes, mm4 ....................
Moment of inertia about the principal axes, ......................................
.................. 5.4
Iy Out-of-planee moment of inertia, mm4 ........................................... App. E3.2.1
Out-of-plan
Iyc compression flange about the y-axis, mm4 .......... 6.4.2
Moment of inertia the compression
Iz of inertia, mm4 ...................
Minor principal axis moment of .......................................
.................... 6.10.2
J Torsional constant, mm4 ......................
Torsional .............................................
.............................................
................................
..........5.4
K Effective length factor ............................................
......................................................................... 3.3, 5.2
.............................
Kx Effective length factor for flexural buckling about .......................... 5.4
about x-axis ..........................
Ky Effective length factor for flexural buckling about
about y-axis ..........................
.......................... 5.4
Kz Effective length factor for torsional buckling ..........................................
............................................
.. 5.4
K1 Effective length factor in the plane ofof bending, calculated based on the
assumption of no lateral translation at the member ends, set equal to 1.0
unless analysis justifies a smaller value ............................................. App. G.2.1
L Height of story,
story, mm ....
......
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
..App. F.3.2
L Length of member,
member, mm ...........................................
..................................................................
.................................
.......... 8.3.1
L Nominal
Nominal occupancy live load ......................
............................................
...................................
.............App. D.1.4
L Laterally unbraced length of member,
member, mm ............................................
..............................................
.. 5.2
L Length of span, mm ............................................
...................................................................
..........................
... App. E3.2.1
L Length of member between work points at truss chord centerlines, mm . 5.5
L Live load due to occupancy and
and moveable equipment, N .............. 12.2.5.4 ..2
2
L Length of brace, mm ..........................................
.......................................................................... 12.3.4.5
................................
Lb Length between points that are either braced against
against lateral displacement of
compression flange or braced against twist of the cross section, mm .... 6.2.2
Lb Distance between braces, mm ....
......
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
.... App. E.2
Lb Largest laterally unbraced length along along either flange at the point of loa load,
d, mm
...........................................
.................................................................
............................................
............................................
...................... 10.10.4
Lm Limiting laterally unbraced length for eligibility for moment redistribution in
beams according to Section 2.3.7 ........................................................6.13.5
Lp Limiting laterally unbraced length for the limit state of yielding yielding,, mm .. 6.2.2
Lp Length of primary members, mm ..........................................
......................................................
............ App. B.1
SBC 306-CR-18 6
LIST OF SYMBOLS
Lpd analysis, mm ......... App. A.2.3

Limiting laterally unbraced length for plastic analysis,
Lr Limiting laterally unbraced length for the limit state of inelastic inelastic lateral-
torsional buckling, mm.......................................
mm............................................................................ 6.2.2
.....................................
Ls Length of secondary
secondary members, m ..........................................
.....................................................
........... App. B.1
Lv Distance from maximum to zero shear force,
force, mm ...................................
.....................................
.. 7.6
MA Absolute value of moment
moment at quarter point of the unbra
unbraced
ced segment, N-mm6.1
N-mm6.1
MB Absolute value of moment moment at centerline of the unbraced segment, N-mm . 6.1
MC Absolute value of moment moment at three-quarter point of the unbraced segment, N-
mm ............................................
...................................................................
.............................................
...........................................
..................... 6.1
Mcx , Mcy Design flexural strength determined in accordance with Chapter 6, N-mm
...........................................
.................................................................
............................................
.............................................
..........................
... 8.1.1
Mcx Design lateral-torsional strength for strong axis flexure determined in
Accordance with Chapter 6 using Cb = 1.0, N-mm ..............................
.............................. 8.1.3
Mcx Design flexural strength about
about the x-axis for the limit state of tensile rupture
of the flange, N-mm ....................
..........................................
.............................................
........................................
................. 8.4
Me Elastic lateral-torsional buckling moment, N-mm ..............................
.............................. 6.10.2
Mlt First-order moment, due to lateral translation of the structure structure only, N-mm
.........................................................................................................................App.
App . G.2
Mmax Absolute value of maximum
maximum moment in the unbraced segment,
segment, N-mm ...... 6.1
Mmid Moment at the middle
middle of the unbraced length, N-mm.................... App. A.2.3
Mn Nominal flexural strength,
strength, N-mm............................................................... 6.1
...............................................................
Mn,PR Nominal flexural strength of PR connection at a rotation of 0.02 rad, N-mm
...........................................
.................................................................
............................................
........................................
.................. 12.3.1.6.3
Mnt First-order moment, with the structure structure restrained against lateral translation,
N-mm ....
......
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
........App. G.2
....
Mp Plastic bending moment,
moment, N-mm ..................
........ ...................
...............
...... Table 2-1, Table 2-2
Mp Moment corresponding to plastic plastic stress distribution over the composite cross
section, N-mm ..............................
....................................................
........................................................ 9.3.4.2
..................................
Mp Nominal plastic flexural strength, N-mm ........................................
........................................ 12.3.1.6.2
Mpc Nominal plastic flexural strength of the column, N-mm .................... 12.2.6.4
Mp,exp Expected flexural strength, N-mm...................................................
N-mm...................................................12.2.5.2.3
Mr Required second-order
second-order flexural strength, N-mm ....
......
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....App. G.2
Mr Required flexural strength,
strength, N-mm ............................................
...........................................................
............... 8.1.1
Mrb Required bracing moment,
moment, N-mm ...
.....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
..App. E.3.2
Mr-ip Required in-plane flexural strength in branch, N-mm ..........................
.......................... 11.3.2
Mr-op Required out-of-plane
out-of-plane flexural strength
strength in branch,
branch, N-mm ................... 11.3.2
Mrx,Mry Required flexural strength, N-mm...........................................................
N-mm...........................................................8.1.1
Mrx Required flexural strength at the location of the bolt holes; positive for
N-mm 8.4
tension in the flange under consideration, negative for compression, N-mm8.4
Mu Required flexural strength,
strength, N-mm ............................................
.......................................................
........... 10.10.4
My Moment at yielding of the extreme fiber,
fiber, N-mm ..................
........ ...................
........... Table 2-2
SBC 306-CR-18 7
LIST OF SYMBOLS
My Yield moment about the axis of bending, .................................. 6.10.1

bending, N-mm ..................................
Myc Moment at yielding of the extreme fiber in the compression
compression flange, N-mm6.4.2
N-mm6.4.2
Myt Moment at yielding of the extreme fiber in the tension flange,
flange, N-mm .... 6.4.4
M1 Effective moment at the end of the unbraced length opposite from M2, N-mm
......................................................................................................................App.
App . A.2.3
M1 Smaller moment at end of unbraced length, N-mm ......... 6.13.5 , App. A.2.3
M2 Larger moment at end of unbraced length, N-mm ............ 6.13.5 , App. A.2.3
Ni Notional load applied
applied at level i, N ...........................................
.......................................................
............ 3.2.2.2
Ni Additionall lateral load, N ....
Additiona ......
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
.. App. F.3
Ov Overlap connection coefficient ............................................................ 11.2.2
............................................................
Pc Design axial strength, N .........................
...............................................
.............................................
..........................
... 8.1.1
Pcy Design compressive strength out of the plane of bending,
bending, N.................. 8.1.3
Pe Elastic critical buckling load determined in accordance with Chapter 3 or
Appen
Appendi
dixx F, N .............................................
...................................................................
.........................................
................... 9.2.1.2
Pe story Elastic critical buckling strength for the story in the direction of translation
being
bei ng conside
cons idered
red,, N .............
...................
............
............
............
............
............
............
............
............
............
............... App G.2.2
.........
Pey Elastic critical buckling load for buckling about the
the weak axis, N ....... 8.1.2
Pe1 Elastic critical buckling strength of of the member in the plane of bending bending,, N
..................................................................................................................... App. G.2.1
Plt First-order axial force, due to lateral translation of the structure
structure only, NApp.
G.2
Pmf Total vertical load in columns in the story that are part of moment frames, if
Total
any, in the direction of translation
tr anslation being considered, N ................App. G.2.2
Pn Nominal axial
axial strength, N ..........................................
................................................................
................................
.......... 4.2
Pn Nominal compressive
compressive strength, N ..............................
....................................................
................................
.......... 5.1
Pn Nominal compressive strength of the composite column calculated in
accordance with the Code, N ........................................
.............................................................
..................... 12.2.5.4
Pno Nominal compressive
compressive strength of zero length, doubly symmetric, axially axially
loaded composite member, N ................................................
.....................................................................
..................... 9.2
Pnt First-order axial force, with the structure structure restrained against lateral
trans
tr ansla
lati
tion,
on, N ................................................................................................App.
App . G.2
Pp Nominal bearing
bearing strength, N.........................................
...............................................................
...........................
..... 10.8
Pr Required second-order
second-order axial strength, N ....
......
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
..App. G.2
Pr Required axial compressive strength, N ................................................. 3.2.3
.................................................
Pr Required axial strength, N ............................................
...................................................................
..........................
... 8.1.1
Pr Required axial strength of the member
member at the location of the bolt holes;
......................................... 8.4
positive in tension, negative in compression, N .........................................
Pr Required external force applied to the composite member,
member, N ............. 9.6.2.1
Prb Required brace strength,
strength, N ....
......
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
.. App. E.2
Pstor
storyy Total vertical load supported by the story, including loads in columns c olumns that are
not part
par t of the lateral
later al force resisting
resist ing system,
sy stem, N ......
.........
......
......
......
......
......
......
......
.....
.. App. G.2.2
SBC 306-CR-18 8
LIST OF SYMBOLS
Pu Required axial strength in chord,

chord, N ............................................. TABLE 11-1
...........................................
Pu Required axial strength in compression,
compression, N ....
......
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
........ App. A.2.2
....
Pu Required axial strength using LRFD load ........ TABLE 12-2
load combinations,N........
Py Axial yield strength, N............................................
...................................................................
.................................
.......... 3.2.3
Q Net reduction factor accounting for all slender compression elements .... 5.7
Qa Reduction factor for slender stiffened
stiffened elements .........................................
......................................... 5.7
Qct Design tensile strength, N ..........................................
....................................................................... 9.8.3
.............................
Qcv Design shear strength, N............................................
..................................................................
..........................
.... 9.8.3.3
Qf Chord-stress interaction parameter ..........................................
...................................................
......... 11.2.2
Qn Nominal strength
strength of one steel headed stud or steel channel anchor,
anchor, N .. 9.3.2
Qnt Nominal tensile strength
strength of steel headed stud anchor,
anchor, N ....................
.................... 9.8.3.2
Qnv Nominal shear
shear strength of steel headed
headed stud anchor,
anchor, N ....................
.................... 9.8.3.1
Qrt Required tensile strength, N..........................................
.................................................................
....................... 9.8.3.3
Qrv Required shear strength,
strength, N .............................
...................................................
.....................................
............... 9.8.3.3
Qs Reduction factor for slender unstiffened
unstiffened elements .....................................
..................................... 5.7
R Radius of joint surface, mm ................
.........................
.................
................
................
................
.......... TABLE 10-2
R Nominal load load due to rainwater, exclusive of the ponding contribution contribution,, MPa
App . B.2
......................................................................................................................... App.
R Seismic response modification coefficient .............................................. 1.1.1
..............................................
RFIL Reduction factor for joints a pair of transverse fillet welds only ...
... App. C.3
Rg Coefficient to account for group effect.........................................
.................................................
........ 9.8.2.1
RM Coefficient to account for influence of P- on P-Δ  App. G.2.2
Rn Nominal strength,
strength, specified in Chapters 2 through 11 ..........................
.......................... 2.3.3
Rn Nominal slip resistance, N ............................................
...................................................................
......................... 10.3.8
Rn Nominal strength
strength of the applicable force transfer mechanism, N .......... 9.6.3
Rnwl Total nominal strength of longitudinally loaded fillet welds, as determined in
Total
accordance with TABLE 10-5, N ..........................................................
.......................................................... 10.2.4
R Total nominal strength of transversely loaded fillet welds, as determined in
Total
nwt
accordance with TABLE 10-5 without the alternate in Section 10.2.4 a, N
...........................................
.................................................................
............................................
.............................................
......................... 10.2.4
Rnx Horizontal component of the nominal
nominal strength of a w
weld
eld group, N ..... 10.2.4
Rny Vertical component of the nominal strength of a weld group, N .......... 10.2.4
Rp Position effect factor for shear
shear studs............................................
....................................................
........ 9.8.2.1
Rpc Web plastification factor .......................................................
.........................................................................
.................. 6.4.1
Rpg Bending strength reduction factor .........................
...............................................
.................................
........... 6.5.2
RPJP Reduction factor for reinforced
reinforced or nonreinforced
nonreinforced transverse partial-joint-
penetration PJP groove welds..........
welds..................
................
................
.................
........................... App. C.3
................
Rpt Web plastification factor corresponding to the tension flange yi yielding
elding limit
state ..........................................
................................................................
............................................
........................................
.................. 6.4.4
Rt Ratio of the expected tensile strength to the specified minimum tensile strength
Fu, as related to overstrength in material yield stress, Ry ................ 12.1.2.2
SBC 306-CR-18 9
LIST OF SYMBOLS
Ru Required strength ...................................

.........................................................
................................................ 2.3.3
..........................
Ry Ratio of the expected yield stress to the specified minimum yield stress, Fy
...........................................
.................................................................
............................................
...........................................
..................... 12.1.2.2
S Elastic section modulus, mm3 ...........................................
.................................................................
...................... 6.8.2
S Spacing of secondary members, m ...........................................
...................................................
........ App. B.1
Sc Elastic section modulus to the toe in compression relative to the axis of
3
bending, mm ....................
..........................................
............................................
.............................................. 6.10.3
........................
Se modulus about major axis, mm3 ................................. 6.7.2
Effective section modulus
Sip Effective elastic section modulus of welds for in-plane bending TABLE 11-13,
mm3 ....................
..........................................
.............................................
.............................................
.........................................
...................11.4
Smin mm3 ...... 6.12
Lowest elastic section modulus relative to the axis of bending, mm
Sop Effective elastic section modulus of welds for o out-of-plane bending TABLE
ut-of-plane bending
3
11-13, mm ........................................................................................ 11.4
Sxc, S xt Elastic section modulus referred to compression compression and tension flanges,
3
respectively, mm ..............................................................................
................................................................................Table 2-2
Sx Elastic section modulus taken about the x-axis, mm3 .............................
............................. 6.2.2
Sy Elastic section modulus taken about the y-axis. For For a channel, the minimu minimum m
3
section modulus, mm ............................................
...................................................................
.................................
.......... 6.6.2
T Nominal forces and deformations
deformations due to the design-basis design-basis fire defined in
Appendix Section
Section D.2.1 ...................
..........................................
..............................................
......................... App. D.1.4
Tb Minimum fastener tension given in TABLE 10-6, N .............................
............................. 10.3.8
Tc Design torsional strength, N-mm ..........................................
............................................................
.................. 8.3.2
Tn Nominal torsional
torsional strength, N-mm................
.........................
.................
................
................
.................
........... 8.3.1
Tr Required torsional strength, N-mm.................
.........................
................
................
.................
.................
........ 8.3.2
Tu Required tension force, N ............................................
...................................................................
......................... 10.3.9
U Shear lag factor...........................................
.................................................................
............................................
.........................
... 4.3
U Utilization ratio ...........................................
.................................................................
..........................................
.................... 11.2.2
Ubs Reduction coefficient, used in calculating block shear rupture strength 10.4.3
Up Stress index for primary members ...................................................
..................................................... App. B.2
Us Stress index for secondary members ............................................
.................................................
..... App. B.2
V Nominal shear force between the steel beam and the concrete slab transferred
by steel anchors, N ..............................
.....................................................
.............................................
..........................
.... 9.3.2.3
Vc Design shear strength, N ............................................
..................................................................
.............................
....... 8.3.2
Vc1 Smaller of the design shear strengths in the adjacent web panels with Vn as
defined in Section 7.2.1 , N ..........................................................
.....................................................................
........... 7.3.3
Vc2 Smaller of the design shear strengths in the adjacent web panels with V n as
defined in Section 7.3.2 , N ..........................................
.................................................................
..........................
... 7.3.3
Vn Nominal shear
shear strength, N ............................................
...................................................................
.............................
...... 7.1
Vr Larger of the required shear
shear strengths in the adjacent web
web panels, N ... 7.3.3
Vr Required shear strength,
strength, N .............................
...................................................
........................................
.................. 8.3.2
Vr Required longitudinal shear force to be transferred to the steel or concrete, N
...........................................
.................................................................
............................................
.............................................
..........................
... 9.6.2
SBC 306-CR-18 10
LIST OF SYMBOLS
Yi Gravity load applied at level i from the LRFD load combination, N, 3.2.2.2 ,
App. F.3.2
Z Plastic section modulus
modulus about the axis of bending, mm3 ..................... 6.7.1
mm
Zb Plastic section modulus
modulus of branch about the axis of bending, mm3 ...... 11.3.1
bending,
Zx mm3 .................................... 6.2.1
Plastic section modulus about the x-axis, mm
Zy Plastic section modulus about the y-axis, mm3 .....................
.......................................
..................6.6.1
a Clear distance between transverse stiffeners,

stiffeners, mm ................................
................................ 6.13.2
a Distance between connectors, mm ...........................................
.............................................................
.................. 5.6
a Shortest distance from edge of pin hole to edge of member measured parallel
to the
t he direction of force, mm ......................................
............................................................
.............................
....... 4.5.1
a Half the length of the non-welded root face in the direction of the thickness of
the tension-loaded plate, mm .............................
...................................................
...............................
......... App.
App. C.3
a Weld length along both edges of the cover plate termination to the beam or
girder, mm ............................................
..................................................................
............................................
...........................
..... 6.13.3
aw Ratio of two times the web area in compression compression due to application of major
axis bending moment alone to the area of the compression fl flange
ange components
...........................................
.................................................................
............................................
.............................................
..........................
... 6.4.2
b Full width of leg in compression, mm ..........................................
...................................................
......... 6.10.3
b For flanges of I-shaped members, half the full-flange width, bf ; for flanges of
channels, the full nominal dimension of the flange, mm .........................
......................... 6.6.2
b Full width of longest leg, mm ............................................
...................................................................
.........................
.. 5.7
b Width of unstiffened
unstiffened compression element; width of stiffened compression
element, mm ............................................
..................................................................
............................................
..........................
.... 2.4.1
b Width of the leg resisting the shear force, mm ...........................................
........................................... 7.4
b Inside width of a box section, mm ............................................
...................................................
....... 12.4.3.5.2
bcf Width of column flange, mm ............................................................
...............................................................
... 10.10.6
be Reduced effective width, mm .........................................
...............................................................
.............................
....... 5.7
be Effective edge distance for calculation of tensile rupture strength of of pin-
connected member,
member, mm ......................................
............................................................
.....................................
............... 4.5.1
beoi Effective width of

of the branch face welded to the chord,
chord, mm................. 11.2.3
beov Effective width of
of the branch face welded to the overlapped
overlapped brace, mm11.2.3
mm11.2.3
bf Width of flange, mm ...................................................
.........................................................................
.............................
....... 2.4.1
bfc Width of compression flange, mm ............................................
...........................................................
............... 6.4.2
bft Width of tension flange, mm..........................................
.................................................................
..........................
... 7.3.1
bl Length of longer leg of angle,
angle, mm ...........................................
.............................................................
.................. 5.5
bs Length of shorter leg of angle,
angle, mm ..........................................
............................................................
.................. 5.5
bs Stiffenerr width for one-sided stiffeners, mm ...................................
Stiffene App. E.3.2
................................... App.
d Nominal fastener diameter,
diameter, mm ............................................
............................................................
................ 10.3.3
d Nominal bolt diameter,
diameter, mm ...........................................
.................................................................
...................... 10.3.10
d Full nominal depth of the section, mm ...............................
..................................
... 2.4.1 , 10.10.3
d Depth of rectangular bar, mm ...........................................
...............................................................
.................... 6.11.2
d Diameter,
Diameter, mm ..........................................
................................................................
............................................
...........................
..... 10.7
SBC 306-CR-18 11
LIST OF SYMBOLS
d Diameter of pin, mm ..........................................

............................................................................... 4.5.1
.....................................
d Overall beam depth, mm ............................................
............................................................
.................. TABLE 12-2
db Depth of beam, mm
mm ......................
............................................
.............................................
.................................
.......... 10.10.6
db Nominal diameter
diameter (body or shank diameter), mm ............................
............................ App. C.4
dc Depth of column, mm .............................................
.......................................................................... 10.10.6
.............................
e Eccentricity in a truss connection, positive being away from the branches, mm
...........................................
.................................................................
............................................
.............................................
......................... 11.2.1
emid-ht Distance from the edge of steel headed stud stud anchor shan shankk to the steel deck
web, mm ...........................................
.................................................................
............................................
..............................
........ 9.8.2.1
fc Specified compressive strength of concrete, MPa ...............................
............................... 9.2.1.2
fc(T) Compressive strength of concrete at elevated temperature, MPa ............... ...............
........................................................................................................ App. D2.3.2
fo Stress due to D  R (D  nominal dead load, R  nominal load due to
rainwater exclusive of the ponding contribution), MPa .........................
.........................App.
B.2
fra Required axial stress at the point of consideration, MPa ...................
..........................
....... 8.2
frbw, frbz Required flexural stress at the point
point of consideration, MPa......................
...................... 8.2
frv Required shear stress, MPa ..........................................

.................................................................
......................... 10.3.7
g Transverse center-to-center spacing (gage) between fastener gage lines, mm
...........................................
.................................................................
............................................
.............................................
..........................
... 2.4.3
g Gap between toes of branch members members in a gapped K-connection, K-connection, neglecting
the welds, mm .......................................
.............................................................
............................................
...........................
..... 11.2.1
h Width of stiffened compression element, mm ..........................................
.......................................... 2.4.1
h Height of shear element, mm.........................................
...............................................................
........................ 7.2.1 b
h Clear distance between flanges less the fillet or corner radius for rolled
shapes; distance between adjacent lines of fasteners or the clear distance
between flanges when welds are used
use d for built-up shapes, mm .......... 10.10.4
hc Twice the distance from the center of gravity to the following: the inside face
Twice
of the compression flange less the
t he fillet or corner radius, for rolled shapes;
the nearest line of fasteners
fasteners at the compression flange or the inside faces of
the compression flange when welds are used, for built-up sections, mm 2.4.1
hcc Cross-sectional dimension of the confined core region in composite columns
measured center-to-center of the transverse reinforcement, mm ...... 12.2.5.4
ho Distance between the flange centroids, mm............................................
............................................ 6.2.2
hp Twice the distance from the plastic neutral axis to the nearest line of fasteners
Twice
at the compression flange or the inside face of the compression flange when
welds are used, mm .................................
.......................................................
.............................................
..........................
... 2.4.1
hr Nominal height
height of rib, mm ............................................
...................................................................
....................... 9.8.2.1
k Distance from outer face of flange to the web toe of fillet, mm .......... 10.10.2
kc Coefficient for slender unstiffened element ...........................
.....................................
............Table 2-2
ksc Slip-critical combined tension and shear coefficient ............................
............................ 10.3.9
kv Web plate shear buckling coefficient .....................
...........................................
.................................
........... 7.2.1
l Actual length of end-loaded weld, mm .........................................
..................................................
......... 10.2.2
SBC 306-CR-18 12
LIST OF SYMBOLS
l Length of connection, mm .................................................................Table 4-1

...............................................................
lb Length of bearing, mm ...........................................
..................................................................
..................................
........... 10.7
lc Clear distance, in the direction of the force, between the edge of thehole and
the edge of the adjacent hole or edge of the material, mm ................. 10.3.10
la Length of channel anchor,
anchor, mm
mm ..........................................
.............................................................
................... 9.8.2.2
le Totall effective weld length of groove and fillet
Tota f illet welds to rectangular
rectangular HSS for
weld strength calculations, mm ................................................................. 11.4

lov Overlap length measured along the connecting face of the chord beneath the
two branches, mm .........................................................
...............................................................................
........................
.. 11.2.1
lp Projected length of the overlapping branch
branch on the chord, mm ............ 11.2.1
n Number of nodal braced points within the span ...............................
............................... App. E.3
nb Number of bolts carrying the applied tension.......................................
....................................... 10.3.9
ns Number of slip planes required to permit the connection
connection to slip .......... 10.3.8
nSR Number of stress range
range fluctuations in design life ............................
............................ App. C.3
p Pitch, mm per thread....................
..........................................
.................................................. App. C.3.2
............................
pi Stress . 10.2.4
Ratio of element i deformation to its deformation at maximum Stress
r Radius of gyration, mm ..........................................
.................................................................
....................................
............. 5.2
rcr Distance from instantaneous center of rotation to weld element with minimum
u/r i ratio, mm ...........................................
.................................................................
..........................................
.................... 10.2.4
ri Minimum radius of
of gyration of individual component, mm.......................
....................... 5.6
̄
ri
rt
Distance from instantaneous center of rotation to ith weld element, mm10.2.4
Radius of gyration
gyration of the flange
mm10.2.4
Polar radius of gyration about the shear center, mm ................................
................................ 5.4
flange components in flexural compression plus one-
third of the web area in compression due to Application of major axis bending
moment alone, mm .....................................................
...........................................................................
.............................
....... 6.4.2
rts Effective radius of gyration, mm ...........................................
.............................................................
.................. 6.2.2
rx Radius of gyration about
about the x-axis, mm ..................................
...................................................
................. 5.4
rx Radius of gyration about
about the geometric axis parallel to the connected leg, mm
...........................................
.................................................................
............................................
.............................................
.............................
...... 5.5
ry Radius of gyration about about y-axis, mm .........................
......................................................... 5.4
................................
rz Radius of gyration about
about the minor principal axis, mm ............................
............................ 5.5
s Longitudinal center-to-center spacing spacing (pitch) of any two consecutive holes,
mm ............................................
...................................................................
.............................................
........................................ 2.4.3
..................2.4.3
t Thickness of element, mm ..........................................
................................................................
................................
.......... 5.7
t Thickness of wall, mm ............................................
................................................................................ 5.7
....................................
t Thickness of angle leg, mm ...........................................
..................................................................
......................... 6.10.2
t Width of rectangular bar parallel to axis of bending, mm ................... 6.11.2
t Thickness of connected material, mm ..........................................
.................................................
....... 10.3.10
t Thickness of plate, mm ...........................................
..................................................................
.................................
.......... 4.5.1
t Total
Total thickness of fillers, mm ............................................
................................................................
.................... 10.5.2
t Design wall thickness of HSS member, mm ...............................
............................... 2.4.1 , 11.1.1
SBC 306-CR-18 13
LIST OF SYMBOLS
tb Design wall thickness of HSS branch member, .............................. 11.2.1

member, mm ..............................
tbi Thickness of overlapping
overl apping branch, mm ..............................
..................................................
.................... 11.2.3
tbj Thickness of overlapped branch, mm .................................................
...................................................
.. 11.2.3
tcf Thickness of column flange, mm ...................................
.........................................................
...................... 10.10.6
tf Thickness of flange, mm .............................................
...................................................................
.............................
....... 6.6.2
tf Thickness of loaded
l oaded flange, mm ............................................
..........................................................
.............. 10.10.1
tf Thickness of flange of channel anchor,
anchor, mm .........................................
......................................... 9.8.2.2
tfc Thickness of compression flange, mm ..............................
....................................................
...................... 6.4.2
tp Thickness of plate, mm ...........................................
..................................................................
...............................
........ 11.1.1
tp Thickness of tension loaded plate, mm ....................................
.............................................
......... App. C.3
tst Thickness of web stiffener, mm ..................................................... App. E3.2.1
.....................................................
tw Thickness of web, mm .......................................................
.....................................................................
................Table 2-1
tw Smallest effective weld throat thickness around the perimeter of branch or
plate, mm ..........................................
................................................................
............................................
..................................
............ 11.4
tw ................................................ 9.8.2.2
Thickness of channel anchor web, mm ................................................
w Width of cover plate, mm ...........................................
.................................................................
...........................
..... 6.13.3
w Size of weld leg, mm ...........................................
..................................................................
...................................
............ 10.2.2
w Subscript relating symbol to major principal axis bending .......................
....................... 8.2
w Width of plate, mm ..........................................
................................................................
................................
............Table 4-1
w Leg size of the reinforcing or contouring fillet, if any, in the direction of the
thickness of the tension-loaded plate, mm ............................
........................................
............ App. C.3
wc ht of concrete per unit volume (1500  wc  2500 kg/m3) .............. 9.2.1
Weight
Weig
wr Average
Average width of concrete rib or haunch, mm ........................................
........................................ 9.3.2
x Subscript relating symbol
symbol to strong axis
axis bending ...................................
................................... 8.1.1
xi x component of ri .....................
............................................
............................................................. 10.2.4
......................................
xo, yo Coordinates of the shear center with respect to the centroid, mm............. 5.4
x– Eccentricity of connection, mm .........................................

.......................................................
................Table 4-1
y Subscript relating symbol ..................................... 8.1.1

symbol to weak axis bending .....................................
yi y component of ri ......................
.............................................
.............................................
......................................
................10.2.4
z Subscript relating symbol
symbol to minor principal axis bending .......................
....................... 8.2
Ωo System overstrength factor............................................
...................................................................
......................... 12.2.1
 Reduction factor given by Eq. (10-1) ..................................................... 10.2.2
 Width ratio; the ratio of branch diameter to chord diameter for round HSS;
the ratio of overall branch width to chord width for rectangular HSS . 11.2.1
T Overall brace system stiffness, N-mm/rad ..................................... App. E3.2.1
br Required brace stiffness, N/mm ..................................................... App. E.2.1
.....................................................
eff Effective width ratio; the
the sum of the perimeters of the two branch members in
a K-connection divided by eight times the chord width ................... ..... 11.2.1
........................
eop Effective outside punching parameter

parameter..........................................
...................................................
......... 11.2.3
sec Web distortional stiffness,
stiffness, including the effect of web transversestiffeners, if
SBC 306-CR-18 14
LIST OF SYMBOLS
any, N-mm/rad......................
N-mm/rad.............................................
........................................................ App. E3.2.1
.................................
Tb Required torsional stiffness for nodal bracing,
bracing, N-mm/rad .......... App. E3.2.1
w Section property for unequal
unequal leg angles, positive for short legs in compression
............................................ 6.10.2
and negative for long legs in compression ..........................................
 First-order
First-order interstory drift combinations, mm ..............................
.............................. App. F.3.2
H First-order interstory
interstory drift
drift due to lateral
lateral forces,
forces, mm ................. App.G.2.2
................. App.
i Deformation of weld elements at intermediate stress levels, linearly
Deformation
proportioned to the critical deformation based on distance from the
instantaneous center of rotation,
r otation, ri, mm........................................... 10.2.4
...........................................
mi Deformation
Deformation of weld ...................... 10.2.4
weld element at maximum stress, mm ......................
ui Deformation of weld element at ultimate stress (rupture), usually in element
Deformation
furthest from instantaneous center of rotation, mm.....................
..............................
......... 10.2.4
cu(T) Maximum concrete strain at elevated temperature, % ................App. D2.3.2
 Chord slenderness ratio; the ratio of one-half the diameter to the wall
thickness for round HSS; the ratio of one-half the width to wall thickness for
rectangular HSS ..................................................................................... 11.2.1
 Gap ratio; the ratio of the gap between the branches of a gapped K-
connection to the width of the chord for rectangular HSS .................... 11.2.1
....................
 Load length parameter, applicable only to rectangular HSS; the ratio of the
length of contact of the branch with the chord in the plane of the connection
to the chord width ................................................................................... 11.2.1
 Slenderness parameter ...........................................
..................................................................
.................................
.......... 6.3.2
p Limiting slenderness parameter for compact element ............................... 2.4
...............................
pd Limiting slenderness parameter for plastic design ......................
...........................
..... App. A.2
pf Limiting slenderness parameter for compact flange .............................. 6.3.2
..............................
pw Limiting slenderness parameter for compact web................
........................
................
..............
...... 6.4
r Limiting slenderness parameter for noncompact ......................... 2.4
noncompact element .........................
rf Limiting slenderness parameter for noncompact
noncompact flange ........................ 6.3.2
........................
rw Limiting slenderness parameter for noncompact noncompact web.............................

web............................. 6.4.2
 Mean slip coefficient for Class A or B surfaces, as applicable, or as
established by tests ..........................................
................................................................
......................................
................ 10.3.8
 Resistance factor, specified in Chapters 2 through 11 ...........................
........................... 2.3.3
B Resistance factor for bearing on concrete ...........................................
........................................... 9.6.3.1
b Resistance factor for flexure .........................................
...............................................................
.............................
....... 6.1
c Resistance factor for compression ...........................................
..........................................................
............... 2.3.6
c Resistance factor for axially loaded composite columns .....................
..................... 9.2.1.2
T Resistance factor for torsion .........................................
...............................................................
..........................
.... 8.3.1
t Resistance factor for tension .........................................
...............................................................
.............................
....... 4.2
 anchor in tension ................... 9.8.3.2
Resistance factor for steel headed stud anchor
t
v Resistance factor for shear .........................
...............................................
............................................... 7.1
.........................
SBC 306-CR-18 15
LIST OF SYMBOLS
v Resistance factor for steel headed stud anchor

anchor in shear ...................... 9.8.3.1
......................
sr Minimum reinforcement ratio for longitudinal reinforcing.................... 9.2.1
st The larger of Fyw /Fyst and 1.0 ...........................................
.................................................................
...................... 7.3.3
 Angle of loading
loading measured from the weld longitudinal axis, degrees .. 10.2.4
 Acute angle between the branch
branch and chord, degrees ...........
...........................
................ 11.2.1
i ngle of loading measured from the longitudinal axis of i th weld element,
degrees .............................................
...................................................................
............................................
...............................
......... 10.2.4
b Stiffness reduction parameter ..........................................................
.................................................................
....... 3.2.3
COMMENTARY SYMBOLS
Symbol Definition .............................................
...................................................................
............................................
.........................
... Section
A Angle cross-sectional area, mm2 ..........................................

...............................................................
.....................7.4
7.4
Cf Compression force in concrete slab for fully composite beam; smaller of Fy As
and 0.85fcAc, N ............................................
..................................................................
............................................
......................9.3.2
9.3.2
Fys Static yield stress, MPa ..........................................
......................................................................... 16.2.2
...............................
H Height of anchor, mm ............................................
...................................................................
.................................
.......... 9.8.2
Ig Moment of inertia of gross concrete section about centroidal axis, neglecting
reinforcement, mm4 ......................
............................................
.............................................
.....................................
..............9.2.1
9.2.1
ILB Lower bound moment of inertia, mm4 ....................
..........................................
.................................
...........9.3.2
9.3.2
Ipos Effective moment of inertia for positive moment, mm4 ...........................
........................... 9.3.2
Ineg Effective moment of inertia for negative moment, mm4 ..........................
.......................... 9.3.2
Is Moment of inertia for the structural steel section,mm4...........................
...........................9.3.2
9.3.2
Itr Moment of inertia for the fully composite uncracked transformed section,mm4
...........................................
.................................................................
............................................
.............................................
..................................
...........
...........................................
.................................................................
............................................
................................................ 9.3.2
..........................
Iy Top Moment of inertia of the top flange about an axis through the web, mm4 6.1
Iy Moment of inertia of the entire section about an axis through the web, mm4
… ....................
..........................................
.............................................
.............................................
.............................................
.........................
..6.1
6.1
Ks Secant stiffness, MPa .............................................
.............................................................................. 2.3.5
.................................
MCL Moment at the middle of the unbraced length, N-mm................................
................................ 6.1
MS Moment at service loads, N-mm........................................
N-mm..............................................................
......................2.3.5
2.3.5
MT Torsional moment, N-mm.....................
N-mm...........................................
...................................................... 7.4
................................
Mo Maximum first-order moment within the member due to the transverse
loading, N-mm......................................
N-mm............................................................
............................................
..............................
........ G.2
N Number of cycles to failure ...........................................
..................................................................
............................
..... C.3
Qm Mean value of the load effect Q ............................................
.............................................................. 2.3.3
..................2.3.3
Rcap Minimum rotation capacity ...........................................
..................................................................
..........................
...A.2.2
Rm Mean value of the resistance R .........................................
...............................................................
......................2.3.3
2.3.3
Sr Stress range..........................................
................................................................
............................................
...............................
......... C.3
Ss Section modulus for the structural steel section, referred to the tension flange,
mm3 ....................
..........................................
.............................................
.............................................
........................................
..................9.3.2
9.3.2
SBC 306-CR-18 16
LIST OF SYMBOLS
Str Section modulus for the fully composite uncracked transformed section,
referred to the tension flange of the steel section mm 3 ...........................
........................... 9.3.2
VQ Coefficient of variation of the load effect Q............................................
Q............................................2.3.3
2.3.3
VR Coefficient of variation of the resistance R.............................................
R.............................................2.3.3
2.3.3
Vb Component of the shear force parallel to the angle leg with width b and
thickness t, N ...............................................
.....................................................................
............................................
.........................
... 7.4
acr Distance from the compression face to the neutral axis for a slender section,
mm ............................................
...................................................................
.............................................
...........................................
.....................9.3
9.3
ap Distance from the compression face to the neutral axis for a compact section,
mm ............................................
...................................................................
.............................................
........................................... 9.3
.....................9.3
ay Distance from the compression face to the neutral axis for a noncompact
section, mm ..............................
.....................................................
.............................................
...........................................
.....................9.3
9.3
fv Shear stress in angle, MPa ...........................................
..................................................................
.............................
...... 7.4

k Plate buckling coefficient characteristic of the type of plate edge-restraint5.7
Reliability index ..........................................
................................................................
............................................ 2.3.3
......................2.3.3
 act Actual bracing stiffness provided..........................................

...............................................................
Poisson’s ratio .....................

.....................E.1
................................ G.2
Maximum deflection due to transverse loading, mm ................................
............................................
.............................................
............................................
........................
.. 5.7
 Rotation at service loads, rad ...........................................

.................................................................
......................2.3.5
2.3.5
SBC 306-CR-18 17
GLOSSARY
Glossary
Block shear rupture. In a connection , limit state of

Terms defined in this Glossary are italicized in the
tension rupture along
along one path an
andd shear yielding or
Glossary and where they first appear within a section
shear rupture along another path.
or long paragraph throughout the code.
B oundary me
memberr . Portion along wall or diaphragm
mbe
Notes:
(1) Terms designated with * are usually qualified edge
and/orstrengthened
longitudinalwithsteel
structural steel sections
reinforcement and
by the type of load effect; for example, transverse reinforcement.
nominal tensile strength, design compressive Braced frame. Essentially vertical truss system that
strength, and design flexural strength. provides resistance to lateral forces and provides
(2) Term
Termss designated with ** are usually qualified by stability for the structura
structurall system.
the type of component; for example, web local Bracing. Member or system that provides stiffness
buckling and flange local bending. and strength to limit the out-of-plane movement of
another member at a brace point.
Active fire
Active fir e protection. Building materials and systems
rote B r anch m
mem
embeber.r. In an HSS connection, member that
that are activated by a fire to mitigate adverse effects terminates at a chord member or main member.
or to notify people to take some action to mitigate Buckling. Limit state of sudden change in the
adverse effects. geometry of a structure or any
any of its elements under a
Amplifi ed se
Amp seism
ismic
ic load. Seismic load effect including
loa critical loading condition.
overstrength factor. Buckling strength. Strength for instability limit
states.
Applicab
Applica ble build ing code. Building code under which
uilding
the structure is designed. Buckling-restrained brace. A prefabricated, or
Authori
Autho ri ty ha
havving jurisd
jur isdiction (A H J ). Organization,
iction manufactured, brace element consisting of a steel
political subdivis
subdivision,
ion, office or individual charged core and a buckling-restraining system as described
with the responsibility of administering and enforcing in Section 12.4 and qualified by testing.
the provisions of the applicable building code. B uckli
uckling-r
ng-r est
strr ai ned
ned br aced
ced fr
fraame (B R B F ). A
Average
Average ri
rib
bwwidt h. In a formed steel deck, average
idth diagonally braced frame employing buckling
width of the rib of a corrugation. restrained braces.
B atten plate.. Plate rigidly connected to two parallel

atten plate B uilt-
ui lt-up
up m
mem
embe
ber,r, cr
cross
oss se
secti
ction,
on, section, sshape
hape..
components of a built-up column or beam designed Member, cross section, section or shape fabricated
to transmit shear between the components. from structural steel elements that are welded or
bolted together.
together.
B eam. Nominally horizontal structural member that
has the primary function of resisting bending Camber. Curvature fabricated into a beam or truss so
moments. as to compensate for deflection induced by loads.
B eam
am-colu mn. Structural member that resists both
-colum C har
harpy
py V -notch i mpa
pact test. Standard dynamic test
ct test.
axial force and bending moment. measuring notch toughness of a specimen.
Bearing . In a connection, limit state of shear forces Chord member. In an HSS connection, primary
transmitted by the mechanical fastener to the member that extends through a truss connection.
connection elements. Cladding. Exterior covering of structur
structure.
e.
Bearing (local compressive yielding) . Limit state of Cold-formed steel structural member . Shape
local compressive yielding due to the action of a manufactured by press-braking blanks sheared from
member bearing against another member or surface. sheets, cut lengths of coils or plates, or by roll
B eari ng
ng-type
-type connec on. Bolted connection where
connectition. forming cold- or hot-rolled coils or sheets; both
shear force
forcess are transmitted by the bolt bearing forming operations
temperature, that is,being performed
without manifestataddition
ambientofroom
heat
against the connection elements.
such as would be required for hot forming.
SBC 306-CR-18 18
GLOSSARY
Collector . Also known as drag strut; member that Composite slab. Reinforced concrete slab supported
serves to transfer loads between floor diaphragms on and bonded to a formed steel deck that acts as a
and the members of the lateral force resisting system. diaphragm to transfer load to and between elements
of the seismic force resisting system.
Column. Nominally vertical structural member that
has the primary function of resisting axial Concrete breakout surface. The surface delineating a
compressive force. volume of concrete
concrete surrou
surrounding
nding a steel headed stud
anchor that separates from the remaining concrete.
Column base. Assemblage of structural shapes,
plates, connectors, bolts and rods at the base of a Concrete Limit state of compressive
column used to transmit forces between the steel failure in crushing.
concrete having reached the ultimate
superstructure and the foundation. strain.
Compact section. Section capable of developing a Concrete haunch. In a composite floor system
fully plastic stress distribution and possessing a constructed using a formed steel deck, the section of
rotation capacity of approximately three before the solid concrete that results from stopping the deck on
onset of local buckling. each side of the gir
girder
der..
Compartmentation. Enclosure of a building space C oncr
oncrete beam.. Beam totally encased in
ete--encased beam
with elements that have a specific fire endurance. concrete cast integrally with the slab.
C om
omple
plete
te-j-joint-pe
oint-pene
netration
tration ((C
C J P) gr oov
ove
e w
we
eld. Concrete-encased shapes. Structural steel sections
Groove weld in which weld metal extends through encased in concrete.
the joint thickness, except as permitted for HSS
Connection. Combination of structural elements and
connections .
joints used to transmit forces between two or more
Composite. Condition in which steel and concrete members.
elements and members work as a unit in the
Construction documents. Design drawings,
distribution of internal forces.
specifications, shop drawings and erection
Composite beam. Structural steel beam in contact drawings.
with and acting compositely with a reinforced
Continuity plates. Column stiffeners at the top and
concrete slab.
bottom of the panel zone; also known as transverse
Composite component. Member, connecting element stiffeners.
or assemblage in which steel and concrete elements
Cope. Cutout made in a structura
structurall member to remove
work as a unit in the distribution of internal forces,
a flange and conform to the shape of an intersecting
with the exception of the special case of composite
member.
beams where steel anchors
anchors are embedded in a solid
concrete slab or in a slab cast on formed steel deck. Coupling beam. Structural steel or composite beam
connecting adjacent reinforced concrete wall
Composite brace. Concrete-encased structural steel
elements so that they act together to resist lateral
section (rolled
section used as aordiagonal
built-up) or concrete filled steel
brace. loads. Demand critical weld. Weld so designated by
these Provisions.
C om
ompo
posi
site
te co
colu
lummn. Concrete-encased structural steel
Cover plate. Plate welded or bolted to the flange of
section (rolled or built-up) or concrete-filled steel
a member to increase cross-sectional area, section
section used as a column.
modulus or moment of inertia.
C om
ompo
posi
site
te i nte
nterr medi at
ate
e m
mom
ome
ent fr am
ame
e (C -I M F ) .
Cross connection. HSS connection in which forces
Composite moment frame meeting the requirements
in branch members or connecting elements
of Section 12.4.2 .
transverse to the main member are primarily
C omposi
site
te or di na
narr y brac
brace
ed fr
fraame (C(C-OB
-OB F ) . equilibrated by forces in other branch members or
Composite braced frame meeting the requirements of connecting elements on the opposite side of the main
Section 12.4.3 . member.
C om
ompo
posi
site
te or dinar
dinaryy m
mom
ome
ent fr
fram
ame
e ( C -OM
-O M F ) . Design-basis fire. Set of conditions that define the
Composite moment frame meeting the requirements development of a fire and the spread of combustion
of Section 12.4.1 . products throughout a building or portion thereof.
SBC 306-CR-18 19
GLOSSARY
Design drawings. Graphic and pictorial documents Doubler. Plate added to, and parallel with, a beam
showing the design, location and dimensions of the or column web to increase strength at locations of
work. These documents generally include plans, concentrated forces.
elevations, sections, details, schedules, diagrams and
Drift. Lateral deflection of structure.
notes.
E cce
ccentri
ntrica
cally
lly br aced
ced fr ame ( E B F ). Diagonally
fra
Design load. Applied load determined in accordance
braced frame meeting the requirements of Section
with either LRFD load combinations.
12.4.3 that has at least one end of each diagonal brace
D esign
sig n strength*. Resistance factor
strength* factor multiplied by the connectedbeam-to-brace
another to a beam withconnection
a defined eccentricity from
or a beam-to-
nominal strength, Rn.
column connection.
Design wall thickness. HSS wall thickness assumed in
the determination of section properties. E ff
ffeecti
cti ve leng th. Length of an otherwise identical
length
column with the same strength when analyzed with
Design earthquake. The earthquake represented by pinned end conditions.
the design response spectrum as specified in the
applicable building code. E ff
ffeecti
cti ve leng
length
th fac
factor, K . Ratio between the effective
tor,
length and the unbraced length of the member.
Design story drift. Calculated story drift, including
the effect of expected inelastic action, due to design E ff
ffeective ne arr ea. Net area modified to account for
nett a
level earthquake forces as determined by the the effect of shear lag.
applicable building code. E ff
ffeecti
cti ve sec
section
tion modulus. Section modulus
odulus
D i ag ona
onall br
brac e. Inclined structural member carrying
ace reduced to account for buckling of slender
primarily axial force in a braced frame.
frame. compression elements.
Diagonal stiffener . Web stiffener at column panel E ff
ffeecti dth. Reduced width of a plate or slab
cti ve wi dth.
zone oriented diagonally to the flanges, on one or with an assumed uniform stress distribution which
both sides of the web. produces the same effect on the behavior of a
structural member as the actual plate or slab width
Diaphragm. Roof, floor or other membrane or bracing with its nonuniform stress distribution.
system that transfers in-plane force
forcess to the lateral
resisting system.
force resisting E last
lastii c ana
analysi s. Structural analysis based on the
lysis.
assumption that the structure
structure returns to its original
Diaphragm plate. Plate possessing in-plane shear geometry on removal of the load.
stiffness and strength, used to transfer forces to the
supportingg elements.
supportin E levat
levated
ed te tem
mper
per atur
atures
es. Heating conditions
experienced by building elements or structures as a
Direct analysis method. Design method for stability result of fire which are in excess of the anticipated
that captures the effects of residual stresses and ambient conditions.
initial out-of-plumbness of frames by reducing
stiffness and applying notional loads in a second- E ncased comcompoposi
site
te m
mem ber.r. Composite member
embe
order analysis. consistingg of a structural concrete member and one or
consistin
more embedded steel shapes.
Direct bond interaction. In a composite section,
mechanism by which force
force is transferred between E ncased com
composi
posite
te b bea
eam.
m. Composite beam
steel and concrete by bond stress. completely enclosed in reinforced concrete.
Distortional failure. Limit state of an HSS truss E ncased co
comp
mposi te column. Structural steel column
osite
connection based on distortion of a rectangular HSS completely encased in reinforced concrete.
chord member into a rhomboidal shape. E nd panell. Web panel
pane panel with an adjacent panel on one
Distortional stiffness. Out-of-plane flexural stiffness side only.
of web. turr n. Length of fillet weld that continues
E nd r etu
Double curvature. Deformed shape of a beam with one around a corner in the same plane.
or more inflection points within the span. E ngi ne
nee
er of re cor d. Licensed professional
r ecor
Double-concentrated forces. Two equal and responsible for sealing the design drawings and
opposite forces applied normal to the same flange, specifications
specifications.
forming a couple.
SBC 306-CR-18 20
GLOSSARY
E ngi ne
nee
er of rre corr d. Licensed professional
eco F i ni
nishe
shed
d sur face.. Surfaces fabricated with a
surface
responsible for sealing the contract documents. roughnesss height value m
roughnes measured
easured in accordance with
ANSI/ASME B46.1 that is equal to or less than 500.
E xpa
xpansi
nsion
on ro
rocker. Support with curved surface on
cker.
which a member bears that can tilt to accommodate Fire. Destructive burning, as manifested by any or
expansion. all of the following: light, flame, heat or smoke.
E xpa
xpansi
nsion ller . Round steel bar on which a
on r oller ir e bar r i er . Element of construction formed of fire-
F ire
member bears that can roll to accommodate resisting materials and tested in accordance with an
expansion. approved standard fire resistance
resistance test, to demonstrate
compliance with the applicable building code.
E xpe
pecte
cted
d tte
ensile
nsi le st ng th*. Tensile strength of a
strr ength
member, equal to the specified minimum tensile F ire
ir e re
resistance. Property of assemblies that prevents
sistance
strength, Fu, multiplied by Rt. or retards
retards the passage of excess
excessive
ive heat, hot gases or
flames under conditions of use and enables them to
E xpe
pecte
cted
d yi
yieeld streng th. Yield strength in tension of
strength.
continue to perform a stipulated function.
a member, equal to the expected yield stress
multiplied by Ag. F i r st
st-o
-orr der analysii s. Structural analysis in which
nalys
equilibrium conditions are formulated on the
E xpe
pecte
cted
d yie strr ess. Yield stress of the material,
yi eld st
undeformed structure; second- order effects are
second-order
equal to the specified minimum yield stress, F y,
neglected.
multiplied by R y.
Fitted bearing stiffener. Stiffener used at a support
yebar.r. Pin-connected tension member of uniform
E yeba
or concentrated load that fits tightly against one or
thickness, with forged or thermally cut head of
both flanges of
of a beam so as to transmit load through
greater width than the body, proportioned to provide
approximately equal strength in the head and body. bearing.
F lare
lar e beve
bevell gr
g r oo
oove
ve weld. Weld in a groove formed
weld.
F ace be
beari
ari ng plates. Stiffeners attached to structural
plates.
by a member with a curved surface in contact with
steel beams that are embedded in reinforced concrete
a planar member.
walls or columns. The plates are located at the face of
the reinforced concrete to provide confinement and to F lare V -g
-grr ooveweld. Weld in a groove formed by two
weld.
transfer loads to the concrete through direct bearing. members with curved surfaces
surfaces..
F act
actored load. Product of a load factor and the
ored F lashoverr . Transition to a state of total surface
lashove
nominal load. Fastener. Generic term for bolts, rivets involvement in a fire of combustible materials within
or other connecting devices. an enclosure.
Fatigue. Limit state of crack initiation and growth dth. Nominal width
F lat wi dth. width of rectangular HSS minus
resulting from repeated application of live loads. twice the outside
outside corner radius
radius.. In the absence of
knowledge of the corner radius, the flat width may
sur face.. Contact surface of connection
F aying surface
be taken as the total section width minus three times
elements transmitting a shear force.
F i lllled
ed co
com
mposi
posite
te m
mem
embe
ber.r. Composite member the thickness.
F lexur
lexuraal b
buckling
uckling . Bucklin
Bucklingg mode in which a
consisting of a shell of HSS filled with structural
compression member deflects laterally without
concrete.
twist or change in cross-sectional shape.
F i lled co
com
mpo
posi
site
te column. HSS filled with structural
column.
F lexur
lexuraal-to
l-torr si
sioona
nall buckli ng. Buckling mode in
uckling
concrete.
which a compression member bends and twists
Filler . Plate used to build up the thickness of one simultaneously without change in cross-sectional
component. shape.
F i ller m
metal. Metal or alloy added in making a
etal. ce. Resultant of distribution of stress over a
F orce.
welded joint. prescribedd area.
prescribe
F i lle
llett weld. Weld of generally triangular cross
we Formed section. See cold-formed steel structural
section made between intersecting surfaces of member.
elements.
Formed steel deck. In composite construction, steel
F i llet we
weld
ld rei
reinf
nforcement. Fillet welds added to
orceme cold formed into a decking profile used as a
groove
groo ve welds. permanent concrete form.
SBC 306-CR-18 21
GLOSSARY
F ully
ull y com
compo
posi
site
te b
beam. Composite beam that has a
eam I ne
nelast
lastii c a
analy
nalysi s. Structural analysis that takes into
sis.
sufficient number of steel headed stud anchors to account inelastic material behavior, including plastic
develop the nominal plastic flexural strength of the analysis .
composite section.
I n-pla
n-plane
ne i nsta
nstab ty. Limit state involving buckling in
bi lility
F ully
ully rre
estr
strain
aine
ed mom
ome
ent co
connection.
nnection. Connection the plane of the frame or the member.
capable of transferring moment with negligible
I nst
nsta ty. Limit state reached in the loading of a
abi lility
rotation between connected members.
structural component, frame or structure in which a
Gage. Transverse
rs.
fasteners
fastene
center-to-center spacing of slight disturbance in the loads or geometry produces
large displacements.
G app
apped
ed connecti on. HSS truss connection with a
connection. I nte
nterr mediat
diate
e mom
ome
ent fr
fraame ( I M F ) . Moment frame
gap or space on the chord face between intersecting system that meets the requirements of Section 12.3.2
branch members. .
G eom
ome
etri axiss. Axis parallel to web, flange or angle
tricc axi I ntrod
ntroduct length. In an encased composite
uctii on length.
leg. column, the length along which the column force is
assumed to be transferred into or out of the steel
Girder . See Beam.
shape.
Girder filler. In a composite floor system
I nve
nverr ted-V
ted-V-br
-brac
ace f r ame. See V-braced frame.
ed fr
constructed using a formed steel deck, narrow piece
of sheet steel used as a fill between the edge of a Joint. Area where two or more ends, surfaces or
deck sheet and the flange of a girder. edges are attached. Categorized by type of fastener
or weld used and method of force transfer.
Relatively smooth surface groove or cavity
Gouge.
resulting from plastic deformation or removal of JJo
oint ecce
ccent
ntri ity.. In an HSS truss connection ,
ri city
material. perpendicular distance from chord member center of
gravity to intersection of branch member work points.
Gravity load. Load acting in the downward direction,
such as dead and live loads. k-area. The region of the web that extends from the
tangent point of the web and the flange- web fillet a
G r i p (of b
bolt)) . Thickness of material through which a
olt
distance 38 mm into the web beyond the k
bolt passes.
dimension.
G r oo
oove
ve weld. Weld in a groove between connection
weld.
K -brace
-br aced
d fr ame. A braced-frame configuration in
ame
D1.1/D1.1M..
elements. See also AWS D1.1/D1.1M
which braces connect to a column at a location with
G uss
usset plate.. Plate element connecting truss
et plate no out-of-plane support.
members or a strut or brace to a beam or column.
K -conne ctii on. HSS connection in which forces in
-connect
H eat flux . Radiant energy per unit surface area. branch members or connecting elements transverse
to the main member are primarily equilibriated by
H eat rre
elea
generatedlease
se arrat
by e. Ratematerial.
ate
burning at which thermal energy is forcess in other branch members or connecting
force
elements on the same side of the main member.
High-strength bolt. Fastener in compliance with
ASTM A325, A325M, A490, A490M, F1852, Lacing. Plate, angle or other steel shape, in a lattice
F2280 or an alternate fastener as permitted in Section configuration, that connects two steel shapes
10.3.1 . together.
H i g hly d
ducti
uctile berr . A member expected to
le membe L ap joint. Joint between two overlapping connection
undergo significant plastic rotation (more than 0.02 elements in parallel planes.
rad) from either flexure or flexural buckling under the Lateral bracing. Member or system that is designed
design earthquake. to inhibit lateral buckling or lateral- torsional
buckling of structural members.
H ori zo
zonta shear.r. In a composite beam, force at the
ntall shea
interface between steel and concrete surfaces. Lateral force resisting system. Structural system
HSS. Square, rectangular or round hollow structural designed to resist lateral loads and provide stability
for the structure as a whole.
steel
tubingsection
productproduced in accordance with a pipe or
specification.
specification. Lateral load. Load acting in a lateral direction, such
as wind or earthquake effects.
SBC 306-CR-18 22
GLOSSARY
Lateral-torsional buckling. Buckli ng mode of a

Buckling Local yielding**. Yielding that occurs in a local area
flexural member involving
involving deflection out of the of an element.
plane of bending occurring simultaneou
simultaneously
sly with twist
Lowest anticipated service temperature (LAST). The
about the shear center of the cross section.
lowest 1-hour average temperature with a 100-year
Leaning column. Column designed to carry gravity mean recurrence interval.
loads only, with connections that are not intended to
L R F D ( loa
load
d and r esi
sista
stance
nce fact
facto sigg n) . Method of
or desi
provide resistance to lateral loads.
proportioning structur
structural al components such that the
Length effects. Consideration of the reduction in design strength equals or exceeds the required
strength of a member based on its
i ts unbraced length. strength of the component under the action of the
LRFD load combinations.
Lightweight concrete. Structural concrete with an
equilibrium density of 1840 kg/m3 or less as L R F D loa
load
d com
combi na tion. Load combination in the
nation
determined by ASTM C567. applicable building code intended for strength des
design
ign
(load and resistance factor design).
Limit state. Condition in which a structure or
component becomes unfit for service and is judged Main member. In an HSS connection, chord member,
either to be no longer
l onger useful for its intended function column or other HSS member to which branch
(serviceab ility limit state) or to have reached its
serviceability members or other connecting elements are attached.
ultimate load-carrying capacity (strength limit state).
Mecha
Mec nism.. Structural system that includes a
hanism
Link. In EBF, the segment of a beam that is located sufficient number of real hinges, plastic hinges or
between the ends of the connections of two diagonal both, so as to be able to articulate in one or more rigid
braces or between the end of a diagonal brace and a body modes.
column. The
distance length
between the link
theofends is defined
of two asbraces
diagonal the clear
or Member brac
Memb racee. Member that provides stiffness and
strength to control movement of another member out-
between the diagonal brace and the column face.
of-the plane of the frame at the braced points.
Link intermediate web stiffeners. Vertical web
Mi ll sc
scale. Oxide surface coating on steel formed by
ale.
stiffeners placed within the link in EBF.
the hot rolling process.
Link rotation angle. Inelastic angle between the link
M
Mooment conne ctii on. Connection that transmits
connect
and the beam outside of the link when the total story
bending moment be
between
tween co
connecte
nnectedd members
members..
drift is equal to the design story drift.
Moderat
Mode rate uctile member. A member expected to
ely duct
Load-carrying reinforcement. Reinforcement in
undergo moderate plastic rotation (0.02rad or less)
composite members designed and detailed to resist
from either flexure or flexural buckling under the
the required loads.
design earthquake.
Load. Force or other action that results from the
Force
Moment fr
Mome ame. Framing system that provides
fra
weight of building materials, occupants and their
resistancee to lateral loads and provides stability to the
resistanc
possessions,or restrained
environmental effects, differentia
differentiall structural
structural system, primarily by shear and flexure of the
movement dimensional changes.
framing members and their connections .
Load effect. For ces, stresses and deformations
Forces
Negative flexural strength. Flexural strength of a
produced in a structura
structurall component by the applied
composite beam in regions with tension due to
loads.
flexure on the top surface.
Load factor . Factor that accounts for deviations of
Net area. Gross area reduced to account for removed
the nominal load from the actual load, for
material.
uncertainties in the analysis that transforms the load
into a load effect and for
for the prob- ability that more N od
odal
al br
brac e. Brace that prevents lateral movement or
ace
than one extreme load will occur simultaneou
simultaneously.
sly. twist independently of other
other braces at adjacent brace
points (see relative brace).
L oca ndii ng* * . Limit state of large deformation of
call bend
a flange under a concentrated transverse force. Nominal dimension. Designated or theoretical
dimension,, as in tables of section properties.
dimension
Local buckling**. Limit state of buckling of a
compression element within a cross section. Nominal load. Magnitude of the load specified by the
applicable building code.
SBC 306-CR-18 23
GLOSSARY
N omi na heii ght. In a formed steel deck, height of

nall rrii b he Percent elongation. Measure of ductilit
ductility,
y, determined
deck measured from the underside of the lowest in a tensile test as the maximum elongation of the
point to the top of the highest point. gage length divided by the original gage length
expressed as a percentage.
Nominal strength* . Strength of a structure or
component (without the resistance factor or safety Pipe. See HSS.
factor applied) to resist load effects, as determined in
Pitch. Longitudinal center-to-center spacing of
accordance with this code.
rs. Center-to-center spacing of bolt threads
fasteners
fastene
Noncompact section. Section that can develop the along axis of bolt.
yield stress in its compression elements before local
Plastic analysis. Structural analysis based on the
buckling occurs, but cannot develop a rotation
assumption of rigid-plastic behavior,
behavior, ththat
at is, that
capacity of three.
equilibrium is satisfied and the stress is at or below
Nondestructive testing. Inspection procedure the yield stress
stress throughout the structure.
wherein no material is destroyed and the integrity
Plastic hinge. Fully yielded zone that forms in a
of the material or component is not affected.
structural member when the plastic moment is
Notch toughness. Energy absorbed at a specified attained.
temperature as measured in the Charpy V-notch
Plastic moment. Theoretical resisting moment
impact test.
developed within a fully yielded cross section.
Notional load. Virtual load applied in a structur
structural
al
Plastic stress distribution method. In a composite
analysis to account for destabilizing effects that are
member, method for determining stresses assuming
not otherwise accounted for in the design provisio
provisions.
ns.
that the steel section and the concrete in the cross
Ordinary cantilever column system (OCCS). A section are fully plastic.
seismic force resisting system in which the seismic
Plastification. In an HSS connection
connection, limit state based
forces are resisted by one or more columns that are
on an out-of-plane flexural yield line mechanism in
cantilevered from the foundation or from the
the chord at a branch member connection.
diaphragm level below and that meets the
requirements of Section 12.3.3 . P last
lastii c hing
hingee. Yielded zone that forms in a structural
member when the plastic moment is attained. The
Or
Ordinar
dinaryy co
conce
ncentri
ntri cally
cally b
brr ac
ace
ed fr am
ame
e ( OC
OCBB F ).
member is assumed to rotate further as if hinged,
Diagonally braced frame meeting the requirements of
except that such rotation is restrained by the plastic
Section 12.3.4 in which all members of the braced-
moment.
frame system are subjected primarily to axial forces.
Plate girder. Built-up beam.
Ord
Or di na
narr y m
mo
oment fr
fra (OMFF ). Moment frame
ame (OM
system that meets the requirements of Section 12.3.1 Plug weld. Weld made in a circular hole in one
. element of a joint fusing that element to another
element.
Out-of-plane buckling . Limit state of a beam, column
or beam-column involving lateral or lateral-torsional Ponding. Retention of water due solely to the
buckling. deflection of flat roof framing.
Overlapped connection. HSS truss connection in Positive flexural strength. Flexural strength of a
which intersecting branch members overlap. composite beam in regions with compression due
to flexure on the top surface.
Panel zone. Web area of beam-to-column
connection delineated by the extension of beam Pretensioned bolt. Bolt tightened to the specified
and column flanges through the connection, minimum pretension.
transmitting moment through a shear panel. Pretensioned joint. Joint with high-strength bolts
Partial-joint-penetration (PJP) groove weld. Groove tightened to the specified minimum pretension.
weld in which the penetration is intentionally less
Properly developed. Reinforcing bars detailed to
than the complete thickness of the connected yield in a ductile manner before crushing of the
element. concrete occurs. Bars meeting the provisions of SBC
Partially restrained moment connection. Connection 304,, insofar
304 as development
capable of transferring moment with rotation cover, are deemed to be properlylength, spacing and
developed.
between connected members that is not negligible.
SBC 306-CR-18 24
GLOSSARY
Pr otected zone. Area of members or connections of

otected R elati
lative brace.. Brace that controls the relative
ve brace
members in which limitations apply to fabrication movement of twotwo adjacent brace points along the
and attachments. length of a beam or column or the relative lateral
displacement of two stories in a frame (see nodal
Prying action. Amplification of the tension force in
brace).
a bolt caused by leverage between the point of
applied load, the bolt and the reaction of the Required strength* . For ces,
Forces stresses and
connected elements. deformations acting on a structur al component,
structural
determined by either structural analysis, for the
structural
Punching load. In an HSS connection
connection, component of LRFD load combinations.
branch member force perpendicular to a chord.
Required strength*. Forces, stresses and
P-  effect. Effect of loads acting on the deflected
deformations acting on a structural component,
shape of a member between joints or nodes.
determined by structural analysis, for the LRFD load
P-Δ effect. Effect of loads acting on the displaced combinations.
location of joints or nodes in a structure. In tiered
R esi
sista
stance actorr . Factor that accounts for
nce facto
building structures
structures,, this is the effect of loads acting
unavoidable deviations of the nominal strength from
on the laterally displaced location ooff floors and roofs.
the actual strength and for the manner and
Quality assurance. Monitoring and inspection tasks consequences of failure.
to ensure that the material provided and work
Restrained construction. Floor and roof assemblies
performed by the fabricator and erector meet the
and individual beams in buildings
buildings where the
requirements of the approved construction documents
surrounding or supporting structure is capable of
and referenced standards. Quality assurance
resisting substantial thermal expansion throughout
includes those tasks designated “special inspection” the range of anticipated elevated temperatures.
by the applicable building code.
Response modification coefficient, R. Factor that
Quality asassur
suraance i nsp
nspe
ecto QAII ) . Individual
ctor ( QA
reduces seismic load effects to strength level as
designated to provide quality assurance inspection
specified by the applicable building code.
for the work being performed.
R eve
verr se cur
curva ture. See double curvature.
vature.
Quality assurance plan (QAP). Program in which
the agency or firm responsible for quality Risk category. Classification assigned to a structure
assurance maintains detailed monitoring and based on its use as specified by the applicable
inspection procedures to ensure conformance with building code.
the approved construction documents and referenced Root of joint. Portion of a joint to be welded where
standards. the members are closest to each other.
Quality control. Controls and inspections R otat
otatii on capacii ty. Incremental angular rotation that a
capac
implemented by the fabricator or erector, as appli- given shape can accept prior to excessive load
cable, to ensure that the material provided and work
performed meet the requirements of the approved shedding,todefined
attained as the elastic
the idealized ratio ofrotation
the inelastic
at firstrotation
yield.
yield..
construction documents and referenced standards.
Rupture strength. Strength limited by breaking or
Quality cont
contrr ol inspe
inspect
ctor QCII ) . Individual
or ((QC
tearing of members or connecting elements.
designated to perform quality control inspection tasks
for the work being performed. Sec
Second-o
nd-orde
rderr effect
ffect.. Effect of loads acting on the
deformed configuration of a structure; includes P-
Quality control program (QCP) . Program in which
the fabricator or erector, as applicable, maintains  effect and P-
P-Δ
Δ effect.
detailed fabrication or erection and inspection Seismic
Seismic re
resp
spo
ons
nse
e modifi cat
cation fafacctor. Factor that
procedures to ensure conformance with the approved reduces seismic load effects to strength level.
design drawings, specifica tions and referenced
specifications
Seismic
Seism ic design cca gorr y. Classification assigned to a
atego
standards.
building by the applicable building code based upon
Reentrant. In a cope or weld access hole, a cut at an its risk category and the design spectral response
abrupt change in direction in which the exposed acceleration coefficients.
surface is concave. Seismic
Seism ic fo
forr ce res
resisting
isting sy
syst
ste
em (SF S) . That part of
(S F R S).
the structural system that has been considered in the
SBC 306-CR-18 25
GLOSSARY
design to provide the required resistance to the ld. Weld made in an elongated hole fusing an
Slot weld.
Slot
seismic forces prescribed in SBC 301.
301. element to another element.
Service
Se rvice load. Load under which serviceability limit
loa Snug-tig
Snug-t ight
hte
ene
nedd joint.. Joint with the connected plies in
joint
states are evaluated. firm contact as specified in Chapter J.
Service lo
Service loa
ad cco
ombina ion.. Load combination under
inattion Specififica
Spe ionss. Written documents containing the
icattion
which serviceability limit states are evaluated. requirements for materials, standards and
workmanship.
Servicea
Service abili
ilitty lim
limit state. Limiting condition
it sta
affecting the ability of a structure to preserve its Spe
Sp ecififie
ied
d mini
inimmum tens
nsile
ile ssttre
rength. Lower limit of
ngth
appearance, maintainability, durability or the tensile strength specified for a material as defined by
comfort of its occupants or function of machinery, ASTM.
under normal usage.
Spe
Sp ecififie
ied
d mini
inimmum yiel
ield
d st
stress. Lower limit of
ress
Shear buckling
Shea uckling. Buckli ng mode in which a plate
Buckling yield stress specified for a material as defined by
element, such as the web of a beam, deforms under ASTM.
pure shear applied in the plane of the plate.
Splice.. Connection between two structural elements
Splice
lagg. Nonunifor
Shear la
Shea Nonuniform
m tensile stress dist
distribution
ribution in a joined at their ends to form a single, longer element.
member or connecting element in the vicinity of a
ility.. Condition in the loading of a structural
Stability
Sta
connection .
component, frame or structure in which a slight
Shea
She ar wall. Wall that provides resistance to lateral disturbance in the loads or geometry does not
loads in the plane of the wall
wall and provides stabili
stability
ty produce large displacements.
for the structur al system .
structural
Shea
She ar yie
yield
ldii ng (puncching) . In an HSS connection,
(pun St
Staatica
ically
stresses. aded. Not
llyGravity,
lo
loa windsubject to significant
and seismic fatigue
loadings are
limit state based on out-of-plane shear strength of considered to be static loadings.
the chord wall to which branch members are attached.
Steel anc
Ste ncho r. Headed stud or hot rolled channel
hor.
Sheet st
Shee eel. In a composite floor system, steel used for
ste welded to a steel member and embodied in concrete
closure plates or miscellaneous trimming in a formed of a composite member to transmit shear, tension or a
steel deck. combination of shear and tension at the interface of
the two materials.
Shim. Thin layer of material used to fill a space
between faying or bearing surfaces. Stiffe
Stif fene
ned
d elem nt. Flat compression element with
lement.
adjoining out-of-plane elements along both edges
Si
Siddesw
swa
ay buckling
uckling (fra
(fr ame). Stability limit state
parallel to the direction of loading.
involving lateral sidesway instability of a frame.
Stiffe
Stiff ener. Structural element, usually an angle or
ner.
Si
Simmple conn
conne ion.. Connection that transmits
ection
plate, attached to a member to distribute load,
negligible bending moment between connected
transfer shear or prevent buckling.
members. Stiffne
Stif ss.. Resistance to deformation of a member or
fness
Single-conc
Single-conceentrat
ntrate force.. Tensile or compressive
ed force
structure, measured by the ratio of the applied force
force applied normal to the flange of a member.
(or moment) to the corresponding displacement (or
Si
Single
ngle curva ure.. Deformed shape of a beam with no
urvatture rotation).
inflection point within the span.
Strain compatibility metho
Strain hodd. In a composite
Slende
Slend er-e
r-ele
lem
ment se ion.. Cross section possessing
secction member, method for determining the stresses
plate components of sufficient slenderness such that considering the stress-strain relationships of each
local buckling in the elastic range will occur. material and its location
location with respect to the neutral
Slip. In a bolted connection, limit state of relative axis of the cross section.
motion of connected parts prior to the attainment of core. Axial-force-resisting element of a
Steel core
Stee
the design strength of the connection. buckling-restrained brace. The steel core contains a
Slip-cri tica
Slip-cri icall cco
onnection.. Bolted connection designed
nnection yielding segment and connections to transfer its axial
to resist movement by friction on the faying surface force to adjoining elements; it may also contain
of the connection under the clamping force of the projections beyond the casing and transition segments
bolts. between the projections and yielding segment.
SBC 306-CR-18 26
GLOSSARY
Strength limit state. Limiting condition in which the Tie plate. Plate element used to join two parallel
maximum strength of a structure
structure or its components is components of a built-up column, girder or strut
reached. rigidly connected to the parallel components and
designed to transmit shear
shear between them.
s. Force per unit area caused by axial force,
Stress.
Stres
moment, shear or torsion. Toe of fillet. Junction of a fillet weld face and base
metal. Tangent
Tangent point of a fillet in a rolled shape.
Stress
Stress co
conc
nce
entration.. Localized stress considerably
ntration
higher than average due to abrupt changes in Torsional bracing. Bracing resisting twist of a beam
geometry or localized loading. or column.
Stro
St ng axis. Major principal centroidal axis of a cross
rong Torsional buckling. Buckling mode in which a
Buckling
section. compression member twists about its sshear
hear center
axis.
ngle.. Inter story displacement divided by
Story dri ft angle
Story
story height. Transverse reinforcement. In an encased composite
column, steel reinforcement in the form of closed ties
Structura
Structurall ana
naly sis. Determination of load effects on
lysis
or welded wire fabric providing confinement for the
members and connections based on principles of
concrete surrounding the steel shape.
structurall mechanics.
structura
Transverse stiffener. Web stiffener oriented
Structura
Structurall com nent. Member,
component connector,
perpendicular to the flanges, attached to the web.
connecting element or assemblage.
Tubing. See HSS.
Structura
Structurall steel. Steel elements as defined in
ste
Section 2.1 of the AISC (2010a) Code of Standard Turn-of-nut method. Procedure whereby the
Practice for Steel Buildings
Buildings and Bridges. specified
controlled pretension
by rotating inthe high-strength bolts isa
fastener component
Structura
Struct systtem. An assemblage of load-carrying
urall sys
predetermined amount after the bolt has been snug
components that are joined together to provide
tightened.
interaction or interdependence.
Unbraced length. Distance between braced points of
System overstre
Syst rstrengt
ngth
h fa
factor , Ωo. Factor specified by
cto
a member, measured between the centers of gravity
the applicable building code in order to determine the
of the bracing members.
amplified seismic load, where required by these
Provisions. Uneven load distribution. In an HSS connection,
condition in which the load is not distributed through
T-connection. HSS connection in which the branch
the cross section of connected elements in a manner
member or connecting element is perpendicular to
that can be readily determined.
the main member and in which forces transverse to
the main member are primarily equilibriated by shear Unframed end. The end of a member not restrained
in the main member. against rotation by stiffeners or connection elements.
stiffeners
Tensilethat
strength (of material) . Maximum tensile Unrestrained . Floor and roof assemblies
stress a material is capable of sustaining as and individualconstruction
beams in buildings that are assumed to
defined by ASTM. be free to rotate and expand throughout the range of
anticipated elevated temperatures.
Tensile strength (of member). Maximum tension
force that a member is capable of sustaining. Unstiffened element. Flat compression element
with an adjoining out-of-plane element along one
Tension and shear rupture. In a bolt or other type of
edge parallel to the direction of loading.
mechanical fastener, limit state of rupture due to
simultaneous tension and shear force. V er tical b
bound
oundary
ary e
element ( V B E ) . A column with a
lem
connection to one or more web plates in an SPSW.
Tension field action. Behavior of a panel under
shear in which diagonal tensile forces develop in V-braced frame. Concentrically braced frame
the web and compressive forces develop in the (OCBF, C-OBF) in which a pair of diagonal braces
transverse stiffeners in a manner similar to a Pratt located either above or below a beam is connected to
truss. a single point within the clear beam span. Where the
diagonal braces are below the beam, the system is
herr mally cut. Cut with gas, plasma or laser.
The also referred to as an inverted-V-braced frame.
SBC 306-CR-18 27
GLOSSARY
Weak axi
Wea s. Minor principal centroidal axis of a cross
axis.
section.
Weathering steel. High-stre
High-strength,
ngth, low-alloy steel that,
with suitable
suitable precautions, can be uused
sed in normal
atmospheric exposures (not marine) without
protective paint coating.
Web crippling . Limit state of local failure of web
immediate vicinity of a concentrated load
plate in the immediate
or reaction.
Web sidesway buckling . Limit state of lateral
buckling of the tension flange opposite the location
of a concentrated compression force
force..
Weld metal. Portion of a fusion weld that has been
completely melted during welding. Wel
Weldd metal has
elements of filler metal and base metal melted in the
weld thermal cycle.
Weld root. See root of joint.
X-braced fra
X-brac fr ame. Concentrically braced frame
(OCBF, C-OBF) in which a pair of diagonal braces
crosses near the mid-length of the diagonal braces.
Y-connection. HSS connection in which the branch
member or connecting element is not perpendicular
to the main member and in which forces transverse to
the main member are primarily equilibriated by shear
in the main member.
Yield moment. In a member subjected to bending, the
moment at which the extreme outer fiber first attains
the yield stress.
Yield point. First stress in a material at which an
increase in strain occurs without an increase in
stress as defined by ASTM.
Yield strength. Stress at which a material exhibits a
specified limiting deviation from the proportionality
of stress to strain as defined by ASTM.
Yield stress. Generic term to denote either yield point
or yield strength, as appropriate for the material.
Yielding. Limit state of inelastic deformation that
occurs when the yield stress is reached.
Yielding (plastic moment). Yielding throughout the
cross section of a member as the bending moment
reaches the plastic moment.
Yielding (yield moment). Yielding at the extreme fiber
on the cross section of a member when the bending
moment reaches the yield moment.
SBC 306-CR-18 28
CHAPTER 1 — GENERAL PROVISIONS
1—GENERAL
CHAPTER 1—GENERAL PROVISIONS
This chapter states the scope of the Code, designs are permitted to be based on tests or
summarizes referenced spe
specif
cifica
icatio ns , codes
tions analysis, subject to the approval of the authority
and standards, and provides requirements for having jurisdiction .
materials and structural design documents. Alternative methods of analysis and design are
The chapter is organized as follows: permit
per mitted
ted,, prov
provide
idedd such
s uch altern
alt ernati
ative
ve met
method
hodss or
criteria are acceptable to the authority having
1.1 —Scope jurisd
jur isdict
iction
ion..
1.2 —Referenced Specifications, Codes and
Standards User Note: For the design of cold-formed
structural members, other than hollow structural
1.3 —Material sections (HSS) that are cold-formed to shapes
1.4 —Structural Design Drawings and with elements not more than 25 mm in thickness,
Specifications the provisions of the AISI North American
Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed
Cold-Formed
Steel Structural Members (AISI S100) are
1.1—
1.1—Scope recommended.
The Saudi Building Code for Steel Structures 1.1.1 Seismic Applications. The Seismic
(SBC 306), hereafter referred to as the Code, Provisionss for Structural Steel Buildings in Chapter
Provision
provid
pro vides
es min
minimu
imum
m req
requir
uireme
ements
nts for des
design
ign and 12 shall apply to the design of seis seismic
mic force
construction of Steel Structures. This Code shall resisting systems of structural steel or of structural
apply to the design of the structur
structural st eel system
al steel steel acting compositely with reinforced concrete,
or systems with structural steel acting unless specifically exempted by other Saudi
compositely with reinforced concrete. building codes.
This Code includes the Symbols, the Glossary,
Chapter 1 through Chapter 16, 16 , and Appendix A User Note: SBC 301 (Table 12-1, Item H)
through Appendix G G.. The Commentary and the specifically exempts structural steel systems,
Notess int
Note inters
ersper
persed
sed thr
throug
ough-o
h-out
ut are not par
partt of but not composite systems, in seismic design
the Code. categories B and C from the provisions of
Chapter 12 if the seismic loads are computed
User Note: Notes are intended to provide concise using a seismic response modification factor,
and practical guidance in the application of the
provisions. R, ofdoes
301 3. For Seismic
specify Design
lateral Category
forces A,as
to be used SBC
the
seismic loads and effects, but these
This Code sets forth criteria for the design, calculations do not involve the use of an R
fabrication and erection of structural steel factor. Thus for Seismic Design Category A, it
buildi
bui ldings
ngs and oth other
er str
struct
ucture
ures,
s, wher
wheree othother
er is not necessary to define a seismic force
structures are defined as structures designed, resisting system that meets any special
fabricated and erected in a manner similar to requirements and the Seismic Provisions for
buildi
bui ldings
ngs,, wit
withh bui
buildi
lding-
ng-lik
likee vvert
ertica
icall aand
nd lateral Structural Steel Buildings do not apply.
load resisting-elements.
The provisions of Appendix A of this Code shall
Wherever this Code refers to the applicable not apply to the seismic design of buildings and
building code and there is none, the loads , load other structures.
combinations, system limitations, and general
design requirements shall be those in Saudi 1.1.2 Nuclear The design,
Applications.
Building Code: Minimum Design Loads for fabrication and erection of nuclear structures
301)).
Buildings and other Structures ( SBC 301 shall comply with the requirements of the
Specification for Safety-Related Steel Structures
Where conditions are not covered by the Code,
SBC 306-CR-18 29
for Nuclear Facilities N690)), in

Facilities (ANSI/AISC N690 A6/A6M-09 Standard Specification for General
addition to the provisions of this Code. Requirements for Rolled Structural Steel Bars,
Plates, Shapes, and Sheet Piling
A36/A36M-08 Standard Specification for Carbon
1.2—
1.2—Referenced Specifications, Codes Structural Steel
and Standards
A53/A53M-07 Standard Specification for Pipe,
The following spec
specific
ifications, codes and standards
ations Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc- Coated, Welded
are referenced in this code: and Seamless
Saudi Building Codes (SBC) A193/A193M-08b Standard Specification for
SBC 301-18
301-18 Saudi Building Code- General. Alloy-Steel and Stainless Ste
Steel
el Bolting Materials for
High Temperature or High Pressure Service and
SBC 301
301--18 Saudi Building Code for Loading and Other Special Purpose Applications
Forces.
A194/A194M-09 Standard Specification for
304--18 Saudi Building Code for Concrete
SBC 304 Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High
Structures. Pressure or High Temperature Service, or Both
ACI International (ACI) A216/A216M-08 Standard Specification for Steel
349-13 Code Requirements for Nuclear Safety-
ACI 349- Castings, Carbon, Suitable for Fusion Welding, for
Related Concrete Structures and Commentary High Temperature Service
American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) A242/A242M-04 (2009) Standard Specification for
High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel
AISC 303-10 Code of Standard Practice for Steel A283/A283M-03 Standard Specification for Low
Buildings and Bridges
Bridges
and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel
ANSI/AISC 341-10
341- Seismic Provisions for Plates
Structural
Structural Steel Buildings
A307-07b Standard Specification for Carbon Steel
N690--12 Specification for Safety-
ANSI/AISC N690 Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI (420 MPa) Tensile
Related Steel Structures for Nuclear Facilities Strength
American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE) A325M-09 Standard Specification for Structural
ASCE/SEI/SFPE 29-05 Standard Calculation Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated 830 MPa Minimum
Methods for Structural Fire Protection Tensile Strength
American Society of Mechanical Engineers A354-07a Standard Specification for Quenched

(ASME) and Tempered Alloy Steel Bolts, Studs, and Other
Externally Threaded Fasteners
ASME B18.2.6-10 Faste
Fasteners
ners for Use in Structural
Structural
Applications A370-09 Standard Test Methods and Definitions
for Mechanical Testing of Steel Products
ASME B46.1-09 Surface Texture, Surface
Roughness, Waviness, and Lay A449-07b Standard Specification for Hex Cap
Screws, Bolts and Studs, Steel, Heat Treated,
American Society for Nondestructive Testing 120/105/90 ksi (830/730/630MPa) Minimum
(ASNT) Tensile Strength, General Use
ANSI//ASNT
ANSI CP-189-2011 Standard for
A490-08b Standard Specification for Heat-
Qualification and Certification of Nondestructive
Treated Steel Structural Bolts, Alloy Steel, Heat
Testing Personnel
Treated, 150 ksi ( 1040MPa) Minimum Tensile
Recommended Practice No. SNT-TC-1A-2011 Strength
Personnel Qualification and Certification in
A490M-08 Standard Specification for High-
Nondestructive Testing
Strength Steel Bolts, Classes 10.9 and 10.9.3, for
ASTM International (ASTM) Structural Steel Joints
A500/A500M-07 Standard Specification for Cold-

Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel
Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes
SBC 306-CR-18 30
A501-07 Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Steel Plate with 485 MPa Minimum Yield Strength
Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural to 100 mm Thick
Tubing
A913/A913M-07 Standard Specification for High-
A502-03 Standard Specification for Steel Strength Low-Alloy Steel Shapes of Structural
Structural Rivets, Steel, Structural Quality, Produced by Quenching and Self-
Tempering Process (QST)
Yield Strength, Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel A992/A992M-06a Standard Specification for
Plate, Suitable for Welding Structural Steel Shapes
A529/A529M-05 Standard Specification for High- A1011/A1011M-09a Standard Specification for
Strength Carbon-Manganese Steel of Structural Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon,
Quality Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-
Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability,
A563M-07 Standard Specification for Carbon and
and Ultra-High Strength
Alloy Steel Nuts
A1043/A1043M-05 Standard Specification for
A568/A568M-09 Standard Specification for Steel,
Structural Steel with Low Yield to Tensile Ratio for
Sheet, Carbon, Structural, and High-Strength, Low-
Use in Buildings
Alloy, Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled
C567-05a Standard Test Method for Determining
Density of Structural Lightweight Concrete
Strength Low-Alloy Columbium - Vanadium
Structural Steel E119-08a Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of
Building Construction and Materials
A588/A588M-05
Strength Standard
Low-Alloy Specification
Structural Steel, up to for
345High-
MPa E165-02 Standard Test Method for Liquid
Minimum Yield Point, with Atmospheric Corrosion Penetrant Examination E709-08 Standard Guide
Resistance for Magnetic Particle Examination
A606/A606M-09 Standard Specification for Steel, F436-09 Standard Specification for Hardened Steel
Sheet and Strip, High-Strength, Low-Alloy, Hot- Washers
Rolled and Cold-Rolled, with Improved
F436M-09 Standard Specification for Hardened
Atmospheric Corrosion Resistance
Steel Washers
A618/A618M-04 Standard Specification for Hot-
F606-07 Standard Test Methods for Determining
Formed Welded and Seamless High-Strength Low-
the Mechanical Properties of Externally and
Alloy Structural Tubing
Internally Threaded Fasteners, Washers, Direct
A668/A668M-04 Standard Specification for Steel Tension Indicators, and Rivets
Forgings, Carbon
Carbon and Alloy, for General Industrial
F606M-07 Standard Test Methods for Determining
Use
the Mechanical Properties of Externally and
A673/A673M-04 Standard Specification for Internally Threaded Fasteners, Washers, and
Sampling Procedure for Impact Testing of Rivets
Structural Steel
F844-07a Standard Specification for Washers,
A709/A709M-09 Standard Specification for Steel, Plain (Flat), Unhardened for General Use
Structural Steel for Bridges
F959-09 Standard Specification for Compressible-
A751-08 Standard Test Methods, Practices, and Washer-Type Direct Tension Indicators for Use
Terminology for Chemical Analysis of Steel with Structural Fasteners
Products
F959M-07 Standard Specification for
A847/A847M-05 Standard Specification for Cold- Compressible-Washer-Type Direct Tension
Formed Welded and
and Seamless High-Strength, Low- Indicators for Use with Structural Fasteners
Alloy Structural Tubing with Improved
F1554-07a Standard Specification for Anchor
Atmospheric Corrosion Resistance
Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105 ks
ksii (240,380, and 730
A852/A852M-03 (2007) Standard Specification for MPa) Yield Strength
Quenched and Tempered Low- Alloy Structural
SBC 306-CR-18 31
AWS D1.3 -2008 Structural Welding Code—Sheet

User Note: ASTM F1554 is the most
Steel
commonly referenced specification for anchor
rods. AWS D1.4/D1.4M-2005 Structural Welding
Code—Reinforcing Steel
F1852-08 Standard Specification for “Twist -Off” AWS D1.4/D1.4M-2005 Structural Welding
Type Tension Control Structural Bolt/Nut/Washer Code—Seismic Supplement
Assemblies, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi
Research Council on Structural Connections
(830/730MPa) Minimum Tensile Strength (RCSC)
F2280-08 Standard Specification for “Twist Off”
Type Tension Control Structural Bolt/ Nut/Washer Specification for Structural Joints Using High-
Assemblies, Steel, Heat Treated, 150 ksi (1040 Strength Bolts, 2009
MPa) Minimum Tensile Strength
American Welding Society (AWS)
1.3—
1.3 —Material
AWS A5.1/A5.1M-2004 Specification for Carbon
1.3.1 Structural Steel Materials. Material test
Steel Electrodes for Shielded Metal Arc Welding
reports or reports of tests made by the fabricator or
AWS A5.5/A5.5M-2004 Specification for Low- a testing laboratory shall constitute sufficient
Alloy Steel Electrodes for Shielded Metal Arc evidence of conformity with one of the ASTM
Welding standards listed in Section 1.3.1.1 For hot-rolled
AWS A5.17/A5.17M-1997 (R2007) Specification structural shapes, plates, and bars, such tests shall
for Carbon Steel Electrodes and Fluxes for be made in accordance with ASTM A6/A6M; for
Submerged Arc Welding sheets,
ASTM such t ests shall be
tests
A568/A568M; formade in accordance
tubing with
and pipe, such
AWS A5.18/A5.18M-2005 Specification for tests shall be made in accordance with the
Carbon Steel Electrodes and Rods for Gas Shielded requirements of the applicable ASTM standards
Arc Welding listed above for those product forms.
AWS A5.20/A5.20M-2005 Specification for 1.3.1.1 ASTM Designations. Structural steel
Carbon Steel Electrodes for Flux Cored Arc material conforming to one of the following ASTM
Welding ations is approved for use under this Code:
specifications
specific
AWS A5.23/A5.23M-2007 Specification for Low- 1.3.1.1.1 Hot-rolled structural shapes
Alloy Steel Electrodes and Fluxes for Submerged
Arc Welding ASTM A36/A36M ASTM A709/A709M
AWS A5.25/A5.25M-1997 (R2009) Specification ASTM A529/A529M ASTM A913/A913M

for Carbon and Low-Alloy Steel Electrodes and ASTM A572/A572M ASTM A992/ A992M
Fluxes for Electroslag Welding
1.3.1.1.2 Structural tubing
for Carbon and Low-Alloy Steel Electrodes for
Electrogas Welding ASTM A500 ASTM A618/A618M
AWS A5.28/A5.28M-2005 Specification for Low- ASTM A501 ASTM A847/A847M
Alloy Steel Electrodes and Rods for Gas Shielded
1.3.1.1.3 Pipe
Arc Welding
ASTM A53/A53M, Gr. B
AWS A5.29/A5.29M-2005 Specification for Low-
Alloy Steel Electrodes for Flux Cored Arc Welding 1.3.1.1.4 Plates
for Welding Shielding Gases
ASTM A242/A242M ASTM A709/A709M
AWS B5.1-2003 Specification for the Qualification
of Welding Inspectors
AWS D1.1M-2010 Structural Welding Code — ASTM A514/A514M ASTM A1011/A1011
A1011/A1011M
M
Steel ASTM A529/A529M ASTM A1043/A1043M
SBC 306-CR-18 32
ASTM A572/A572M
User Note: Additional requirements for joints
1.3.1.1.5 Bars in heavy rolled members are given in Sections
ASTM A36/A36M ASTM A572/A572M 10.1.5 , 10.1.6 , 10.2.6 and 14.2.2 .
ASTM A529/A529M ASTM A709/A709M 1.3.1.4 Built-Up Heavy Shapes. Built-up cross
sections consisting of plates with a thickness
1.3.1.1.6 Sheets
exceeding 50 mm are considered built-up heavy
ASTM A606/A606M
shapes. Built-up
subject to primaryheavy shapes tensile
(computed) used asforces
members
due
ASTM A1011/A1011M SS, HSLAS, AND
HSLAS-F to tension or flexur
flexuree and spliced or connected to
other members using complete-joint-penetration
User Note: Materials with other international groove welds that fuse through the thickness of
designations (e.g. JIS, EN) considered equivalent the plates, shall be specified as follows. The
to ASTM are also approved for use under this structural design documents shall rrequireequire that
code. the steel be supplied with Charpy V-notch
impact test results in accordance with ASTM
1.3.1.2 Unidentified Steel. Unidentified steel, A6/A6M, Supplementary Requirement S5,
free of injurious defects, is permitted to be used only Charpy V-Notch Impact Test. The impact test shall
for members or details whose failure will not be conducted in accordance with ASTM
reduce the strength of the structure, either locally or A673/A673M, Frequency P, and shall meet a
overall. Such use shall be subject to the approval of minimum average value of 27 J absorbed energy
the engineer of record
record. at a maximum temperature of +21 ºC.
When a built-up heavy shape is welded to the face
User Note: Unidentified steel may be used for of another member us using
ing groove welds, the
details where the precise mechanical properties requirement above applies only to the shape that
and weldability are not of concern. These are has weld metal fused through the cross section.
commonly curb plates, shims and other similar
pieces. User Note: Additional requirements for joints
in heavy built-up members are given in
1.3.1.3 Rolled Heavy Shapes. ASTM A6/A6M Sections 10.1.5 , 10.1.6 , 10.2.6 and 14.2.2 .
hot-rolled shapes with a flange thickness exceeding
50 mm are considered to be rolled heavy shapes. 1.3.2 Steel Castings and Forgin
Forgings.
gs. Steel
Rolled heavy shapes used as members subject to castings shall conform to ASTM A216/A216M,
primary (computed) tensile force
forcess due to tension Grade WCB with Supplementary Requirement
or flexure and spliced or connected using S11. Steel forgings shall conform to ASTM
complete-joint-penetration groove welds that fuse A668/A668M. TesTestt reports produced in accordance
through the thickness of the flange or the flange
and the web, shall be specified as follows. The with the above
sufficient reference
evidence of standards shallwith
conformity constitute
such
structural design documents shall require that standards.
such shapes be supplied with Charpy V-notch
(CVN) impact test results in accordance with 1.3.3 Bolts, Washers and Nuts. Bolt, washer
ASTM A6/A6M, Supplementary Requirement and nut material conforming to one of the
S30, Charpy V-Notch Impact Test for Structural following ASTM specific ations is approved for use
specifications
Shapes – Alternate Core Location. The impact test under this Code:
shall meet a minimum average value of 27 J 1.3.3.1 Bolts
absorbed energy at a maximum temperature of +21
ºC..
ºC ASTM A307 ASTM A490
The above requirements do not apply if the splices ASTM A325 ASTM A490M
and connections are made by bolting. Where a ASTM A325M ASTM F1852
rolled heavy shape is welded to the surface of
ASTM A354 ASTM F2280
another shape
shape using groove welds, the requirement
above applies only to the shape that has weld metal ASTM A449
fused through the cross section.
1.3.3.2 Nuts
SBC 306-CR-18 33
ASTM A194/A194M ASTM A563M AWS A5.17/A5.17M AWS A5.28/A5.28M

ASTM A563 AWS A5.18/A5.18M AWS A5.29/A5.29M
1.3.3.3 Washers AWS A5.20/A5.20M AWS A5.32/A5.32M
ASTM F436 ASTM F844 AWS A5.23/A5.23M
ASTM F436M Manufacturer’s certification shall constitute
sufficient evidence of conformity with the
1.3.3.4 Compressible-Was
Compressible-Washer-Type
her-Type Direct
Tension Indicators standards. Filler metals and fluxes that are suitable
for the intended application shall be selected.
ASTM F959 ASTM F959M
1.3.6 Headed Stud Anchors. Steel headed stud
Manufacturer’s certification shall constitute anchors shall conform to the requirements of
sufficient evidence of conformity with the the Structural Welding Code—Steel (AWS
standards. D1.1/D1.1M)).
D1.1/D1.1M
User Note: Materials with other international

Manufacturer’s certification shall constitute
designations (e.g. JIS, EN) considered equivalent sufficient evidence of conformity with AWS
to ASTM are also approved for use under this D1.1/D1.1M..
D1.1/D1.1M
Code.
1.3.4 Anchor Rods and Threaded Rods. 1.4—

1.4 —Structural Design Drawings and
Anchor rod and threaded rod material conforming Specifications
to one offorthe
approved usefollowing Code: specifica
under thisASTM specifications
tions is The
shall structural design drawings
meet the requirements in theand specifications
Code of Standard
ASTM A36/A36M ASTM A572/A572M Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges, AISC
303-10..
303-10
ASTM A354 ASTM F1554 User Note: Provisions in this Code contain
information that is to be shown on design
ASTM A449 drawings.. These include:
drawings
User Note: ASTM F1554 is the preferred Section 1.3.1.3 Rolled heavy shapes where
material specification for anchor rods. alternate core Charpy V-notch toughness
(CVN) is required
A449 material is acceptable for high-strength Section 1.3.1.4 Built-up heavy shapes where
anchor rods and threaded rods of any diameter. CVN toughness is required
Threads on anchor rods and threaded rods shall
conform to the Unified Standard Series of ASME i) using
Section 10.3.1 Locations
pretensioned bolts of connections
B18.2.6 and shall have Class 2A tolerances.
Other information is needed by the fabricator
Manufacturer’s certification shall constitute or erector and should be shown on design
sufficient evidence of conformity with the drawings including:
standards.
Fatigue details requiring nondestructive
User Note: Materials with other international testing (Appendix C
C;; e.g., TABLE C-1,
C-1, Cases
designations (e.g. JIS, EN) considered equivalent 5.1 to 5.4)
to ASTM are also approved for use under this
15))
Risk category (Chapter 15
Code.
Indication of complete-joint-penetration (CJP)
1.3.5 Consumabless for Welding. Fille
Consumable Fillerr metals welds subject to tension (Chapter 15
15))
and fluxes shall conform to one of the following
ations of the American Wel
specifications
specific Welding
ding Society:
AWS A5.1/A5.1M AWS A5.25/A5.25M
AWS A5.5/A5.5M AWS A5.26/A5.26M
SBC 306-CR-18 34
CHAPTER 1
— GENERAL PROVISIONS
This page left intentionally blank
SBC 306-CR-18 35
CHAPTER 2 — DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
2—DESIGN
CHAPTER 2—DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
structure is subjected to all appropriate load

This chapter addresses general requirements for the
combinations.
analysis and design of steel structures applicable to
all chapters of the Code. The chapter is organized Design for structural integrity requirements shall be
as follows: based on nominal strength rather than design
strength. Limit states for connections based on
2.1 —General Provisions
limiting deformations or yielding of the connection
2.2 —Loads and Load Combinations components need not be considered for meeting
2.3 —Design Basis
structural integrity requirements.
2.4 —Member Properties

For the purpose of satisfying structural integrity
provisions of SBC 301 301,, bearing bolts in
2.5 —Member Lengths connections with short-slotted holes parallel to the
2.6 —Fabrication and Erection
direction of the tension load are permitted, and shall
be assumed to be located at the end of the slot.
2.7 —Quality Control and Quality Assurance
2.3.3 Design for Strength. Design shall satisfy
2.8 —Evaluation of Existing Structures the requirements of this Code when the design
strength of each structural component equals or
exceeds the required strength determined on the
2.1—
2.1—General Provisions basis of the LRFD load combinations of SBC 301.
301.
The design of members and connections shall be Design shall be performed in accordance with Eq.
(2-1)::
(2-1)
consistent with the intended behavior of the framing
system and the assumptions made in the structural
analysis. Unless restricted by the Saudi Building
where
 ≤   (2-1)
Code (SBC 301) 301), lateral load resistance and
stability may be provided by any combination of Ru = required strength
members and connections.
Rn = nominal strength, specified in Chapter 2
2.2—
2.2—Loads and Load Combinations through Chapter 11
The loads and load combinations shall be as  = resistance factor, specified in Chapter 2
301.. For design purposes, the
stipulated in SBC 301 through Chapter 11
nominal loads shall be taken as the loads stipulated
by the SBC 301
301..  Rn = design strength
2.3.4 Design for Stability. General stability
2.3
2.3——Design Basis
shall be provided for the structure as a whole and
Designs shall be made according to the provisions for each of its elements. Stability of the structure
for load and resistance factor design (LRFD). and its elements shall be determined in accordance
with Chapter 33..
2.3.1 Required Strength. The required strength
of structural members and connections shall be 2.3.5 Design of Connections. Connection
determined by structural analysis for the elements shall be designed in accordance with the
appropriate load combinations as stipulated in provisions of Chapters 10 and 1111.. The forces and
Section 2.2
2.2.. Design by elastic, inelastic or plastic deformations used in design shall be consistent with
analysis is permitted. Provisions for inelastic and the intended performance of the connection and the
plastic analysis are as stipulated in Appendix A
A,, assumptions used in the structural analysis. Self-
Design by Inelastic Analysis. limiting inelastic deformations of the connections
are permitted. At points of support, beams, girders
2.3.2 Limit States. Design shall be based on the
principle that no applicable strength or and trusses shall be restrained against rotation about
their longitudinal axis unless it can be shown by
serviceability limit state shall be exceeded when the
analysis that the restraint is not required.
SBC 306-CR-18 36
(a) Simple Connections: A simple connection connections, or for design by inelastic analysis
transmits a negligible moment. In the analysis using the provisions of Appendix A. A. The required
of the structure, simple connections may be axial strength shall not exceed 0.15 c Fy Ag; where
assumed to allow unrestrained relative c is determined from Section 5.15.1,, and Ag = gross
rotation between the framing elements being 2
area of member, mm , and Fy = specified minimum
connected. A simple connection shall have yield stress, MPa.
sufficient rotation capacity to accommodate
the required rotation determined by the 2.3.7 Diaphragms and Collectors. Diaphragms
analysis of the structure. and collectors

result from loadsshall be designed
as stipulated for forces
in Section 2.2 that
2.2.. They
(b) Moment Connections: Two types of moment shall be designed in conformance with the
connections, fully restrained and partially provisions of Chapters 3 through 11, as applicable.
restrained, are permitted, as specified below.
2.3.8 Design for Serviceability. The overall
1. Fully Restrained (FR) Moment structure and the individual members and
Connections. A fully restrained (FR) connections shall be checked for serviceability.
moment connection transfers moment with Requirements for serviceability design are given in
a negligible rotation between the Chapter 13.
13.
connected members. In the analysis of the
structure, the connection may be assumed 2.3.9 Design for Ponding. The roof system shall
to allow no relative rotation. An FR be investigated
investigated through structural analysis
analysis to assure
connection shall have sufficient strength adequate strength and stability under ponding
and stiffness to maintain the angle between conditions, unless the roof surface is provided with
the connected members unchanged at the a slope of 20 mm per meter or greater toward points
strength limit states. of free drainage or an adequate system of drainage
is provided to prevent the accumulation of water.
2. Partially Restrained (PR) Moment Methods of checking ponding are provided in
Connections. Partially restrained (PR) Appendix B,B, Design for Ponding.
moment connections transfer moments, but
the rotation between connected members is 2.3.10 Design for Fatigue. Fatigue shall be
not negligible. In the analysis of the considered in accordance with Appendix C C,, Design
structure, the force-deformation response for Fatigue, for members and their connections
characteristics of the connection shall be subject to repeated loading. Fatigue need not be
included. The response characteristics of a considered for seismic effects or for the effects of
PR connection shall be documented in the wind loading on normal building lateral force
technical literature or established by resisting systems and building enclosure
analytical or experimental means. The components.
component elements of a PR connection 2.3.11 Design for Fire Conditions. Two methods
shall have sufficient strength, stiffness and of design for fire conditions are provided in
deformation
states. capacity at the strength limit D, Structural Design for Fire Conditions:
Appendix D,
by Analysis and by Qualification Testing.
2.3.6 Moment Redistribution in Beams. The Compliance with the fire protection requirements
required flexural strength of beams composed of given in SBC 801 shall be deemed to satisfy the
compact sections, as defined in Section 2.4.1 , and requirements of this section and Appendix D.
D.
satisfying the unbraced length requirements of Nothing in this section is in
intended
tended to create or imply
Section 6.13.5 may be taken as nine-tenths of the a contractual requirement for the engineer of record
negative moments at the points of support, responsible for the structural design or any other
produced by the gravity loading and determined by member of the design team.
an elastic analysis satisfying the requirements of
Chapter 33,, provided that the maximum positive User Note: Design by qualification testing is the
moment is increased by one-tenth of the average prescriptive method specified in SBC 801.
negative moment determined by an elastic analysis. Traditionally, on most projects where the
This reduction is not permitted for moments in architect is the prime professional, the architect
members with Fy exceeding 450 MPa, forformoments has been the
produced by loading on cantilevers, design coordinate fireresponsible party to specify
protection requirements. and
Design
using partially restrained (PR) moment by analysis is a nnew
ew engineering approach to fire
SBC 306-CR-18 37
protection. Designation of the person(s) 4. For stems of tees, d is taken as the full
responsible for designing for fire conditions is a nominal depth of the section.
contractual matter to be addressed on each Refer to Table 2-1 and Table 2-2 for the graphic
project. representation of unstiffened element dimensions.
2.3.12 Design for Corrosion
Corrosion Effects. Where (b) Stiffened Elements. For stiffened elements
corrosion may impair the strength or serviceability supported along two edges parallel to the
of a structure, structural components shall be direction of the compression force, the width
designed to tolerate corrosion or shall be protected shall be taken as follows:
against corrosion. 1. For webs of rolled or formed sections, h is
2.3.13 Anchorage to Concrete. Anchorage the clear distance between flanges less the
between steel
steel and concrete acting compositely shall fillet or corner radius at each flange; hc is
be designed in accordance with Chapter 9. 9. The twice the distance from the center of
design of column bases and anchor rods shall be in gravity to the inside face of the
accordance with Chapter 1010.. compression flange less the fillet or corner
radius.
2.4
2.4—
—Member Properties
2. For webs of built-up sections, h is the
2.4.1 Classification of Sections
Sections for
for Local distance between adjacent lines of
Buckling. For compression, sections are classified fasteners or the clear distance between
as nonslender element or slender-element sections . flanges when welds are used, and hc is
For a nonslender element section, the width-to- twice the distance from the center of
thickness ratios of its compression elements shall gravity to the nearest line of fasteners at the
not exceed r from Table 2-1. 2-1. If the width-to- compression flange or the inside face of the
thickness ratio of any compression element exceeds compression flange when welds are used;
r, the section is a slender-element section. hp is twice the distance from the plastic
For flexure, sections are classified as compact, neutral axis to the nearest line of fasteners
noncompact or slender-element sections. For a at the compression flange or the inside face
section to qualify as compact, its flanges must be of the compression flange when welds are
continuously connected to the web or webs and the used.
width-to-thickness ratios of its compression 3. For flange or diaphragm plates in built-up
elements shall not exceed the limiting width-to- sections, the width, b, is the distance
thickness ratios, p, from Table 2-2.
2-2. If the width-to- between adjacent lines of fas
fasteners
teners or lines
thickness ratio of one or more compression of welds.
elements exceeds p, but does not exceed r from
2-2,, the section is noncompact. If the width-
Table 2-2 4. For flanges of rectangular hollow
to-thickness ratio of any compression element structural sections (HSS), the width, b, is
the clear distance between webs less the
exceeds r, the section is a slender-element section. inside corner radius on each side. For webs
(a) Unstiffened Elements. For unstiffened elements of rectangular HSS, h is the clear distance
supported along only one edge parallel to the between the flanges less the inside corner
direction of the compression force, the width radius on each side. If the corner radius is
shall be taken as follows: not known, b and h shall be taken as the
1. For flanges of I-shaped members and tees, corresponding outside dimension minus
the width, b, is one-half the full-flange three times the thickness. The thickness, t,
width, bf. shall be taken as the design wall thickness,
per Section 2.4.2 .
2. For legs of angles and flanges of channels
and zees, the width, b, is the full nominal 5. For perforated cover plates, b is the
dimension.
transverse distance between the nearest
line of fasteners, and the net area of the
3. For plates, the width, b, is the distance plate is taken at the widest hole.
from the free edge to the first row of
fasteners or line of welds. Refer to Tableof2-1
representation and Table
stiffened 2-2 dimension
element for the graphic
dimensions.s.
SBC 306-CR-18 38
For tapered flanges of rolled sections, the thickness 1. For angles, the gage for holes in opposite
is the nominal value halfway between the free edge adjacent legs shall be the sum of the gages
and the corresponding face of the web. from the back of the angles less the
thickness.
2.4.2 Design Wall Thickness for HSS. The
design wall thickness, t, shall be used in calculations 2. For slotted HSS welded to a gusset plate,
involving the wall thickness of hollow structural the net area, An, is the gross area minus the
sections (HSS). The design wall thickness, t, shall product of the thickness and the total width
be taken equal
thickness to 0.93 times the nominal
for electric-resistance-welded wall
(ERW) of material that is removed to form the slot.
3. In determining the net area across plug or
HSS and equal to the nominal thickness for
slot welds, the weld metal shall not be
submerged-arc-welded (SAW) HSS.
considered as adding to the net area.
User Note: A pipe can be designed using the 4. For members without holes, the net area,
provisions of the Code for round HSS sections An, is equal to the gross area, Ag.
as long as the pipe conforms to ASTM A53
Class B and the appropriate limitations of the User Note: Section 10.4.1 (b) limits An to a
Code are used. maximum of 0.85Ag for splice plates with
ASTM A500 HSS and ASTM A53 Grade B holes.
pipe are produced by an ERW process. T The
he
SAW process is used for cross sections that are 2.5—Member Lengths
2.5—
larger than those permitted by ASTM A500
A500.. For members in which the design is based on
compression, the slenderness ratio KlKl// r preferably
2.4.3 Gross and Net Area Determination should not exceed 200. For members in which the
(a) Gross Area. The gross area Ag of a member at design is based on tension, the slenderness ratio l / r
any section is the sum of the products of the preferably should not exceed 300. The above
thickness and the gross width of each element limitation does not apply to rods in tension.
measured normal to the axis of the member. For Members in which the design is dictated by tension
angles, the gross width is the sum of the widths loading, but which may be subject to some
of the legs less the thickness. compression under other load conditions, need not
satisfy the compression slenderness limit. For
(b) Net Area. The net area, An, of a member is the beams, girders and trusses designed on the basis of
sum of the products of the thickness and the net simple spans shall have an effective length equal to
width of each element computed as follows: the distance between centers of gravity of the
1. In computing net area for tension and members to which they deliver their end reactions.
shear, the width of a bolt hole shall be
2.6
2.6——Fabrication and Erection
taken as 2 mm greater than the nominal
dimension of the hole. Shop
erectiondrawings, fabrication,
shall satisfy shop painting
the requirements stipulatedand
in
2. For a chain of holes extending across a part
14, Fabrication and Erection.
Chapter 14,
in any diagonal or zigzag line, the net
width of the part shall be obtained by 2.7—
2.7—Quality Control and Quality
deducting from the gross width the sum of Assurance
the diameters or slot dimensions as
provided in this section, of all holes in the Quality control and quality assurance activities
chain, and adding, for each gage space in shall satisfy the requirements stipulated in Chapter
the chain, the quantity s2/4g, 15,, Quality Control and Quality Assurance.
15
where 2.8—Evaluation of Existing Structures

2.8—
s = longitudinal center-to-center spacing The evaluation of existing structures shall satisfy
(pitch) of any two consecutive holes, mm the requirements stipulated in Chapter 16
Evaluation of Existing Structures.
g = transverse center-to-center spacing
(gage) between fastener gage lines, mm
SBC 306-CR-18 39
TABLES OF CHAPTER 2
Table 2-1 : Width-to-Thickness

Width-to-Thickness Ratios: Compression Elements Members Subject to Axial Compression
Limiting
e Width-to- Width-to-
s
Ca Description of Element Thickness Thickness Examples
Ratio Ratio r
(nonslender/slender)
1 Flanges of rolled
I-shaped sections, plates
 0.56
projecting from rolled I-
shaped sections;
outstanding legs of pairs
of angles connected with
continuous contact,
flanges of channels, and
st
n flanges of tees
e
m
le
E
d
e
n
ef
2 Flanges of built-up I-
shaped sections and plates
or angle legs projecting
from built-up I-shaped
  
tifs
n
U
3
sections
Legs of single angles, legs
of double angles with  0.644 
separators, and all other
unstiffened elements  0.45
4 Stems of tees
 0.75
5 Webs of doubly-
symmetric I-shaped
sections and channels 
ℎ
1.49
6 Walls of rectangular HSS
and boxes of uniform
st
n
e
7
thickness
Flange cover plates and
diaphragm plates between
 1.1.44000
m
el
E
d
e
lines of fasteners or welds 
1.49
n
ef
fi
t
S
8 All other stiffened
elements 
9 Round HSS
 0.11 
SBC 306-CR-18 40
SBC 306 CR 18 40
Table 2-2: Width-to-Thickness Ratios: Compression Elements Members Subject to Flexure
Width
Limiting Width-to-Thickness Ratio
es -to-
Description of
a Thick p r Examples
C Element
ness (compact/ (noncompact/
Ratio noncompact) slender)
Flanges of rolled I-
10 shaped sections,
channels and tees  0.388 1.0
ts
n
e
11
Flanges of doubly
and singly
symmetric I-shaped
 0.38 0.955
[a] [b]
m built-up sections
 0.54 0.91
el
E
d
e Legs of single
n 12
ef angles
fi
ts
n
U
13
Flanges of all I-
shaped sections and
channels in flexure
 0.38 1.0
about the weak axis
14 Stems of tees
15
Webs of doubly-
symmetric I-shaped
sections and

ℎ 0.3.87446 1.5.07330
channels
   ≤  5.70 

[c]
16
Webs of singly-
symmetric I-shaped

ℎ
. −. 
sections
st
n
e
m
el
E
17
Flanges of
rectangular HSS and
boxes of uniform
thickness
 1.12 1.40
d
e
n Flange cover plates
ef
tif
S 18 and diaphragm
plates between lines
of fasteners or welds  1.122 1.400
19
Webs of rectangular
HSS and boxes
ℎ
 2.42 5.70
20 Round HSS
 0.07  0.31 
Notes:
[a] kc= 4/ (h / tw) ½ but shall not be taken less than 0.35 nor greater
greater than 0.76 for calculation purposes.
[b] FL =0.7Fy for major axis bending of compact and noncompact web built-up I-shaped members with Sxt /Sxc ≥ 0.7;
FL = FySxt /Sxc ≥ 0.5Fy for major-axis bending of compact and noncompact web built-up I-shaped
I- shaped members with Sxt /Sxc < 0.7.
[c] My is the moment at yielding of the extreme fiber. Mp =plastic bending moment, N-mm
E =modulus of elasticity of steel, 200 000 MPa
Fy = specified minimum yield stress, MPa.
SBC 306 CR 18 41
CHAPTER 2
— DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

SBC 306 CR 18 42
CHAPTER 3 — DESIGN FOR STABILITY
CHAPTER 3
3—DESIGN
—DESIGN FOR STABILITY
This chapter addresses requirements for the methods of design listed in Sections 3.1.1 and
design of structures for stability. The direct 3.1.2 .
analysis method is presented herein; alternative
3.1.1 Direct Analysis Method of Design. The
methods are presented in Appendix F
F..
direct analysis method of design, which consists of
The chapter is organiz
organized
ed as follows: the calculation of required strengths by structural
3.1 —General Stability Requirements analysis method in accordance with Section 3.2
and the calculation of design strengths in
3.2 —Calculation of Required Strengths 3.3,, is permitted for all
accordance with Section 3.3
3.3 Calculation of Design Strengths structures.
3.1.2 Alternative Methods of Design. The
effective length method and the first-
first-order
order analysis
3.1—
3.1—General Stability Requirements method, defined in Appendix F F,, are permitted as
Stability shall be provided for the structure as a alternatives to the direct analysis method for
whole and for each of its elements. The effects of structures that satisfy the constraints specified in
all of the following on the stability of the structure that Appendix.
and its elements shall be considered: 3.2—
3.2 —Calculation of Required
1 . Flexural, shear and axial member Strengths
deformations, and all other deformations
For the direct analysis method of design, the
that contribute to displacements of the
required strengths of components of the structure
structure. shall be determined from a structural analysis
2 . Second-order effects (both P- and P- conforming to Section 3.2.1 . The structural
 effects). analysis shall include consideration of initial
imperfections in accordance with Section 3.2.2 and
3. Geometric imperfections. adjustments to stiff
stiffness
ness in accordance with Section
4 . Stiffness reduc
reductions
tions due t o inelas
inelasticity.
ticity. 3.2.3 .
5 . Uncertainty in stiffness and strength. 3.2.1 General Analysis Requirements. The
structural analysis of the structure shall conform to
All load-dependent effects shall be calculated at the following requirements:
a level of loading corresponding to LRFD load
combinations. 1. The analysis shall consider flexural, shear
and axial member deformations, and all
Any rational method of design for stability that other component and connection
considers all of the listed effects is permitted; this deformations that contribute to
includes the methods identified in Sections 3.1.1 displacements of the structure. The
and 3.1.2. analysis shall include consideration for
For structures designed by inelastic analysis, the initial imperfections as specified in Section
provisions of Appendix A shall be satisfied. 3.2.2 . Moreover, the analysis shall
incorporate reductions in all stiffnesses that
stiffnesses
User Note: The term “design” as used in this are considered to contribute to the stability
Code is the combination of structural analysis of the structure, as specified in Section
to determine the required strengths of 3.2.3 .
components and the proportion
proportioning
ing of 2. The analysis shall be a second-
second-order
order
components to have adequate design strength.
analysis that considers both P- and P-
See Commentary of Section 3.1 for  effects, except that it is permissible to
explanation of how requirements (1) neglect the effect of P- on the response
through (5) of Section 3.1 are satisfied in the of the structure when the following
SBC 306 CR 18 43
conditions are satisfied: (a) The structure columns. Initial out-of-straightness of

supports gravi ty loads primarily through
gravity individual members is not addressed in this
nominally-vertical columns, walls or section; it is accounted for in the compression
frames; (b) the ratio of maximum second- member design provisions of Chapter 5 and
order drift to maximum first-order drift need not be considered explicitly in the
(both determined for LRFD load analysis as long as it is within the limits
combinations, with stiffnesses adjusted as specified in Chapter 1414..
specified in Section 3.2.3 ) in all stories is
equal to or less than 1.7; and (c) no more Modeling of Imperfections. In all
3.2.2.1 Direct Modeling
than one-third of the total gravity load on cases, it is permissible to account for the effect
the structure is supported by columns that of initial imperfections by including the
are part of moment-resisting frames in the imperfections directly in the analysis. The structure
direction of translation being considered. shall be analyzed with points of intersection of
It is necessary in all cases to consider P- members displaced from their nominal locations.
 effects in the evaluation of individual The magnitude of the initial displacements shall be
members subject to compression and the maximum amount considered in the design
design;; the
flexure. pattern of initial displacements shall be such that it
provides the greatest destabilizing effect.
User Note: A P--only second-order
analysis (one that neglects the effects of P- User Note: Initial displacements similar in
 on the response of the structure) is permitted configuration to both displacements due to
under the conditions listed. The requirement loading and anticipated buckling modes should
be considered in the modeli modeling
ng of
for
of considering P- effe
effect
individual members ctscan
s in be
the satisfied
eva lu
luat
atio
ion
n
by imperfections. The magnitude of the initial
applying the B1 multiplier defined in Appendix displacements should be based on
G. permissible construction tolerances, as
specified in Chapter 14 or on actual
Use of the approximate method of second-order imperfections if known
analysis provided in Appendix G is permitted as an
alternative to a rigorous second-order analysis. In the analysis of structures that support gravity
loads primarily through nominally- vertical
3. The analysis shall consider all gravity and columns, walls or frames, where the ratio of
other applied loads that may influence the maximum second-order drift to maximum first-
stability of the structure. order drift (both determined for LRFD load
combinations, with stiffness es adjusted as specified
stiffnesses
User Note: It is important to include in the in Section 3.2.3 ) in all stories is equal to or less
analysis all gravity loads, including loads on than 1.7, it is permissible to include initial
leaning columns and other elements that are
not part of the lateral force resisting system. imperfections only and
load combinations in the
notanalysis for gravity-only
in the analysis for load
combinations that include applied lateral loads.
4. The second-order analysis shall be carried
out under LRFD load combinations. 3.2.2.2 Use of Notional Loads to Represent
Imperfections. For structures that support gravity
3.2.2 Consideration of Initial Imperfections. loads primarily through nominally-vertical
The effect of initial imperfections on the stability of columns, walls or frames, it is permissible to use
the structure shall be taken into account either by notional loads to represent the effects of initial
direct modeling of imperfections in the analysis imperfections in accordance with the requirements
as specified in Section 3.2.2.1 or by the application of this section. The notional load shall bbee applied
of notional loads as specified in Section 3.2.2.2 . to a model of the structure based on its nominal
geometry.
User Note: The imperfections considered in
this section are imperfections in the locations User Note: The notional load concept is
of points of intersection of members. In typical applicable to all types of structures, but the
building structure
structures,
s, the important imperfection specific requirements in Sections 3.2.2.2 (1)
of this type is the out-of-plumbness of
SBC 306 CR 18 44
through 3.2.2.2 (4) are applicable only for the adjust the notional load coefficient
particular class of structure identified above. proportionally.
1. Notional loads shall be applied as lateral User Note: An out-of-plumbness of 1/500

loads at all levels. The notional loads shall represents the maximum tolerance on column
be additive to other lateral loads and shall plumbness specified in Chapter 14. 14 . In some
be applied in all load combinations, except cases, other specified tolerances such as those
as indicated in 3.2.2.2 (4), below. The on plan location of columns will govern and
 = 0.002 
magnitude of the notional loads shall be:
Ni  notional load applied at level i, N

(3-1)
will require a tighter plumbness tolerance.
4. For structures in which the ratio of
maximum second-order drift to maximum
first-order drift (both determined for
Yi = gravity load applied at level i from the LRFD load combinations, with stiffnesses
LRFD load combination, N adjusted as specified in Section 3.2.3 in all
stories is equal to or less than 1.7, it is
User Note: The notional loads can lead to permissible to apply the notional load, Ni,
additional (generally small) fictitious base only in gravity-only load combinations and
shears in the structure. The correct horizontal not in combinations that include other
reactions at the foundation may be obtained lateral loads.
by applying an additional horizontal force at
the base of the structure, equal and opposite 3.2.3 Adjustments to Stiffness. The analysis of
in direction to the sum of all notional loads, the structure to determine the required strengths of
distributed among vertical load-carrying components
follows: shall use reduced stiffnesse
stiffnesses,
s, as
elements in the same pro
proportion
portion as the gravity
load supported by those elements. The 1. A factor of 0.80 shall be applied to all
notional loads can also lead to additional stiffnesses that are considered to contribute
overturning effects, which are not fictitious. to the stability of the structure. It is
permissible to apply this reduction factor
2. The notional load at any level, Ni, shall be to all stiffnesses in the structure.
distributed over that level in the same
manner as the gravity load at the level. The User Note: Applying the stiffness reduction to
notional loads shall be applied in the some members and not others can, in some cases,
direction that provides the greatest result in artificial distortion of the structure under
destabilizing effect. load and possible unintended redistribution of
forces. This can be avoided by applying the
User Note: For most building structures, the reduction to all members, including those that do
requirement regarding notional load direction
may be satisfied as follows: For load
combinations that do not include lateral
loading, consider two alternative orthogonal
directions of notional load application, in a

not contribute to the stability of the structure.
2. An additional factor, , shall be applied to
the flexural stiffnesses of all members
whose flexural stiffnesses are considered
positive and a negative sense in each of the to contribute to the stability of the
two directions, in the same direction at all structure.
levels; for load combinations that include
lateral loading, apply all notional loads in the
direction of the resultant of all lateral loads in
When =⁄1.0 ≤ 0.5 (3-2)
the combination.
3. The notional load coefficient of 0.002 in

When ⁄ > 0.5
(3-1)) is based on a nominal initial story
Eq. (3-1
out-of-plumbness ratio of 1/500; where the    (3-3)
use of a isdifferent
plumbness justified, maximum out-of-
it is permissible to
 = 4 ⁄  [1 ⁄ ]]
where
SBC 306-CR-18 45
 = 
= required axial compressive strength, N
= axial yield strength,
strength, N
User Note: Taken together, sections (1) and (2)

require the use of 0.8b times the nominal elastic
flexural stiffness and 0.8 times other nominal
elastic stiffnesses for structura
structurall steel members in
the analysis.
3. In structures to which Section 3.2.2.2 is
1.0⁄ > 0.5

applicable, in lieu of using b  1.0 where
, it is permissible to use
for all members if a notional load of
 =
0.001 
[where Yi is as defined in Section
3.2.2.2 (1)
(1)]] is applied at all levels, in the
direction specified in Section 3.2.2.2 (2) (2),,
in all load combinations. These notional
loads shall be added to those, if any, used
to account for imperfections and shall not
be subject to Section 3.2.2.2 ((4).
4).
4. Where components comprised of materials
other than structural steel are considered to
contribute to the stability of the structure
and the governing codes and
tions for the other materials
specifications
specifica
require greater reductions in stiffness, such
greater stiffness
stiffness reductions shall be applied
to those components.
3.3Calculation of Design Strengths

For the direct analysis method of design, the
design strengths of members and connections shall
be calculated in accordance with the provisions of
4, Chapter 55,, Chapter 6,
Chapter 4, 6, Chapter 77,, Chapter
8, Chapter 99,, Chapter 10 and Chapter 11 as
applicable, with no further consideration of overall
structure stability. The effectiv
effectivee length factor, K, of
all members shall be taken as unity unless a smaller
value can be justified by rational analysis.
g intended to define the unbraced lengths
Bracing
Bracin
of members shall have sufficient stiffness and
strength to control member movement at the braced
points.
Methods of satisfying bracing requirements for
individual columns, beams and beam-columns are
provided in Appendix E.E. The requirements of
Appendix E are not applicable to brac
bracing
ing that is
included
system. as part of the overall force-resisting
SBC 306-CR-18 46
CHAPTER 3
— DESIGN FOR STABILITY

SBC 306-CR-18 47
CHAPTER 4 — DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR TENSION
CHAPTER 4
4—DESIGN
—DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR TENSION
This chapter applies to prismatic members subject

to axial tension caused by static forces acting
 = 
(b) For tensile rupture in the net section:
(4-1)
through the centroidal axis.

4.1
organized
ed as follows:
—Slenderness Limitations where
 = 
 = 0.75
(4-2)
4.2 —Design Tensile Strength Ae  effective net area, mm2
4.3 —Effective Net Area Ag  gross area of member, mm2

4.4 —Built-up Members Fy  specified minimum yield stress, MPa
4.5 —Pin-Connected Members
Fu  specified minimum tensile strength, MPa
4.6 —Eyebars
When members without holes are fully connected
User Note: For cases not included in this by welds, the effective net area used in Eq
Eq.. (4-2
(4-2))
chapter the following sections apply: 4.3.. When holes are
shall be as defined in Section 4.3
Appendix C Design for Fatigue present in a member with welded-end connections,
or at the welded connection in the case of plug or
Chapter 8 Design for Combined Forces and slot welds, the effective net area through the holes
Torsion shall be used in Eq. (4-2
(4-2).
).
10.3 Threaded rods 4.3—
4.3 —Effective Net Area
10.4.1 Connecting elements in tension The gross area, Ag, and net area, An, of tension
10.4.3 Block shear rupture strength at members shall be determined in accordance with
end connections of tension the provisions of Section 2.4.3.
members The effective net area of tension members shall be
determined as follows:
4.1—
4.1—Slenderness Limitations
There is no maximum slenderness limit for
 =  (4-3)
where U, the shear lag factor, is determined as
members in tension. shown in Table 4-14-1..
For open cross sections such as W, M, S, C or HP
User Note: For members designed on the basis shapes, WTs, STs,
STs, and single and double angles
angles,, the
of tension, the slenderness ratio L /r preferably shear lag factor, U, need not be less than the ratio of
should not exceed 300. This suggestion does not the gross area of the connected element(s) to the
apply to rods or hangers in tension. member gross area. This provision does not apply
to closed sections, such as HSS sections, nor to
plates.
4.2—Design Tensile Strength
4.2—
User Note: For bolted splice plates Ae  An
The design strength of tension members, tPn, shall
 0.85Ag, according to Section 10.4.1 .
be the lower value obtained according to the limit
states of yielding in the gross sec
section
tion and fractur
fracturee
in the net section.
4.4—
4.4 —Built-up Members
(a) For tesile yielding in the gross section:
 = 0.90 For limitations on the longitudinal spacing of
connectors between elements in continuous contact
SBC 306-CR-18 48
CHAPTER 4 —DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR TENSION
consisting of a plate and a shape or two plates, see force. When the pin is expected to provide for
Section 10.3.5 . relative movement between connected parts while
under full load, the diameter of the pin hole shall
User Note: The longitudinal spacing of not be more than 1 mm greater than the diameter of
connectors between components should the pin.
preferably limit the slenderness ratio in any
The width of the plate at the pin hole shall not be
component between the connectors to 300.
less than 2be  d and the minimum extension, a,
Either perforated cover plates or tie plates without beyond the bearing end of the pin hole, parallel to
lacing are permitted to be used on the open sides of the axis of the member, shall not be less than 1.33be.
built-up tension members. Tie plates shall have a
The corners beyond the pin hole are permitted to
length not less than two-thirds the distance between
the lines of welds or fastener
fastenerss connecting them to be cut at 45 to the axis of the member, provided
the components of the member. The thickness of the net area beyond the pin hole, on a plane
such tie plates shall not be less than one-fiftieth of perpendicular to the cut, is not less than that
required beyond the pin hole parallel to the axis
the distance between these lines. The longitudinal
spacing of intermittent welds or fas fasteners
teners at tie of the member.
plates shall not exceed 150 mm.
mm. 4.6—
4.6—Eyebars
4.5—
4.5—Pin-Connected Members 4.6.1 Design Strength. The design strength of
eyebars shall be determined in accordance with
4.5.1 Design Strength. The design strength of
4.2,, with Ag taken as the cross-sectional
Section 4.2
pin-connected members tPn, shall be the lowest of
area of the body.
the following limit states: For calculation purposes, the width of the body of
(a) Tensile rupture on the net effective area:
the eyebars shall not exceed eight times its
 = 22
 = 0.75
(b) Shear rupture on the effective area:

(4-4)
thickness.
4.6.2 Dimensional Requirements.
shall be of uniform thickness, without
Eyebars
 = 0.6
 = 0.75
(4-5)
(c) For bearing on the projected area of the pin,
reinforcement at the pin holes, and have circular
heads with the periphery concentric with the pin
hole.
use Section 10.7.
10.7. The radius of transition between the circular head
(d) For yielding on the gross section, use Section and the eyebar body shall not be less than the head
4.2.
4.2. diameter.
where The pin diameter shall not be less than seven-
eighths times the eyebar body width, and the pin
Asf  area on the shear failure path  2t(a hole diameter shall not be more than 1 mm greater
 d/2), mm2 than the pin diamete
diameter.
r.
a  shortest distance from edge of the pin For steels having Fy greater than 485 MPa, the hole
hole to the edge of the member diameter shall not exceed five times the plate
measured parallel to the direction of the thickness, and the width of the eyebar body shall
force, mm be reduced accordi
accordingly.
ngly.
be  2t  16, but not more than the actual A thickness of less than 12 mm is permissible only
distance from the edge of the hole to th
thee if external nuts are provided to tighten pin plates
edge of the part measured in the direction and filler plates into snug contact. The width from
normal to the applied force, mm the hole edge to the plate edge perpendic
perpendicular
ular to the
d  pin diameter, mm direction of applied load shall be greater than two-
t  thickness of plate, mm thirds and, for the purpose of calculation, not more
than three-fourths times the eyebar body width.
4.5.2 Dimensional Requirements. The pin hole
shall be located midway between the edges of the
member in the direction normal to the applied
SBC 306-CR-18 49
CHAPTER 4 — DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR TENSION
TABLES AND FIGURES OF CHAPTER 4
Table 4-1 : Shear Lag Factors for Connections to Tension Members
Case Description of Element Shear Lag Factor, U Example

All tension members where the tension load is
transmitted directly to each of the cross-sectional
1 U = 1.0 ---
elements
5 and 6). by fasteners or welds (except as in Cases 4,
All tension members, except plates and HSS, where
the tension load is transmitted to some but
bu t not all of
2
the cross- sectional elements by fasteners or
longitudinal welds or by longitudinal welds in
combination with transverse welds. (Alternatively,
for W, M, S and HP, Case 7 may be used. For angles
 = 1  ̅1
Case 8 may be used.)
U = 1.0
All tension members where the tension load is
and
3 transmitted only by transverse welds to some but not
An = area of the directly
---
all of the cross-sectional elements.
connected elements
Plates where the tension load is transmitted by /  2w U  1.0 …
4 2w  /  1.5w U  0.87
longitudinal welds only. …
1.5w  /  w…U  0.75
5 Round HSS with a single concentric gusset plate

/  1.3D
D≤ l
… U
=
 =̅ 1=̅1
< 1.3D... U 1 –
 1.0
 x
l
with a single
concentric gusset plate
̄ = 422 ̅
l ≥ H...
6 Rectangular HSS
with two side gusset
plates
l 
≥ H...=
̅ = 4  1   1
with flange connected
W, M, S or HP with 3 or more Bf ≥ 2/3d…U = 0.90
---
Shapes or Tees cut from fasteners per line in the bf < 2/3d…U = 0.85
7
these shapes. (If U is direction of loading
calculated per Case 2, the with web connected
larger value is permitted towith 4 or more fas-
U = 0.70
be used.) teners per line in the
direction of loading
with 4 or more fas-
teners per line in the U = 0.80 ---
direction of loading
Single and double angles (If
U is calculated per Case 2, With 3 fasteners per
the larger value is permitted line in the direction of
8
to be used.) loading (With fewer U = 0.60 ---
than 3 fasteners per
line in the direction of
loading, use Case 2.)
l = length of connection, mm; w= plate width, mm; x– = eccentricity of connection, mm; B = overall width of rectangular
HSS H
in themember,
plane ofmeasured 90° to the
the connection, mmplane of the connection, mm; = overall height of rectangular HSS member, measured
SBC 306-CR-18 50
CHAPTER 4
— DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR TENSION

SBC 306-CR-18 51
CHAPTER 5 — DESIGN FOR COMPRESSION
5—DESIGN
CHAPTER 5 —DESIGN FOR COMPRESSION
L = laterally unbraced length of the member,

This chapter addresses members subject to axial
mm
compression through the centroidal axis. The
chapter is organized as follows: r = radius of gyration, mm
5.1 —General Provisions For members designed on the basis of compression,
the effective slenderness ratio KL /r preferably
5.2 —Effective Length
should not exceed 200.
5.3 —Flexural Buckling of Members Without
Slender Elements
5.4 —Torsional and Flexural-Torsional 5.3—
5.3 —Flexural Buckling of Members
Buckling of Members Without Slender Without Slender Elements
Elements This section applies to nonslender element
5.5 —Single Angle Compression Members compression members as defined in Section 2.4.1
for elements in uniform compression.
5.6 —Built-up Members
5.7 —Members With Slender Elements User Note: When the torsional unbraced
length larger than the lateral unbraced length,
Sectionis5.4 may control the design of wide
flange and similarly shaped columns.
User Note: For cases not included in this
chapter, the following sections apply: The nominal compressive strength, Pn, shall be
8.1 – 8.2 Members subject to combined axial determined based on the limit state of flexural
buckling.
compression and flexure
8.3 Members subject to axial compression
and torsion
 = 
The critical stress, Fcr, is determined as follows:
(5-1)
9.2 Composite axially loaded members

10.4.4 Compressive strength of connecting
(a) When
 ≤ 4.71  ≤ 2.25
( or )
elements  (5-2)
5.1—
5.1—General Provisions
The design compressive strength, c Pn, is
=>00.4..67581⋅   > 2.25
(b) When
( or
determined as follows.
The nominal compressive strength, Pn, shall be the
lowest value obtained based on the applicable limit
 = 0.877877
Where, Fe = elastic buckling stress determined
(5-3)
states of flexural buckling, torsional buckling, and (5-4),

according to Eq. (5-4 ), as specified in Appendix F
F,,
flexural- torsional buckling. Section F.2.3(b)
b),, or through an elastic buckling
 = 0.85 analysis, as applicable, MPa
 =  
 
(5-4)
5.2—
5.2—Effective Length
The effective length factor, K, for calculation of
member slenderness, KL/r, shall be determined in User Note: The two inequalities for
accordance with Chapter 3 or Appendix F,
F,
calculating the limits and applicability of
where
SBC 306-CR-18 52
Sections 5.3(
5.3(a)
a) and 5.3(b)
b),, one based on KL/r For unsymmetric members, Fe is the
and one based on Fy /Fe, provide the same lowest root of the cubic equation
result.   =0  (5-10)
5.4
5.4—
—Torsional and Flexural-Torsional
Buckling of Members Without Slender
̄ ̄
Elements where
2
This section applies to singly symmetric and Ag = gross cross-sectional area of member, mm
unsymmetric members and certain doubly Cw = warping constant, mm6
symmetric members, such as cruciform or built-up
columns without slender elements, as defined in
Section 2.4.1 for elements in uniform compression.
 = 
 
(5-11)
In addition, this section applies to all doubly
symmetric members without slender elements when
the torsional unbraced length exceeds the lateral  = 
 
(5-12)
unbraced length. These provisions are required for
single angles with b/t > 20.  
 =   ̄ (5-13)
The nominal compressive strength, Pn, shall be
determined based on the limit states of torsional and G = shear modulus of elasticity of steel
flexural-torsional buckling, as follows:
= 77 200 MPa
(5-5)
 = 
(a) For double angle and tee-shaped compression
members:
 =1 +̄ 
Ix, Iy = moment of inertia about the principal
axes, mm4.
(5-14)
 = +  1  1  +  (5-6)

J
Kx
= torsional constant, mm4.
= effective length factor for flexural
buckling about x-axis.
where Fcry is taken as Fcr from Eq. (5-2) or
(5-3)) for flexural buckling about the y-axis
(5-3 Ky = effective length factor for flexural
of symmetry, and KL/r = KyL/ry for tee- buckling about y-axis.
shaped compression members, and KL/r =
(KL/r)m from Section 5.6 for double angle Kz = effective length factor for torsional
compression members, and buckling.
= polar radius of gyration about the shear
 = ̄
(b) For all other cases, Fcr shall be determined
according to Eq. (5-2) or (5-3),
(5-3 ), using the
(5-7)
̄ r0
2
center, mm.
 x0
2
 y0
2

Ix 
Ag
Iy
(5-15)
torsional or flexural-torsional elastic buckling rx = radius of gyration about x-axis, mm.
stress, Fe, determined as follows:
ry = radius of gyration about y-axis, mm.
For doubly symmetric members:
 =   1 

  (5-8)
xo, yo = coordinates of the shear center with
respect to the centroid, mm.
For singly symmetric members where y

is the axis of symmetry
User Note: For doubly symmetric I-shaped
sections, Cw may be taken as where ho is
the distance between flange centroids, in lieu of
 
(5-9)
+
 =   1  1   +  aangles,
more omit
precise
the analysis.
term withFor
Fez and take xo as 0.
tees and
Cw when double
computing
SBC 306-CR-18 53
5.5—
5.5—Single Angle Compression adjacent web members attached to the same
side of the gusset plate or chord:
Members
The nominal compressive strength, Pn, of single When  ≤ 75
angle members shall be determined in accordance
with Section 5.3 or Section 5.7
5.7,, as appropriate, for
axially loaded members. For single angles with b/t
 = 60  0.8 (5-18)
> 20, Section 5.4 shall be used. Members meeting
When
the criteria imposed in Section 5.5(
5.5(a) or 5.5
5.5((b) are
permitted to be designed as axially loaded members
using the specified effective slenderness ratio, KL/r.

 = 45> 75≤ 200 (5-19)
The effects of eccentricity on single angle members
For unequal-leg angles with leg length ratios less
are permitted to be neglected when evaluated as
than 1.7 and connected through the shorter leg, KL/r
axially loaded compression members using one of
from Eqs. (5-18
(5-18)) and (5-19)
(5-19) shall be increased by
the effective slenderness ratios specified in Section 2
adding 6[(bl/bs) - 1], but KL/r of the member shall
5.5(a) or 5.5
5.5( 5.5((b), provided that:
not be taken as less than 0.82L/rz
1. members are loaded at the ends in
where
compression through the same one leg;
L = length of member between work points at
2. members are attached by welding or by
truss chord centerlines, mm.
connections with a minimum of two bolts;
and bl = length of longer leg of angle, mm.
t ransverse loads.
3. There are no intermediate transverse bs = length of shorter leg of angle, mm.
Single angle members with different end conditions rx = radius of gyration about the geometric
from those described in Section 5.55.5((a) or (b), with axis parallel to the connected leg, mm,
the ratio of long leg width to short leg width greater rz = radius of gyration about the minor
than 1.7 or with transverse loading, shall be principal axis, mm.
evaluated for combined axial load and flexure using
the provisions of Chapter 88..
(a) For equal-leg angles or unequal-leg angles 5.6
5.6——Built-up Members
connected through the longer leg that are
individual members or are web members of 5.6.1 Compressive Strength. This section
planar trusses with adjacent web members applies to built-up members composed of two
attached to the same side of the gusset plate shapes either (a) interconnected by bolts or welds,
or chord: or (b) with at least one open side interconnected by
perforated cover plates or lacing with tie plates.
When

 = 720.≤ 8075 (5-16)
The end connection
by means shall be
of pretensioned
faying surfaces.
welded or connected
bolts with Class A or B
When
 > 80 User Note: It is acceptable to design a bolted
end connection of a built-up compression
 = 321.25 ≤ 200 (5-17)
member for the full compressive load with
bolts in bearing and bolt design based on the
shear strength; however, the bolts must be
For unequal-leg angles with leg length ratios less pretensioned. In built-up compression members
members,,
than 1.7 and connected through the shorter leg, KL/r such as double-angle struts in trusses, a small
from Eqs. (5-16)
(5-16) and (5-17)
(5-17) shall be increased by relative slip between the elements especially at
2
adding 4[(bl/bs) -1], but KL/r of the members shall the end connections can increase the effective
not be taken as less than 0.95L/rz. length of the combined cross section to that of the
individual components
components and significant
significantly
ly reduce
(b) For equal-leg
connected angles
through the or unequal-leg
longer angles
leg that are web the compressive strength of the strut. Therefore,
the connection between the elements at the ends
members of box or space trusses with
SBC 306-CR-18 54
of built-up members should

should be designed to resist built-up member. The least radius of gyration, ri,
slip. shall be used in computing the slenderness ratio of
each component part.
The nominal compressive strength of built-up At the ends of built-up compression members
members composed of two shapes that are bearing on base plates or finished surfaces, all
interconnected by bolts or welds shall be components in contact with one another shall be
5.3,, 5.4 or
determined in accordance with Sections 5.3 connected by a weld having a length not less than
5.7 subject to the following modification. In lieu of
more accurate analysis, if the buckling mode the maximum
spaced width not
longitudinally of the
moremember ordiameters
than four by bolts
involves relative deformations that produce shear apart for a distance equal to 1.5 times the maximum
forces in the connectors between individual shapes,
width of the member.
KL/r is replaced by (KL/r)m determined as follows:
Along the length of built-up compression members
(a) For intermediate connectors that are bolted between the end connections required above,
snug-tight:
   =    (5-20)
longitudinal spacing for intermittent welds or bolts
shall be adequate to provide for the transfer of the
required strength. For limitations on the
longitudinal spacing of fasteners between elements
(b) For intermediate connectors that are welded or in continuous contact consisting of a plate and a
are connected by means of pretensioned bolts: shape or two plates, see Section 10.3.5 . Where a
When
 component of a built-up compression member
consists of an outside plate, the maximum spacing
shall not exceed the thickness of the thinner outside


  >≤=4040  (5-21) plate times
0.755⁄ nor 300 mm, when
intermittent welds are provided along the edges of
When the components or when fasteners are provided on
all gage lines at each section. When fasteners are
   =      (5-22)
staggered, the maximum spacing of fasteners on
1.12⁄
each gage line shall not exceed the thickness of the
thinner outside plate times nor 450
where mm.
  = modified slenderness ratio of built up

member
Open sides of compression members built up from
plates or shapes shall be provided with continuous
cover plates perforated with a succession of access
 = slenderness ratio of built-up member
holes. The unsupported width of such plates at
access holes, as defined in Section 2.4.1 , is
  
Ki
acting considered
being as a unit in the buckling direction
= 0.50 for angles back-to-back

assumed to following
provided the the design
contributerequirements
toirements
requ strength
are met:
1. The width-to-thickness ratio shall conform
to the limitations of Section 2.4.1 .
= 0.75 for channels back-to-back
= 0.86 for all other cases User Note: It is conservative to use the limiting
width-to-thickness ratio for Case 7 in Table
a = distance between connectors, mm.
2-1 an
andd Table 2-2 with the width, b, taken as
ri = minimum radius of gyration of the transverse distance between the nearest
individual component, mm. lines of fasteners. The net area of the plate is
taken at the widest hole. In lieu of this
5.6.2 Dimensional Requirements. Individual
approach, the limiting width-to-thickness
components of compression members composed of
ratio may be determined through analysis.
two or more shapes shall be connected to one
another at intervals, a, such that the effective
2. The ratio of length (in direction of stress)
slenderness ratio, Ki a/ri, of each of the component to width of hole shall not exceed 2.
shapes between the fasteners does not exceed three-
fourths times the governing slenderness ratio of the
SBC 306-CR-18 55
3. The clear distance between holes in the For additional spacing requirements, see Section
direction of stress shall be not less than the 10.3.5 .
transverse distance between nearest lines
of connecting fasteners or welds. 5.7—Members With Slender Elements
5.7—
4. The periphery of the holes at all points This section applies to slender-element
shall have a minimum radius of 38 mm. compression members, as defined in Section 2.4.1
for elements in uniform compression.
As an alternative to perforated cover plates, lacing
n
with tie plates is permitted at each end and at The nominal
lowest compressive
value based strength, Plimit
on the applicable , shall be the
states of
intermediate points if the lacing is interrupted. Tie
plates shall be as near the ends as practicable. In flexural buckling, torsional buckling, and flexural-
torsional buckling.
members providing design strength, the end tie
plates shall have a length of not less than the
distance between the lines of fasteners or welds
 = 
The critical stress, Fcr, shall be determined as
(5-23)
connecting them to the components of the member.
Intermediate tie plates shall have a length not less follows:
than one-half of this distance. The thickness of tie
plates shall be not less than one-fiftieth of the (a) When
 ≤ 4.71  ≤ 2.25
(or )
distance between lines of welds or fasteners
connecting them to the segments of the members.  = 00..658 ⋅  
  (5-24)
In welded construction, the welding on each line
connecting a tie plate shall total not less than one-
third the length of the plate. In bolted construction, (b) When ( or  )
the spacing in the direction of stress in tie plates
shall be not more than six diameters and the tie
plates shall be connected to each segment by at least where
> 4.=70.11877   > 2.25(5-25)
three fasteners.
Fe = elastic buckling stress, calculated using Eqs.
Lacing, including flat bars, angles, channels or (5-4)
(5-4) and (5-8
(5-8)) for doubly symmetric
other shapes employed as lacing, shall be so spaced members, Eqs. (5-4(5-4)) and (5-9)
(5-9) for singly
that the L/r ratio of the flange element included symmetric members, and Eq. (5-10) for
between their connections shall not exceed three- unsymmetric members, except for single
fourths times the governing slenderness ratio for the angles with b/t ≤ 20, where Fe is calculated
member as a whole. Lacing shall be proportioned to using Eq. (5-4
(5-4),
), MPa
provide a shearing strength norm
normalal to the axis of the
Q = net reduction factor accounting for all
member equal to 2% of the design compressive
slender compression elements;
strength of the member. The L/r ratio for lacing bars
arranged in single systems shall not exceed 140. For = 1.0 for members without slender elements, as
double lacing this ratio shall not exceed 200. defined in Section 2.4.1 , for elements in
Double lacing bars shall be joined at the uniform compression
intersections. For lacing bars in compression, L is
= Qs Qa for members with slender-element
permitted to be taken as the unsupported length of
sections, as defined in Section 2.4.1 , for
the lacing bar between welds or fasteners
elements in uniform compression.
connecting it to the components of the built-up
member for single lacing, and 70% of that distance
User Note: For cross sections composed of only
for double lacing.
unstiffened slender elements, Q  Qs (Qa
User Note: The inclination of lacing bars to  1.0). For cross sections composed of only
the axis of the member shall preferably be not stiffened slender elements, Q  Qa (Qs  1.0).
less
less than
than 60 forfor sing
single
le la
laci
cing
ng an
andd 45 fo
forr For cross sections composed of both stiffened
double lacing. When the distance between the and unstiffened slender elements, Q  Qs Qa. For
lines of welds or fasteners in the flanges is cross sections composed of multiple unstiffened
more than 375 mm, the lacing shall preferably slender elements, it is conservative to use the
be double or be made of angles. smaller Qs from the more slender element in
SBC 306-CR-18 56
determining the member strength for pure t = thickness of element, mm

compression. h = Clear d
distance
istance between flanges less the
fillet or corner radius for rolled shapes;
5.7.1 Slender Unstiffened Elements, Qs. The
distance between adjacent lines of fasteners
reduction factor, Qs, for slender unstiffened or the clear distance between flanges when
elements is defined as follows:
welds are used for built-up shapes, mm.
(a) For flanges, angles and plates projecting from (c) For single angles
rolled columns or other compression members:
When
 ≤ 0.56 When  ≤ 0.455
 = 1.0 (5-26)
 = 1.0    (5-32)
0.56 <  < 1.03 When 0.45 <  ≤ 0.91

When
 = 1.415415  0.0.7474  (5-27)

 = 1.1.3434  0.76   (5-33)
When
 ≥ 1.03 When
 > 0.91
(5-34)
 = 0. 69
(b) For flanges, angles and plates projecting from
(5-28)
where
 = 0. 53
built-up I-shaped columns or other
b = full width of longest leg, mm.
compression members:
When
 ≤ 0.64 (d) For stems of tees
 ≤ 0.75
 0.=61.40 <  ≤ 1.17  (5-29)
When
 = 1.0  
When      When0.75 <  ≤ 1.03
(5-35)
 = 1.415415  >0.0.6561.517 (5-30)

 = 1.1.908
08 >1.1.1.022232 

 
 (5-36)
When When
 = 0.90 (5-31)
 = 0.69 (5-37)
where
where
b = width of unstiffened compression element,
as defined in Section 2.4.1 , mm d = full nominal depth of tee, mm.
ℎ
, and shall not be taken less than 5.7.2 Slender Stiffened Elements, Qa. The
reduction factor, Qa, for slender stiffened elements
 = 
0.35 nor greater than 0.76 for calculation
purposes
is defined as follows:
SBC 306-CR-18 57
 =  (5-38)
where
Ag = gross cross-sectional area of member, mm2.
Ae = summation of the effective areas of the cross
section based on the reduced effective width,
be, mm2.
The reduced effective width, be, is determined as
follows:
(a) For uniformly compressed slender elements,
 ≥ 1.49
with except flanges
flanges of square and
rectangular sections of uniform thickness:
 = 1.92  1  .  ≤  (5-39)
Where, f is taken as Fcr with Fcr calculated based on

Q = 1.0
(b) For flanges of square and rectangular slender-

element sections of uniform thickness with  ≥
1.40 ;
 = 1.92  1  .  ≤  (5-40)
where,  = ⁄
User Note: In lieu of calculating f  Pn /Ae,
which requires iteration, f may be taken
equal to Fy. This will result in a slightly
conservative estimate of column design
strength.
(c) For axially loaded circular sections:
When 0.11  <  ≤ 0.45
 =  = 0.038  23 (5-41)
where
D = outside diameter of round HSS, mm.
t = thickness of wall, mm.
SBC 306-CR-18 58
TABLE 5-1 : SELECTION TABLE FOR THE APPLICATION OF CHAPTER 5 SECTIONS
Without Slender Elements With Slender Elements

Cross Section Sections in Sections in
Limit States Limit States
Chapter 5 Chapter 5
LB
5.3 FB
5.7 FB
5.4 TB
TB
LB
5.3 FB
5.7 FB
5.4 FTB
FTB
LB
5.3 FB 5.7
FB
LB
5.3 FB 5.7
FB
LB
5.3 FB
5.7 FB
5.4 FTB
FTB
5.3 LB
FB 5.6
5.4 FB
FTB 5.7
0 FTB
LB
5.5 5.5
FB
N/A
5.3 FB N/A
Unsymmetrical shapes other 5.4 FTB 5.7

LB
than single angles FTB
FB = flexural buckling, TB = torsional buckling, FTB = flexural-torsional buckling,
LB = local buckling
SBC 306-CR-18 59
CHAPTER 5
— DESIGN FOR COMPRESSION

SBC 306-CR-18 60
CHAPTER 6 — DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR FLEXURE
CHAPTER 6
6—DESIGN
—DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR FLEXURE
This chapter applies to members subject to simple Appendix C Members subject to fatigue
bending the
bending, about one principal
member axis.
is loaded in For parallel
a plane simple For guidance
sections of thisinchapter
determining
to apply,the appropriate
Table 6-1 can
to a principal axis that passes through the shear be used.
center or is restrained against twisting at load points
and supports.
organized
ed as follows: 6.1—General Provisions
6.1—
6.1 —General Provisions The design flexural strength,
strength, b Mn, shall be
6.2 —Doubly Symmetric Compact I-Shaped
1. For all provisions in this chapter
Members and Channels Bent About Their
Major Axis
6.3 —Doubly Symmetric I-Shaped Members
 = 0.90
and the nominal flexural strength, Mn, shall
with Compect Webs and Noncompect or
be determined according to Sections 6.2
Slender Flanges Bent about Their Major Axis
through 6.13
6.13..
6.4 —Other I-Shaped Members with Compact or 2. The provisions in this chapter are based on
Noncompact Webs Bent About Their Major
the assumption that points of support for
Axis
beams and girders are restrained against
6.5 —Doubly Symmectric and Singly rotation about their longitudinal axis.
Symmetric I-Shaped Members with Slender
3. For singly symmetric members in single
Webs Bent About Their Majout Axis
curvature and all doubly symmetric
6.6 —I-Shaped Members and Channels Bent members:
About Their Minor Axis
Cb, the lateral-torsional buckling modification
6.7 —Square and Rectangular HSS and Box- factor for non-uniform moment diagrams when
Shaped Members both ends of the segment are braced is determined
6.8 —Round HSS as follows:
6.9 —Tees and Double Angles Loaded in The (6-1)

Plane of Symmetry
6.10 —Single Angles
6.11 —Rectangular Bars and Rounds
 = 2.5 3
where
12.354
 4 3
 3
Mmax  absolute value of maximum moment in the
unbraced segment, N-mm
6.12 —Unsymmetrical Shapes
MA  absolute value of moment at quarter point
6.13 —Proportions of Beams and Girders
of the unbraced segment, N-mm
MB  absolute value of moment at centerline of
User Note: For cases not included in this chapter the unbraced segment, N-mm
the following sections apply: MC  absolute value of moment at three-quarter
Chapter 7 Design for shear point of the unbraced segment, N-mm
8.1 –8.3 Members subject to biaxial flexure or For cantilevers or overhangs where the free end is
to combined flexure and axial force unbraced, .
8.3 Members subject to flexure and torsion
 = 1.0
User Note: For doubly symmetric members
with no transverse loading between brace
SBC 306-CR-18 61
points, Eq. (6-1

(6-1)) reduces to 1.0 for the case of where
equal end moments of opposite sign (uniform Lb = length between points that are either
moment), 2.27 for the case of equal end
braced against lateral displacement of the
moments of the same sign (reverse curvature
compression flange or braced against twist of
bending), and to 1.67 when one end moment
the cross section, mm
equals zero. For singly sy
symmetric
mmetric members, a
more detailed analysis for Cb is presented in
the Commentary.
4. In singly symmetric members subject to

reverse curvature bending, the lateral-
torsional buckling strength shall be
 =  10.078  
and where
ℎ (6-5)
checked for both flanges. The design

flexural strength shall be greater than or E  modulus of elasticity of steel  200 000
equal to the maximum required moment MPa
causing compression within the flange J  torsional constant, mm4
under consideration.
Sx  elastic section modulus taken about the x-
6.2—
6.2—Doubly Symmetric Compact I- axis, mm3
Shaped Members and Channels Bent
About Their Major Axis ho  distance between the flange centroids, mm
This section applies to doubly symmetric I-shaped User Note: The square root term in Eq. (6-5
(6-5))
members and channels bent about their major may be conservatively taken equal to 1.0.
axis, having compact webs and compact flanges
as defined in Section 2.4.1 for flexure. User Note: Eqs. (6-4)
(6-4) and (6-5)
(6-5) provide
The nominal flexural strength, Mn, shall be the lower identical solutions to the following expression
value obtained according to the limit states of for lateral-torsional buckling of doubly
yielding (plastic moment) and lateral-torsional symmetric sections that has been presented in
buckling.
buckling. 306:
SBC 306:
6.2.1 Yielding
 =  =  (6-2)
    
 =       
The advantage of Eqs. (6-4(6-4)) and (6-5)
(6-5) is that
where the form is very similar to the expression for
Fy  specified minimum yield stress of the type of
specified lateral-torsional buckling of singly symmetric
(6-16)) and (6-17
sections given in Eqs. (6-16 (6-17).
).
steel being used, MPa
Zx  plastic section modulus about the x-axis, The limiting lengths Lp and Lr are determined as
mm3 follows:
6.2.2 Lateral-Torsional Buckling
(a) When Lb  Lp, the limit state of lateral-
torsional buckling does not apply.
 = 1.76 (6-6)
(b) When Lp  Lb  Lr
 = 1.95 0.7    6.6. 7676 (6-7)
 =    0.0.77 −− ≤  (6-3) Where,
(c) When Lb > Lr

 =   ≤  (6-4)  = ℎ
SBC 306-CR-18 62
 = 0.7 Buckling.. For lateral-

torsional buckling, the provisions of Section 6.2.2
shall apply.
 =  (6-8)

6.3.2 Compression Flange Local Buckling
(a) For sections with non-compact flanges
and the coefficient c is determined as follows: (6-11)

(a) For doubly symmetric I-shapes:
 =1 (6-9)
 =  
= 0.0.0.977   
(b) For sections with slender flanges
(6-12)
 = 2
(b) For channels where
 = 2 
ℎ
(6-10)
pf = p is the limiting slendernes
slendernesss for a compact
flange, Table 2-2
rf = r is the limiting slenderness for a non-
User Note: For doubly symmetric I-shapes compact flange, Table 2-2
with rectangular flanges,
 = 4  ℎ
 = and shall not be taken less than 0.35 nor
greater
⁄ than 0.76 for calculation purpose
ℎ
h = distance as defined in Section 2.4.1 b,

b, mm
 = 2 
(6-8)) becomes
and thus Eq. (6-8
ℎ
6.4—
6.4—Other I-Shaped Members with
Compact or Noncompact Webs Bent
rts may be approximated accurately and
About Their Major Axis
conservatively as the radius of gyration of
the compression flange plus one-sixth of the This section applies to doubly symmetric I-shaped
members bent abo
about
ut their major axis with non-
web:
  ℎ
compact webs and singly symmetric I-shaped
members with webs attached to the mid-width of
the flanges, bent about their major axis, with
 = 1212 1  16   compact or non-compact

Section 2.4.1 for flexure. webs, as defined in
User Note: I-shaped members for which this

6.3—
6.3—Doubly Symmetric I-Shaped section is applicable may be designed
Members with Compect Webs and 6.5..
conservatively using Section 6.5
Noncompect or Slender Flanges Bent
about Their Major Axis The nominal flexural strength, Mn, shall be the
lowest value obtained according to the limit states
This section applies to doubly symmetric I-shaped of compression flange yielding, lateral-torsional
members bent about their major axis having buckling, compression flange local buckling, and
compact webs and non-compact or slender flanges tension flange yielding.
as defined in Section 2.4.1 for flexure.
6.4.1 Compression Flange Yielding
The nominal flexural strength, Mn, shall be the
lower value obtained according to the limit states of (6-13)
lateral-torsional buckling and compression flange
local buckling.
where
 =   =   
SBC 306-CR-18 63
Myc  yield moment in the compression

flange, N-mm
 = ℎ
(a) When Lb  Lp, the limit state of lateral-torsional
The web plastifi
 = 
cation factor, Rpc, shall be
buckling does not apply. plastification
(b) When Lp < Lb  Lr determined as follows:
=−−≤  (6-14)
(i) When Iyc /Iy  0.23
  ≤ 
 = 
(a) When
 =   ≤  

(c) When Lb  Lr
(6-15)
(b) When  > 
 
(6-22)
where
 =   (6-16)  =    1 1 −−   ≤  (6-23)
     
 =   10.078     
   (6-17)
(ii) When Iyc /Iy  0.23
 = 1.0 (6-24)
where
For  ≤0.23 ℎ 
, J shall be taken as zero
 =  ≤ 1.6
Sxc, Sxt  elastic section modulus referred to
where
compression and tension flanges,
Iyc = moment of inertia of the compression respectively, mm3
flange about the y-axis, mm4
The stress, FL, is determined as follows:  = 
ℎ
When  ≥ 0.7 pw  p, the limiting slenderness for a compact
 =0.<70.7 (6-18)
rw
web, Table 2-2
 r, the limiting slenderness for a non-
When  hc
compact web, Table 2-2
 twice the distance from the centroid to the
(6-19)
 =   ≥ 0.5
The limiting laterally unbraced length for the limit
state of yielding, Lp, is determined as:
following: the inside face of the compression
flange less the fillet or corner radius, for
rolled shapes; the nearest line of fastener
fastenerss at
the compression flange or the inside faces of
 = 1.1 (6-20)
the compression flange when welds are used,
for built-up sections, mm
The effective radius of gyration for lateral-torsional
buckling, rt, is determined as follows:
The limiting unbraced length for the limit state of
inelastic lateral-torsional buckling, Lr, is i. For I-shapes with a rectangular
determined as:
     (6-21)  = ℎ
 
compression flange
ℎ (6-25)
 = 1.95     6.6.7676

Where,
where 1212  16   
ℎ
SBC 306-CR-18 64
 = 
ℎ
(6-26)  = 2
bfc  width of compression flange, mm pf = p, the limiting slenderne
slenderness
ss for a compact
tfc  compression flange thickness, mm
flange, Table 2-2
rf = r, the limiting slenderness for a non-
compact flange, Table 2-2
ii. For I-shapes with a channel cap or a cover 6.4.4 Tension Flange Yielding
plate attached to the compression flange
flange
rt  radius of gyration of the flange components (a) When Sxt  Sxc, the limit state of tension flange
in flexural compression
compression plus one-third of the yielding does not apply.
web area in compression due to application of (b) When Sxt  Sxc
aw
major axis bending moment alone, mm
 the ratio of two times the web area in
compression due to application of major axis
 =  (6-29)
bending moment alone to the area of the

compression flange components  = 
where
The web plastif ication factor corresponding to the

plastification
tension flange yielding limit state, Rpt, is
User Note: For I-shapes with a rectangular
rt may beasapproximated
compression
accurately andflange,
conservatively the radius of
gyration of the compression flange plus one-
When  ≤ 
ℎ
third of the compression portion of the web; in

 =  (6-30)
 = 1212 1 16 

other words
When > 

ℎ
6.4.3 Compression Flange Local Buckling

 =    1 1 −−   ≤  (6-31)
Where
(a) For sections with compact flanges, the limit
state of local buckling does not apply.
(b) For sections with non-compact flanges
 = 
ℎ
pw  p, the limiting slenderness for a compact

(6-27)
 =    −− web, defined in Table 2-2
 = 0.9
(c) For sections with slender flanges rw  r, the limiting slenderness for a non-
compact web, defined in Table 2-2
(6-28)
where 6.5
6.5——Doubly Symmectric and Singly
FL (6-18)) and (6-19)
is defined in Eqs. (6-18 (6-19) Symmetric I-Shaped Members with
Slender Webs Bent About Their Majout
Rpc is the web plastific ation factor, determined
plastification
Axis
by Eq. (6-22
(6-22))
 =  ⁄
ℎ
and shall not be taken less than
0.35 nor greater than 0.76 for calculation
This section applies to doubly symmetric and
singly symmetric I-shaped members with slender
webs attached to the mid-width of the flanges and
bent about their major axis as defined in Section
purposes 2.4.1 for flexure.
SBC 306-CR-18 65

lowest value obtained according to the limit states  = 0.29 (6-40)
of compression flange yielding, lateral-torsional
buckling, compression flange local buckling, and
tension flange yielding. where

6.5.1 Compression Flange Yielding
  ℎ
and shall not be taken less than 0.35 nor
 ==    (6-32)

    (6-33)
 ==2
greater than 0.76 for calculation purpose.
⁄
 
pf  p, the limiting slenderness for a compact
(a) When Lb  Lp, the limit state of lateral-torsional
flange, Table 2-2
buckling does not apply.
rf  r, the limiting slenderness for a non-
 =   00..3   ≤ 

(b) When Lp  Lb  Lr
(6-34) 6.5.4 Tension Flange Yielding
(a) When Sxt  Sxc, the limit state of tension flange
(c) When Lb > Lr
 (6-35)
yielding does not apply.
(b) When Sxt  Sxc
where  =  ≤ 

Lp is defined by Eq. (6-20
(6-20)) 6.6—
6.6
 = 
—I-Shaped Members and Channels
(6-41)
 =  0.7 (6-36)
Bent About Their Minor Axis
This section applies to I-shaped members and
channels bent about their minor axis.
Rpg, the bending strength reduction factor is The nominal flexural strength, Mn, shall be the
determined as follows: lower value obtained according to the limit states of
 = 1 ,+
   55.7 ≤ 1.0
ℎ
(6-37)
yielding (plastic moment) and flange local buckling.
6.6.1 Yielding
where (6-42)
aw
rt
is defined by Eq. (6-26
exceed 10
(6-26)) but shall not
is the effective radius of gyration for

6.6.2
 =  =  ≤ 1.6
Flange Local Buckling
(a) For sections with compact flanges the limit
state of flange local buckling does not apply.
  0.0. 77  

lateral buckling as defined in Section 6.4 (b) For sections with non-compact flanges
6.5.3
 = 
Compression Flange Local Buckling
(6-38)
 =   (6-43)
(a) For sections with compact flanges, the limit

state of compression flange local buckling
does not apply
 = 
(c) For sections with slender flanges
(6-44)
 = 0.69
where
− (6-39) (6-45)
 =  0.3 −

 = 
SBC 306-CR-18 66
pf = p, the limiting slenderness for a compact

flange, Table 2-2
  =
  
3.57    4.4. 0 ≤  (6-47)
rf = r, the limiting slenderness for a non-
b
= for flanges of I-shaped members, half the
full-flange width, bf ; for flanges of where
 = 
(6-48)
channels,
flange, mmthe full nominal dimension of the Se  effective section modulus determined with
the effective width, be, of the compression
tf = thickness of the flange, mm
flange taken as:
Sy = elastic section modulus taken about the
y-axis, mm3; for a channel, the minimum
section modulus  = 1.92 1  0.⁄38  ≤  (6-49)
6.7.3 Web Local Buckling

6.7
6.7—
—Squ
Square
are and Rectangular HSS and
(a) For compact sections, the limit state of web
Box-Shaped Members
local buckling does not apply
This section applies to square and rectangular (b) For sections with non-compact webs
HSS, and doubly symmetric box- shaped
members bent about either axis, having compact
or non-compact
or slender
flexure.
flangeswebs and compact,
as defined non-compact
in Section 2.4.1 for  0.
  0.0.305 =  73838 ≤  (6-50)
The nominal flexural strength, Mn, shall be the 6.8—

6.8—Round HSS
of yielding (plastic moment), flange local buckling This section applies to round HSS having D/t ratios
and web local buckling under pure flexure. of less than 0.45 E/ Fy.
User Note: Very long rectangular HSS bent lower value obtained according to the limit states of
about the major axis are subject to lateral- yielding (plastic moment) and local buckling.
torsional buckling; however, the Code provides
no strength equation for this limit state since
beam deflection will control for all reasonable
cases.
6.8.1
6.8.2
 =  = 
Yielding
Local Buckling
(6-51)
6.7.1 Yielding (a) For compact sections, the limit state of flange
local buckling does not apply.
 =  =  (6-46) (b) For non-compact sections
where
 = 0.021    (6-52)
Z  plastic section modulus about the axis of
6.7.2
bending, mm3
Flange Local Buckling
 = 
(c) For sections with slender walls
(6-53)
(a) For compact sections, the limit state of flange

local buckling does not apply.
where
0.33 (6-54)
 =  
S = elastic section modulus, mm3
SBC 306-CR-18 67
t = thickness of wall, mm where

Sxc  elastic section modulus referred to the
compression flange, mm3
6.9
6.9—
—Tees and Double Angles Loaded
in The Plane of Symmetry
This section applies to tees and double angles
 = 2
loaded in the plane of symmetry. pf  p, the limiting slenderness for a compact
The nominal flexural strength, Mn, shall be the flange, Table 2-2
lowest value obtained according to the limit states rf  r, the limiting slenderness for a non-
of yielding (plastic moment), lateral-torsional compact flange, Table 2-2
buckling, flange local buckling, and local buckling
of tee stems.
6.9.1
where
 = 
Yielding
(6-55)
User Note: For double angles with flange legs in
compression, Mn based on local buckling is to be
determined using the provisions of Section
6.10.3 with b /t of the flange legs and Eq. (6-66
(6-66))
as an upper limit.
 =  ≤ 1.6
(a) For stems in tension
(b) For stems in compression

(6-56)
6.9.4 Local Buckling of Tee Stems in Flexural
6.9.2   =  ≤ 
Lateral-Torsional Buckling
 =  =     1  

(6-57) Compression
where
 =  (6-62)
where
 (6-58) Sx  elastic section modulus, mm3
 d
B   2.3 
 I
 y (a) When
 ≤ 0.84
 Lb  J
(6-59)
The plus sign for B applies when the stem is in

 =  (6-63)
tension and the minus sign applies when the stem
is in compression. If the tip of the stem is in
compression anywhere along the unbraced length,
(b) When 0.84  <  ≤ 1.03 
the negative value of B shall be used.
6.9.3 Flange Local Buckling of Tee
Teess
(a) For sections with a compact flange in flexural
 = 2.2.55 1.1.8484   (6-64)
compression, the limit state of flange local (c) When

(b) For sections with a non-compact flange in  > 1.03
0.7= 
 − ≤ 1.6
flexural compression
(6-60)  = 0.69

−
(c) For sections with a slender flange in flexural
(6-65)
compression
User Note: For double angles with web legs in
n
 = 0.27 (6-61) be determinedMusing

compression, based local buckling
theonprovisions is to
of Section
SBC 306-CR-18 68
6.10.3 with b / t of the web legs and Eq. (6-66)

as an upper limit.
(b) When

 >  My 
M n  1.92  1.17  M  1.5M (6-68)
 Me 
y y
 
6.10—
6.10—Single Angles
where
This section applies to single angles with and
without continuous lateral restraint along their Me, the elastic lateral-torsional buckling moment, is
length. determined as follows:
Single angles with continuous lateral-torsional For bending about the major principal axis of
restraint along the length are permitted to be equal-leg angles:
designed on the basis of geometr ic axis (x, y)
geometric 2 2
bending. Single angles without continuous lateral- 0.46Eb t C b
Me  (6-69)
torsional restraint along the length shall be designed Lb
using the
the provisions for principal axis bending
except where the provision for bending about a For bending about the major principal axis of
geometric axis is permitted. unequal-leg angles:
If the moment resultant has components about both  2 
4.9 EI z C b   Lb t  
principal axes, with or without axial load, or the    w  0.052    w  (6-70)
2
Me
2
moment is about one principal axis and there is axial Lb   rz  
 
load, the combined stress ratio shall be determined
8.2..
using the provisions of Section 8.2 where
Cb (6-1)) with a
is computed using Eq. (6-1
User Note: For geometric axis design, use
section properties computed about the x- and y- maximum value of 1.5
axis of the angle, parallel and perpendicular to the Lb = laterally unbraced length of member, mm
legs. For principal axis design, use section
properties computed about the major and minor Iz = minor principal axis moment of inertia,
principal axes of the angle. mm4
rz = radius of gyration about the minor
The nominal flexural strength, Mn, shall be the principal axis, mm
of yielding (plastic moment), lateral-torsional t = thickness of angle leg, mm
buckling,
buckling, and leg local bucklin
buckling.
g. w = section property for unequal leg angles,
positive for short legs in compression and
User Note: For bending about the minor axis, negative for long legs in compression. If
only the limit states of yielding
buckling apply. and leg local the long leg is in compression anywhere
along the unbraced length of the member,
the negative value of w shall be used.
where
 = 1.5
6.10.1 Yielding
(6-66) User Note: The equation for w and values for

common angle
Commentary.
sizes are listed in the
My = yield moment about the axis of bending,

N-mm For bending moment about one of the
geometricc axes of an equal-leg angle with
geometri
6.10.2 Lateral-Torsional Buckling. For single no axial compression
angles without continuous lateral-torsional restraint
along the length (a) And with no lateral-torsional restraint:
(a) When With maximum compression at the
toe
 =0.0 ≤.920.17    (6-67)

SBC 306-CR-18 69
0.66 Eb 4 t C b
 2 
  Lb t  
Me   1  0.78 2   1 (6-71)
L2b b   6.11—
6.11—Rectangular Bars and Rounds
 
This section applies to rectangular bars bent about
With maximum tension at the toe either geometr ic axis and rounds. The nominal
geometric
4  2  flexural strength, Mn, shall be the lower value
0.66 Eb t C b   Lb t  
Me  2  1  0.78
2
  1 (6-72) obtained according to the limit states of yielding
Lb  b  
  (plastic moment) and lateral-torsional buckling.
My shall be taken as 0.80 times the yield moment
calculated using the geometric section modulus.
6.11.1 Yielding. For rectangular with
.  ≤
bent about their major axis, rectangular bars
where
b  full width of leg in compression, mm
User Note: Mn may be taken as My for single

 =  =  ≤ 1.6
bent about their minor axis and rounds:

(6-76)
angles with their vertical leg toe in compression,

and having a span-to-depth ratio less than or
equal to
. <  ≤ .
(a) For rectangular bars with
bent about their major axis:
1.64       (6-77)
  11.4 
(b) and with lateral-torsional restraint at the point of
maximum moment only:  =  1.52  0.0.274274    > .≤ 
(b) For rectangular bars with bent about
Me shall be taken as 1.25 times Me computed
(6-71)) or (6-72
using Eq. (6-71 (6-72).
).
My shall be taken as the yield moment calculated
 =  ≤ 
their major axis:
(6-78)
 = 1.9 
where
using the geometric section modulus.
6.10.3 Leg Local Buckling. The limit state of leg
local buckling applies when the toe of the leg is in
compression.
Lb = length between points that are either
(a) For compact sections, the limit state of leg local braced against lateral displacement of the
buckling does not apply. compression region, or between points
 =  22..43  1.1.7272  

(b) For sections with non-compact legs:
 (6-73)
braced
mm to prevent twist of the cross section,
d = depth of rectangular bar, mm
 = 
(c) For sections with slender legs:
(6-74)
t = width of rectangular bar parallel to axis of
bending, mm
(c) For rounds and rectangular bars bent
 = 0.71
where
about their minor axis, the limit state of
lateral-torsional buckling need not be
(6-75) considered.
Sc = elastic section modulus to the toe in 6.12

6.12—
—Unsymmetrical Shapes
compression relative to the axis of bending,
mm3. For bending about one of the geomet
geometric
ric This section applies to all unsymmetrical shapes,
axes of an equal-leg angle w with
ith no lateral- except single angles.
torsional restraint, Sc shall be 0.80 of the
geometric axis section modulus
SBC 306-CR-18 70

of yielding (yield moment), lateral-torsional
 =   (6-83)
where
buckling,
buckli
where
 =  
ng, an
andd local bu
buckling
ckling where
(6-79) Afg  gross area of tension flange, calculated in
accordance with the provisions of Section
2.4.3a, mm2
2.4.3a,
Smin = lowest elastic section modulus relative to Afn  net area of tension flange, calculated in
the axis of bending, mm3
accordance with the provisions of
Section 2.4.3b, mm2
 = 
6.12.1 Yielding
(6-80) Yt  1.0 for Fy /Fu  0.8
 1.1 otherwise
 =  ≤ 
(6-81)
6.13.2 Proportioning Limits for I-Shaped
Members. Singly symmetric I-shaped members
0.1 ≤  ≤ 0.9

shall satisfy the following limit:
where
Fcr = lateral-torsional buckling stress for the (6-84)
section as determined by analysis, MPa
I-shaped members with slender webs shall also
User Note: In the case of Z-shaped members, it
is recommended that Fcr be taken as 0.5Fcr of a
channel with the same flange and web properties. (a) When  ≤ 1.5
satisfy the following limits:
 =  ≤ 
6.12.3 Local Buckling
(6-82)
 
ℎ
(6-85)
 > 1.5
 0.40 
Where (b) When
Fcr = local buckling stress for the section as ℎ
determined by analysis, MPa (6-86)
where
6.13—
6.13—Proportions of Beams and a = clear distance between transverse stiffeners,
Girders mm
6.13.1 Strength Reductio
Reductions
ns for Members with In unstiffened girders h/ tw shall not exceed 260. The
Holes in the Tension Flange. This section applies ratio of the web area to the compression flange area
to rolled or built-up shapes and cover-plated beams shall not exceed 10.
with holes, proportioned on the basis of flexural
strength of the gross section. 6.13.3 Cover Plates. Flanges of welded beams or
girders may be varied in thickness or width by
In addition to the limit states specified in other splicing a series of plates or by the use of cover
sections of this Chapter, the nominal flexural plates.
strength, Mn, shall be limited according to the limit
state of tensile rupture of the tension flange. The total cross-sectional area of cover plates of
bolted girders shall not exceed 70% of the total
(a) When FuAfn  Yt Fy Afg, the limit state of tensile flange area.
rupture does not apply.
High-strength bolts or welds connecting flange to
(b) When Fu Afn  Yt Fy Afg, the nominal flexural web, or cover plate to flange, shall be proportioned
strength, Mn, at the location of the holes in the
tension flange shall not be taken greater than to resist the
bending forces
force s horizontal
total shear resulting
on the girder. from the
The longitudinal
SBC 306-CR-18 71
distribution of these bolts or intermittent welds unbraced length, Lb, of the compression flange
shall be in proportion to the intensity of the shear. adjacent to the redistributed end moment locations
However, the longitudinal spacing shall not exceed
However, shall not exceed Lm determined as follows.
the maximum specified for compression or tension (a) For doubly symmetric and singly symmetric I-
members in Section 5.6 or 4.4,
4.4, respectively. Bolts shaped beams with the compression flange
or welds connecting flange to web shall also be equal to or larger than the tension flange
proportioned to transmit to the web any loads loaded in the plane of the web:
applied directly to the flange, unless provision is
made to transm
transmit
it such loads by direct bearing.
Partial-length cover plates shall be extended
beyond the theoretical cutoff point and the
 = 00..120.076   
(b) For solid rectangular bars and symmetric box
(6-90)
beams bent about their major axis:

extended portion shall be attached to the beam or
girder by high-strength bolts in a slip-critical  = 0.0.170.10    ≥
connection or fillet welds. The attachment shall be
adequate, at the applicable strength given in
Sections 10.2.2 , 10.3.8 or 2.3.10 to develop the
0.100   (6-91)
cover plate’s portion of the flexural strength in the where

beam or girder at the theoretical cut-off point.
Fy = specified minimum yield stress of the
For welded cover plates, the welds connecting the compression flange, MPa
cover plate termination to the beam or girder shall
have continuous welds along both edges of the cover M1 = smaller moment at end of unbraced length,
plate in the length a, defined below, and shall be N-mm

adequate to develop the cover plate’s portion of the M2 = larger moment at end of unbraced length,
design strength of the beam or girder at the distance N-mm
a from the end of the cover plate.
ry = radius of gyration about y-axis, mm
(a) When there is a continuous weld equal to or
larger than three-fourths of the plate thickness (M1 /M2) is positive when moments cause reverse
curvature and negative for single curvature
where
 =
across the end of the plate
′
(6-87)
curvature
There is no limit on Lb for members with round or
square cross sections or for any beam bent about
its minor axis.
w  width of cover plate, mm
(b) When there is a continuous weld smaller than
three-fourths of the plate thicknes
thicknesss across the
 = 1.5
end of the plate
′
(6-88)
(c) When there is no weld across the end of the
plate
 = 2
′
6.13.4 Built-Up Beams. Where two or more

(6-89)
beams or channels are used side-by-side to form a

flexural member, they shall be connected together
in compliance with Section 5.6. When concentrated
loads are carried from one beam to another or
distributed between the beams, diaphragms having
sufficient stiffness to distribute the load shall be
welded or bolted between the beams.
6.13.5 Unbraced Length for Moment
Redistribution.. For moment redistribution in
beams according to Section 2.3.6 , the laterally
SBC 306-CR-18 72
Table 6-1 : Selection Table for the Application of Chapter 6 Sections
Section in Flange
Cross Section Web Slenderness Limit States
Chapter 6 Slenderness
6.2 C C Y, LTB
6.3 NC, S C LTB, FLB
Y, LTB,
6.4 C, NC, S C, NC
FLB, TFY
Y, LTB,
6.5 C, NC, S S
FLB, TFY
6.6 C, NC, S N/A Y, FLB
6.7 C, NC, S C, NC Y, FLB, WLB
6.8 N/A N/A Y, LB
6.9 C, NC, S N/A Y, LTB, FLB
6.10 N/A N/A Y, LTB,

LTB, LLB
6.11 N/A N/A Y, L

LTB
TB
Unsymmetrical shapes, other than
6.12 N/A N/A All limit states
single angles
Y = yielding, LTB = lateral-torsional buckling, FLB = flange local buckling, WLB = web local buckling, TFY =
tension flange yielding, LLB = leg local buckling, LB = local buckling, C = compact, NC = non-compact, S = slender
SBC 306-CR-18 73
CHAPTER 6
— DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR FLEXURE

SBC 306-CR-18 74
CHAPTER 7 — DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR SHEAR
CHAPTER 7
7—DESIGN
—DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR SHEAR
This chapter addresses webs of singly or doubly 7.2—

7.2 —Members with Unstiffened or
symmetric members
the web, single subject
angles to shear
and HSS in theand
sections, plane of
shear Stiffened Webs
in the weak direction of singly or doubly symm
symmetric
etric 7.2.1 Shear Strength. This section applies to
shapes. webs of singly or doubly symmetric members and
channels subject to shear in the plane of the web.
The chapter is organized as follows:
The nominal shear strength, Vn, of unstiffened or
7.1 —General Provisions stiffened webs according to the limit states of shear
7.2 —Members with Unstiffened or Stiffened yielding and shear buckling
buckling, is
Webs
7.3 —Tension Field Action
 = 0.6 (7-1)
7.4 —Single Angles
7.5 —Rectangular
Members
HSS and Box-Shaped
ℎ ⁄ ≤ 2.24⁄
(a) For members of rolled I-shaped members with
:
7.6 —Round HSS (7-2)

7.7 —Weak Axis Shear in Doubly Symmetric
and Singly Symmetric Shapes
 = 1.00
(b) For webs of all doubly symmetric shapes and
singly symmetric shapes and channels, except
round HSS, the web shear coefficient, Cv, is
7.8 —Beams and Girders with Web Openings determined as follows:
When
User Note: For cases not included in this ℎ  ≤ 1.10 ⁄
chapter,, the following sections apply:
chapter
8.3.3 Unsymmetric sections
 = 1.0000 (7-3)
10.4.2 Shear strength of connecting elements

10.10.6 Web panel zone shear
1.10 ⁄ ≤  ≤ 1.37 ⁄
When
ℎ
(7-4)
7.1—General Provisions
7.1—  = 1.100⁄⁄
When
ℎ
Two methods of calculating shear strength are

presented below. The method presented in Section ℎ  > 1.37 ⁄
7.2 does not utilize the post buckling strength of
the member (tension field action). The method
presented in Section 7.3 utilizes tension field
action.
 = 1.⁄51
ℎ
(7-5)
where
strength, ϕvVn, shall be
The design shear strength,
For all provisions in this chapter
h
thickness, 
Aw = area of web, the overall depth times the web
, mm2
= for rolled shapes, the clear distance between
flanges less the fillet or corner radii, mm
 = 0.90 = for built-up welded sections, the clear

distance between flanges, mm
SBC 306-CR-18 75
= for built-up bolted sections, the distance thickness from the near toe to the web-to-flange
between fastener lines, mm weld. When single stiffeners are used, they shall
be attached to the compression flange, if it
= for tees, the overall depth, mm
consists of a rectangular plate, to resist any uplift
tw = thickness of web, mm tendency due to torsion
torsion in the flange.
The web plate shear buckling
buckling coefficient, kv, is Bolts connecting stiffeners to the girder web shall
determined as follows: be spaced not more than 300 mm on center. If
with ℎ ⁄ < 260 = 5

For webs without transverse stiffeners and
:
intermittent fillet welds are used, the clear
distance between weld
weldss shall not be more than 16
times the web thickness nor more than 250 mm.
7.3—Tension Field Action
7.3—
except for the stem of tee shapes 7.3.1 Limits on the Use of Tension Field
where Action. Consideration of tension field action is
 = 1.2 .
permitted for flanged
flanged members when the web plate
is supported on all four sides by flanges or
stiffenerss. Consideration of tension field action is
stiffener
 = 55 ⁄5 
For webs with transverse stiffen
stiffeners:
ers:
not permitted:
(7-6) (a) for end panels in all members with transverse
ℎ
= 5 when or
 ℎ
ℎ
stiffeners;
(b) when a/h exceeds 3.0 or ;
where
⁄ℎ > 3.0 ⁄ >  
 
⁄  (c) when
(d) when or
; or
2ℎ⁄⁄ℎ⁄>26026.>6002.⁄5ℎ⁄ 
a  clear distance between transverse
stiffeners, mm where
7.2.2 Transverse Stiffeners. Transverse Afc = area of compression flange, mm2
ℎ⁄ ≤ 2.46⁄
stiffeners
stiffeners are not required where
, or where the design shear Aft = area of tension flange, mm2
for  = 5
strength provided in accordance with Section 7.2.1
strength.
is greater than the required shear
bfc = width of compression flange, mm
bft = width of tension flange, mm

The moment of inertia, Ist, of transverse stiffeners In these cases, the nominal shear strength, Vn, shall
used to develop the design web shear strength, as be determined according to the provisions of
provided in Section 7.2.1 , about an axis in the web 7.2..
Section 7.2
center for stiffener
stiffener pairs or about the face in contact 7.3.2 Shear Strength with Tension Field
with the web plate for single stiffeners, shall meet Action. When tension field action is permitted
the following requirement
 ≥   (7-7)
according to Section 7.3.1 , the nominal shear
strength, Vn, with tension field action, according
to the limit state of tension field yielding, shall be
 = 2.5 2 2 ≥ 00..5

where
ℎ
(7-8) (a) When ℎ ⁄=0.≤61.10 ⁄ (7-9)
and b is the smaller of the dimensions a and h
Transverse stiffeners are permitted to be stopped
short of the tension flange, provided bearing is not
(b) When ℎ⁄ > 1.10 ⁄
needed to transmit a concentrated load or reaction. (7-10)
The weld by which transverse stiffeners are
attached to the web shall be terminated not less
than four times nor m more
ore than six times the w
web
eb  = 0.6 (  1.1551 1)
where
ℎ
SBC 306-CR-18 76
kv and Cv are as defined in Section 7.2.1
7.3.3 Transverse Stiffeners. Transverse 7.4

7.4——Single Angles
rs subject to tension field action shall meet
stiffeners
stiffene
The nominal shear strength, Vn, of a single angle
the requirements of Section 7.2.2 and the
following limitations:
(1) (7-11)
Section 7.2.1 (b) with
where
 = 
leg shall be determined using Eq. (7-1) and
  ⁄   

 ≤ 0. 5 6
6
 −
(2)
where
 ≥     − (7-12)
b  width of the leg resisting the shear force, mm
t  thickness of angle leg, mm
ℎ⁄ == 1.⁄2
(b/t)st  width-to-thickness ratio of the stiffener
Fyst  specified minimum yield stress of the 7.5—Rectangular HSS and Box-Sh
7.5— Box-Shaped
aped
Members
stiffener material, MPa
The nominal shear strength, Vn, of rectangular HSS
Ist  moment of inertia of the transverse
stiffeners about an axis in the web center for
stiffener pairs, or about the face in contact
with the web plate for single stiffeners, mm4
provisions of Section 7.2.1 with
where
 = 2 
and box members shall be determined using the
ℎ
Ist1  minimum moment of inertia of the h  width resisting the shear force
force,, taken as the
clear distance between the flanges less the
transverse stiffeners required for inside corner radius on each side, mm
development of the web shear buckling buckling
resistance in Section 7.2.2 , mm 4 t  design wall thickness, equal to 0.93 times the
nominal wall thickness for electric resistance-
1 = .   .
ℎ
(7-13)
welded (ERW) HSS and equal to the nominal
thickness for submerged-arc-welded (SAW)
HSS, mm
Ist2  minimum
transverse
moment of inertia of the
stiffeners required
development of the full web shear buckling
for
 == 5, mm
plus the web tension field resistanc

resistance,
e, Vr = Vc2 If the corner radius is not known, h shall be
, mm4 taken as the corresponding outside dimension
minus 3 times the thickness.
Vr
2 = .⁄ 2 2  ≥ 0.5
 larger of the required shear strengths in the
(7-14) 7.6—
7.6—Round HSS
The nominal shear strength, Vn, of round HSS,
according to the limit states of shear yielding and
adjacent web panels, N shear buckling, shall be determined as:
Vc1  smaller of the design shear strengths in the
adjacent web panels with Vn as defined in
Section 7.2.1 , N
 = ⁄2 (7-15)
where
Vc2  smaller of the design shear strengths in the Fcr shall be the larger of
adjacent web panels with Vn
in Section 7.3.2 , N
st  the larger of and 1.0
as defined
 = 1.60  (7-16)
⁄
Fyw  specified minimum yield stress of the web
material, MPa and  
SBC 306-CR-18 77
 = 0.78
but shall not exceed 0.6

0.6Fy
(7-17)
Ag  gross cross-sectional area of member, mm2
D  outside diameter, mm
Lv  distance from maximum to zero shear
force, mm
t  design wall thickness, equal to 0.93 times
the nominal wall thickness for ERW HSS
and equal to the nominal thickness for SAW
HSS, mm
User Note: The shear buckling equations, Eq.

(7-16
(7-16)) and (7-17
(7-17),
), will control for D/t over 100,
high-strength steels, and long lengths. For
standard sections, shear yielding will usually
control.
7.7—
7.7—Weak Axis Shear in Doubly
Symmetric and Singly Symmetric
Shapes
For doubly and singly symmetric shapes loaded in
the weak axis without torsion, the nominal shear
strength, Vn, for each shear resisting element
ℎ⁄ = ⁄  = 1.2

shall be determined using Eq. (7-1) and Section
7.2.1 (b) with , , and b
 for flanges of I-shaped members, half the full-
flange width, bf ; for flanges of channels, the full
nominal dimension of the flange, mm
7.8
7.8—
—Beams and Girders with Web
Openings
The effect of all web openings on the shear
strength of steel and composite beams shall be
determined. Adequate reinforcement shall be
provided when the required strength exceeds the
design strength of the member at the opening.
SBC 306-CR-18 78
CHAPTER 7
— DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR SHEAR

SBC 306-CR-18 79
CHAPTER 8 — DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR COMBINED FORCES AND TORSION
8—DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR COMBINED FORCES

CHAPTER 8—DESIGN
AND TORSION
2    <≤0.1.20


This chapter addresses members subject to axial
force and flexure about one or both axes, with or
without torsion, and members subject to torsion


only. (8-2)
The chapter is organized as follows:
where
8.1 —Doubly and Singly Symmetric Members
Pr = required axial strength, N
8.2
Subject to Flexure and Axial Force
—Unsymmetric and Other Members Subject
to Flexure and Axial Force
Pc = = design axial strength
strength,, determined in
accordance with Chapter 5,
5, N
8.3 —Members Subject to Torsion and Mr = required flexural strength, N-mm
Combined Torsion, Flexure, Shear and/or
Axial Force Mc =  = design flexural strength, determined
in accordance with Chapter 66,, N-mm
8.4 Rupture
Tension of Flanges with Holes Subject to x = subscript relating symbol to stron
strong
g axis
bending
y = subscript relating symbol to weak axis
bending
User Note: For composite members, see
Chapter 99..  = resistance factor for compression = 0.85
= resistance factor for flexure = 0.9
8.1
8.1—
—Doubly and Singly Symmetric 8.1.2 Doubly and Singly Symmetric Members
Members Subject to Flexure and Axial Subject to Flexure and Tension. The interaction
Force of flexure and tension in doubly symmetric
members and singly symmetric members
8.1.1 Doubly and Singly Symmetric Members constrained to bend about a geometri
geometricc axis (x
Subject to Flexure and Compression. The and/or y) shall be limited by Eqs. (8-1
(8-1)) and (8-2)
(8-2),,
interaction of flexure and compression in doubly
members for which 0.1 ≤ ⁄ ≤ 0.9

symmetric members and singly symmetric
constrained to bend about a geometric axis (x and/or

y) shall be limited by Eqs. (8-1
(8-1)) and (8-2),
,
(8-2), where Iyc

where
Pr
Pc
= required axial strength, N
=  t P n = design axial strength, determined
is the moment of inertia of the compression flange 4.2,, N
in accordance with Section 4.2
about the y-axis. Mr = required flexural strength, N-mm
User Note: Section 8.2 is permitted to be used Mc = b M n = design flexural strength,

in lieu of the provisions ooff this section. determined in accordance with Chapter 66,,
N-mm
(a) When
 ≥ 0.2  =resistance factor for tension (see Section
4.2)
4.2)
resistancee factor for flexure = 0.90
resistanc
(b) When
 889   ≤ 1.0 (8-1)
 =
SBC 306-CR-18 80
For doubly symmetric members, Cb in Chapter 6 is permitted to use the provisions of this Section for
may be multiplied by 1   |    | ≤ 1.0
8.1..
any shape in lieu of the provisions of Section 8.1
(8-4)
Where
 where
fra = required axial stress at the point of
 = 
A more detailed analysis of the interaction of
flexure and tension is permitted in lieu of Eqs. (8-1
and (8-2)
(8-2)..
(8-1))
consideration, MPa
Fca = design axial stress at the point of
consideration, determined in accordance
8.1.3 Doubly Symmetric Rolled Compact
Compact with Chapter 5 for compression ( Fcr), or
Members Subject to Single Axis Flexure and Section 4.2 for tension ( Fcr), MPa
Compression.
compact members with  ≤ 
For doubly symmetric rolled
subjected
frbw , f rbz = required flexural stress at the point of
consideration, MPa
to flexure and compression with moments primarily
about their major axis, it is ppermissible
ermissible to consider
the two independent limit states, in-plane
,  =  = design flexural stress at the
point of consideration, determined in
instability and out-of-plane buckling or lateral- accordance with Chapter 66,, MPa
torsional buckling, separately in lieu of the
combined approach provided in Section 8.1.1 . w = subscrip
subscriptt relating symbol to major principal
axis bending
For members with

⁄ ≥ 0.05
of Section 8.1.1 shall be followed.
, the provisions
For the limit state of in-plane instability,

Eq. (8-1)
(8-1) shall be used with Pc, Mrx and
z = subscript relating symbol to minor principal
axis bending
 = res
resistance
istance factor for flexure = 0.9
Mcx determined in the plane of bending.  = resistance factor for compression = 0.85
 For the limit state of out-of-plane buckling  = resistance factor for tension (Section 4.2
4.2))
and lateral-torsional buckling:
 1.1. 5  0.0.5   ≤ 1.0 (8-3)
Eq. (8-4) shall be evaluated using the principal
bending axes by considering the sense of the
flexural stresses at the critical points of the cross
section. The flexural terms are either added to or
where subtracted from
from the axial term as appropriate. When
the axial force is compression, second order effects
effects
Pcy = design compressive strength out of the plane
shall be included according to the provisions of
of bending, N
3.
Chapter 3.
Cb =lateral-torsional buckling modification factor A more detailed analysis of the interaction of
determined from Section 6.1 (8-4).
flexure and tension is permitted in lieu of Eq. (8-4 ).
Mcx = design lateral-torsional strength for strong
Chapter 6 using  = 1.0

axis flexure determined in accordance with
, N-mm 8.3—Members Subject to Tors
8.3— Torsion
ion and
Combined Torsion, Flexure, Shear
(8-3)),   may be larger
Eq.(8-3
User Note: In Eq. and/or Axial Force
than  Mpx. The yielding resistance of the
beam-column is captured by Eq. (8-1
(8-1).
).
8.3.1 Round and Rectangular HSS Subject to
Torsion. The design torsional strength, , for
round and rectangular HSS according to the limit

states of torsional yielding and torsional buckling
buckling
8.2—
8.2—Unsymmetric and Other Members shall be determined as follows:
Subject to Flexure and Axial Force
  = 0.90
This section addresses the interaction of flexure and
axial stress for shapes not covered in Section 8.1
8.1.. It  =  (8-5)
SBC 306-CR-18 81
where
User Note: the torsional constant, C may be
C is the HSS torsional constant conservatively taken as :
The critical stress, Fcr, shall be determined as
follows:
For round HSS :  = −=−22    
(a) For round HSS, Fcr shall be the larger of For rectangular HSS:

and
(i)
 . 
= (8-6)
  4.4. 54   
8.3.2 HSS Subject to Combined Torsion
Shear, Flexure and Axial Force. When the
Torsion,,
required torsional strength, Tr, is less than or equal
(ii) =  . (8-7)

to 20% of the design torsional strength, Tc, the
interaction of torsion, shear, flexure and/or axial
but shall not exceed

where
0.6 ,
force for HSS shall be determined by Section 8.1
and the torsional effects shall be neglected. When
Tr exceeds 20% of Tc, the interaction of torsion,
shear, flexure and/or axial force shal
shalll be limited, at
the point of consideration, by
L = length of the member, mm
D = outside diameter, mm
(b) For rectangular HSS
        ≤ 1.0 (8-11)
≤ 2.45    
When where
Pr = required axial strength , N
ℎ
Pc = = design tensile or compressive
 = 0.6 (8-8)

strength in accordance with Chapter 4 or
5, N
Chapter 5,
Mr = required flexural strength N-mm
When
2.45 <  ≤ 3.07

ℎ
Mc =  = design flexural strength
accordance with Chapter 6,
6, N-mm
in
Vr = required shear strength, N

0.6 2.45  (8-9)
Vc = = design shear strength in accordance
with Chapter 77,, N
ℎ
 = 
When
Tr
Tc =
= required torsional strength, N-mm
= design torsional strength
accordance with Section 8.3.1 , N-mm
in
3.07 <  ≤ 260ℎ

8.3.3 Non-HSS Members Subject to Torsion
and Combined Stress. The design torsional
 = 0.458
ℎ (8-10)
strength for non-HSS members shall be the lowest
value obtained according to the limit states of
yielding under normal stress, shear yielding under
shear stress, or buckling, determined as follows:
where   = 0.90
h = flat width
width of longer side as defined in Section (a) For the limit state of yielding under normal
2.4.1 b(4),
b(4), mm stress
(8-12)
t design wall thickness defined in Section 2.4.2
,=mm
 = 
(b) For the limit state of shear yielding under shear
stress
SBC 306-CR-18 82
 = 0.6 (8-13)
where
 = 
(c) For the limit state of buckling
(8-14)
Fcr = buckling stress for the section as determined

by analysis, MPa
Some constrained local yielding is permitted
adjacent to areas that remain elastic.
8.4Rupture of Flanges with Holes

Subject to Tension
At locations of bolt holes in flanges subject to
tension under combined axial force and mmajor
ajor axis
flexure, flange tensile rupture strength shall be
limited by Eq. (8-15).
(8-15). Each flange subject to
tension due to axial force and flexure shall be
checked separately.
(8-15)
where
Pr
  ≤ 1.0
= required axial strength of the member at the
location of the bolt holes, positive in tension,
negative in compression, N
Pc = = design axial strength for the limit
state of tensile rupture of the net section at
the location of bolt holes, determined in
4.2((b), N
accordance with Section 4.2
Mrx = required flexural strength at the location
of the bolt holes; positive for tension in
the flange under consideration, negative for
Mcx = 
compression, N-mm
= design flexural strength about x-
axis for the limit state of tensile rupture of
the flange, determined according to Section
6.13.1 . When the limit state of tensile
rupture in flexure does not apply, use the
plastic bending moment, Mp, determined
with bolt holes not taken into consideration,
N-mm
 = res
resistance
istance factor for tens
tensile
ile rupture = 0.7
= resistance factor for flexure = 0.9
0.755
SBC 306-CR-18 83
CHAPTER 8
— DESIGN OF MEMBERS FOR COMBINED FORCES AND TORSION

SBC 306-CR-18 84
CHAPTER 9 — DESIGN OF COMPOSITE MEMBERS
CHAPTER 9—DESIGN
9—DESIGN OF COMPOSITE MEMBERS
(b) Concrete and steel reinforcement material

This chapter addresses composite members
limitations shall be as specified in Section
composed structural
structural steel
shapes or of
HSSrolled
and orstructural
built-up concrete acting 9.1.3 .
together, and steel beams supporting a reinforced (c) Transverse reinforcement limitations shall be as
concrete slab so interconnected that the beams and specified in Section 9.2.1.1 ((2)
2),, in addition to
the slab act together to resist bending. Simple and 304..
those specified in SBC 304
continuous composite beams with steel headed (d) The minimum longitudinal reinforcing ratio
stud anchors, concrete-en cased,, and concrete filled
concrete-encased for encased composite members shall be as
beams, constructed with or without temporary specified in Section 9.2.1.1 (3)
(3)..
shores, are included.
User Note: It is the intent of the Code that
The chapter is organized as follows: the concrete and reinforcing steel portions of
9.1 —General Provisions composite concrete members be detailed
utilizing the non-composite provisions of ACI
9.2 —Axial Force 318 as modified by the Code. All requirements
9.3 —Flexure specific to composite members are covered in
9.4 —Shear the Code.
9.5 —Combined Flexure and Axial Force 9.1.2 Nominal Strength of Composite
Sections. The nominal strength of composite
9.6 —Load Transfer sections shall
shall be determined in accordance with the
9.7 —Composite Diaphragms and Collector distribution method or the strain
plastic stress distribution
Beams compatibility method as defined in this sec
section
tion.
9.8 —Steel Anchors The tensile strength of the concrete shall be
neglected in the determination of the nominal
9.9 —Special Cases
strength of composite members.
Local buckling effects shall be considered for filled
9.1—
9.1—Genera
Generall Provisions composite members as defined in Section 9.1.4 .
Local buckling effects need not be considered for
In determining load effects in members and encased composite members.
connectionsconsideration
members, of a structure shall
that includes composite
be given to the 9.1.2.1 Plastic Stress Distribution Method. For
effective
effective sections at the time each increment of load the plastic stress distribution method, the nominal
is applied. strength shall be computed assuming that steel
components have reached a stress of Fy in either
9.1.1 Concrete and Steel Reinforcement. The
design, detailing and material properties related to tension or compression and concrete components
the concrete and reinforcing steel portions of
composite construction shall comply with the
reinforced concrete and reinforcing bar design
in compression due to ax axial
 
ial force and/or flexure
have reached a stress of 0.85 . For round HSS
filled with concrete, a stress of 0.95 ′ is permitted
ations stipulated by the applicable building
specifications
specific to be used for concrete components in
code. Additionally, the provisions in SBC 304 compression due to axial force and/or flexure to
shall apply with the following exceptions and account for the effects of concrete confinement.
limitations: 9.1.2.2 Strain Compatibility Method. For the
(a) SBC 304 Sections 7.8.2 and 10.13, and strain compatibility method, a linear distribution of
strains across the section shall be assumed, with
Chapter 21 shall be excluded in their entirety. the maximum concrete compressive strain equal
to 0.003 mm/mm. The stress-strain relationships
SBC 306-CR-18 85
for steel and concrete shall be obtained from tests thickness ratio
ratio of its compression ssteel
teel elements
or from published results for similar materials. shall not exceed the limiting width-to-thickness
ratio, λp, from
User Note: The strain compatibility method
should be used to determine nominal strength Table 9-2.
9-2. If the maximum width-to-
width-to-thickness
thickness ratio
for irregular sections and for cases where of one or more steel compression elements exceeds
λp, but does not exceed λr from
the steel does not exhibit elasto-plastic
behavior.
behavior. General
compatibility guidelines
method for the
for encased strain
members Table 9-2, theratio
9-2,
to-thickness section is noncompact.
of any steel elementIfexceeds
the width-
λr,
subjected to axial load, flexure or both are the section is slender. The maximum permitted
given in AISC (2003) Design Guide 6 and width-to-thickness
width-to-thickness ratio sha
shall
ll be as specified in the
304..
SBC 304 table.
9.1.3 Material Limitations. For concrete, Refer to Table 2-1 and Table 2-2 for definitions of
al steel, and steel reinforcing bars in
structural
structur width (b and D) and thickness (t) for rectangular
composite systems, the following limitations shall and round HSS sections.
be met, unless justified by testing or analysis:
analysis:
1. For the determination of the design
9.2—
9.2—Axial Force
strength,

concrete shall have a
compressive strength, ′ , of not less than
21 MPa nor more than 70 MPa for normal
This section applies to two types of composite
members subject to axial force: encased composite
members and filled composite
composite members.
members.
weight concrete and not less than 21 MPa
nor more than 42 MPa for lightweight 9 . 2 . 1 Enca
Encased
sed Comp
Composite
osite Memb
Members
ers
concrete.
9.2.1.1 Limitations. For encased composite
User Note: Higher strength concrete material members, the following limitations shall be met:
properties may be used for stiffness calculations 1. The cross-sectional area of the steel core
but may not be relied upon for strength shall comprise at least 1% of the total
calculations unless justified by testing or composite cross section.
analysis.
2. Concrete encasement of the steel core shall
2. The specified minimum yield stress of be reinforced with continuous
continuous longitudinal
structural steel and reinforcing bars used bars and lateral ties or spirals.
spirals.
in calculating the strength of composite Where lateral ties are used, a minimum of
members shall not exceed 525 MPa. either a 10 mm bar spaced at a maximum
9.1.4 Classification of Filled Composite of 300 mm on center, or a 14 mm bar or
Sections for Local Buckling. For compression, larger
filled composite sections are classified as compact, center spaced at aused.
shall be usmaximum ofed
ed. Deformed
Deform 400wire
mm on
or
noncompact or slender. For a section to qualify as welded wire reinforcement of equivalent
compact, the maximum width-to-thickness ratio of area are permitted.
its compression steel elements shall not exceed Maximum spacing of lateral ties shall not
the limiting width-to-thickness ratio, λp, from exceed 0.5 times the least column
Table 9-1.
9-1. If the maximum width-to-
width-to-thickness
thickness ratio dimension.
of one or more steel compression elements exceeds
λp, but does not exceed λr from Table 9-1
9-1,, the filled
composite section is noncompact. If the maximum
3. The minimum reinforcement ratio for

continuous longitudinal reinforcing,
 , 
 = 
shall be 0.004, where is given by:
width-to-thickness ratio of any compression steel
element exceeds λr, the section is slender. The
maximum permitted width-to-thickness ratio shall (9-1)
be as specified in the table.
For flexure, filled composite sections are classified
as compact, noncompact or slender. For a section to
qualify as compact, the maximum width-to-
where
Ag

= gross area of composite member, mm2
SBC 306-CR-18 86
Asr = area of continuous reinforcing bars, mm2 Fysr = specified minimum yield stress of
reinforcing bars, MPa
User Note: Refer to Sections 7.10 and 10.9.3
of SBC 304 for additional tie and spiral Ic = moment of inertia of concrete section
reinforcing provisions. about the elastic neutral axis of the
composite section, mm4
9.2.1.2 Compressive The design
Strength.
Is = moment of inertia of steel shape about the
compressive strength, , of doubly symmetric
buckling
buckli  
axially loaded encased composite members shall
be determined for the limit state of flexur
flexural
al
ng based on member slenderness as follows:
 = 0.75
Isr
elastic neutral
section, mm 4 axis of the composite
= moment of inertia of reinforcing bars
about the elastic neutral axis of the
composite section, mm4
(a) When
 ≤ 2.25 K
L
= effective length factor
= laterally unbraced length of the member,
mm

 =  0.0.658  
 (9-2)  ′
= specified compressive strength of
concrete, MPa
(b) When wc = weight of concrete per unit volume (1500
 2500 kg/m3)
where
 = 0.877 > 2.25 (9-3)
The
than design
≤ ≤
compressive
that specified
by Chapter 55..
for barestrength need not
steel member be less
as required
 =   0.0.8585

Pe
′
(9-4)
= elastic critical buckling load determined
9.2.1.3 Tensile Strength. The design tensile
strength of axially loaded encased composite
members shall be determined for the limit state of
in accordance to with Chapter 33,, or
Appendix F F,, N  = =0.9
yielding as follows:
(9-8)
= / (9-5)
9.2.1.4 Load Transfer. Load transfer
requirements for encased composite members shall
Ac = area of concrete, mm2
be determined in accordance with Section 9.6.
9.6.
2
As = area of steel, mm
9.2.1.5 Detailing Requirements. Clear spacing
Ec = modulus of elasticity of concrete between the steel core and longitudinal reinforcing
EIeff
= 0.043.. ′
, MPa
= effective stiffness of composite section,
shall be a minimum of 1.5 reinforcing bar diameters,
but not less than 40mm.
40mm.
If the composite cross section is built up from two
N-mm2
C1
=  0.0.55   (9-6)
= coefficient for calculation of effective
or more encased steel shapes, the shapes shall be
interconnected with lacing, tie plates, batten plates
or similar components to prevent buckling of
individual shapes due to loads applied prior to
rigidity of an encased composite hardening of the concrete.
compression member
Es
= 0.12+  ≤ 0.3
=m
modulus
(9-7)
odulus of elasticity of steel = 200 000
9.2.2 Filled Composite Members
9.2.2.1 Limitations. For filled composite members,
the cross-sectional area of the steel section shall
comprise at least 1% of the total composite cross
MPa section.
Fy = specified minimum yield stress of steel Filled composite members shall be classified for
section, MPa local buckling according to Section 9.1.4 .
SBC 306-CR-18 87
9.2.2.2 Compressive Strength. The design The design compressive strength need not be less
compressive strength of axially loaded doubly than specified for the bare steel member as require
requiredd
symmetric filled composite members shall be by Chapter 55..
determined for the limit state of flexura buckling in
flexurall buckling
9.2.2.3 Tensile Strength. The design tensile
accordance with Section 9.2.1.2 with the following
strength of axially loaded filled composite
modifications:
members shall be determined for the limit state of
(a) For compact sections yielding as follows:
where  = 
 =      
(9-9)
 = =0.9
9.2.2.4 Load Transfer. Load
(9-18)
transfer
′
(9-10) requirements for filled composite members shall
9.6..
be determined in accordance with Section 9.6
C2 = 0.85 for rectangular sections and 0.95 for
round section 9.3—Flexure
9.3—
 =      

(b) For noncompact sections This section applies to three types of composite
members subject to flexure: composite beams with
(9-11) steel anchors consisting of steel headed stud
Where ,, ,  

are
determined from Table 9-1
slenderness ratios
anchors or steel channel anchors, encased
composite members, and filled composite members.
9.3.1 General
Pp is determined from Eq. (9-10
 =  0.0.77    

(9-10)) 9.3.1.1 Effective Width. The effective width of the
concrete slab shall be the sum of the effective
′
(9-12) widths for each side ooff the beam centerline, each of
which shall not exceed:
 =  0.0.77   

(c) For slender sections
′
(9-13)
1. one-eighth of the beam span, center-to-
center of supports;
2. one-half the distance to the centerline of
where
the adjacent beam; or
 = 9 
For rectangular filled sections
3. the distance to the edge of the slab.
9.3.1.2 Strength During Construction. When
(9-14) temporary shores are not used during construction,
the steel
steel section alone sha
shall
ll have adequate strength
 = 0.72.
For round filled sections to
attaining all loads
support75% of itsapplied priorstrength
specified

to the concrete
′
. The
design flexural strength of the steel section shall be
 
The effective stiffness of the composite section,
(9-15) determined in accordance with Chapter 6.
9.3.2 Composite Beams With Steel Headed
Stud or Steel Channel Anchors
6.
EIeff, for all sections shall be:
 =    (9-16) positive flexural strength, 

9.3.2.1 Positive Flexural Strength. The design
Mn, shall be
determined for the limit state of yielding as
where
C3 = coefficient for calculation of effective
rigidity of filled composite compression member
follows:
(a) when ℎ 
  = 0.9
 , Mn shall be
determined from the plastic stress distribution
= 0.622    ≤ 0.9 (9-17)

⁄ ≤ 3.766⁄
on the composite section for the limit state of
(plastic moment).
yielding (plastic
SBC 306-CR-18 88
(b) when ℎ ⁄ > 3.76⁄ , Mn shall be

determined from the superposition of elastic
exceed 450 mm. Such anchorage shall be
provided by steel headed stud anchors, a
stresses, considering
considering the effects of shoring, for combination of steel headed stud anchors
the limit state of yielding (yield moment). and arc spot (puddle) welds, or other
devices specified by the contract
9.3.
9.3.2.
2.2 Strength.. The design
2 Negative Flexural Strength documents.
negative flexural strength shall be determined for
the steel section alone, in accordance w
with
ith the 9.3.2.2.2 Deck Ribs Oriented
requirements of Chapter 66.. Perpendicular to Steel Beam. Concrete below the
top of the steel deck shall be neglected in
Alternatively, the design negative flexural strength determining composite section properties and in
shall be determined from the plastic stress calculating Ac for deck ribs oriented
state of yielding (plastic moment), with  = 0.9
distribution on the composite section, for the limit
provided that the following limitations are met:

perpendicular to the steel beams.
9.3.2.2.3
beams.
Deck Ribs Oriented Parallel to
Steel Beam. Concrete below the top of the steel
1. The steel beam is compact and is deck is permitted to be included in determining
adequately braced in accordance with composite section properties and shall be included
6.
Chapter 6. in calculating Ac.
2. Steel headed stud or steel channel anchors
Formed steel deck ribs over supporting beams are
connect the slab to the steel beam in the
permitted to be split longitudinally and
and sep
separated
arated to
negative moment region.
form a concrete haunch.
3. beam,
The slab reinforcement
within
within the effectiveparallel to the slab,
width of steel When the nominal depth of steel deck is 38 mm or
greater, the average width, wr, of the supported
Composite Beams With Formed Steel
Deck haunch or rib shall be not less than 50 mm for the
first steel headed stud anchor in the transverse row
9.3.2.2.1 General. The design flexural plus four stud diameters for each additional steel
strength of composite construction consisting of headed stud anchor.
concrete slabs on formed steel deck connected to
9.3.2.3 Load Transfer Between Steel Beam and
steel beams shall be determined by the applicable
Concrete Slab
portions of Sections 9.3.2.1 and 9.3.2.2 , with the
following requirements: 9.3.2.3.1 Load Transfer for Positive
Flexural Strength. The entire horizontal shear at
1. The nominal rib height shall not be greater
than 75 mm. The average width of concrete the interface between the steel beam and the
rib or haunch, wr, shall be not less than 50 concrete slab shall be assumed to be transferred by
mm, but shall not be taken in calculations steel headed stud
stud or steel channel anchors, except
for concrete-encased beams as defined in Section
as
themore
top ofthan
thethe minimum
steel deck. clear width near 9.3.3 . For composite action with concrete subject
to flexural compression, the nominal shear force
2. The concrete slab shall be connected to the
steel beam with welded steel headed stud
anchors, 20 mm or less in diameter (AWS
D1.1/D1.1M)). Steel headed stud anchors
D1.1/D1.1M
transferred by steel anchors 
between the steel beam and the concrete slab
anchors, ′ , between the point
of maximum positive moment and the point of
zero moment shall be determined as the lowest
shall be welded either through the deck or value in accordance with the limit states of
directly to the steel cross section. Steel concrete crushing, tensile yielding of the steel
headed stud anchors, after installation, shall section, or the shear strength of the steel anchors:
extend not less than 40 mm above the top
of the steel deck and there shall be at least
15 mm of specified concrete cover above
the top of the steel headed stud anchors. (b) Tens
Tensile
 = 0.85
(a) Concrete crushing
′ ′
ile yielding of the steel section

(9-19)
3. The slab thickness above the steel deck ′

(9-20)
shall be not less than 50 mm.
4. Steel deck shall be anchored to all
supporting members at a spacing not to
 = 
(c) Shear strength of steel headed stud or steel
channel anchors
SBC 306-CR-18 89
CHAPTER 9 DESIGN OF COMPOSITE MEMBERS

—
where
 = 
 
′
(9-21) the limit state of yielding (plastic moment) on
the composite section. For concrete-encased
members, steel anchors shall be provided.
Ac = area of concrete slab within effective 9 . 3 . 4 Filled Comp
Composite
osite Memb
Members
ers
width, mm2 9.3.4.1 Limitations. Filled composite sections
As = area of steel cross section, mm2 shall be classified for local buckling according to
∑  = sum of nominal shear strengths of steel

headed stud or steel channel anchors
between the point of maximum positive
Section 9.1.4 .
9.3.4.2 Flexural Strength. The design flexural
strength, bMn, of filled composite members shall
9.3.2.3.2
moment and the point of zero moment, N
Load Transfer for Negative
Flexural Strength. In continuous composite beams
 = 0.9
be determined as follows:
The nominal flexural strength, Mn, shall be

where longitudinal reinforcing steel in the negative determined as follows:
moment regions is considered to act compositely
with the steel beam, the total horizontal shear
between the point of maximum negative moment
and the point of zero moment shall be determined
as the lower value in accordance with the following where
 = 
(a) For compact sections
(9-24)
limit states: Mp  moment corresponding to plastic stress
(a) For the limit state of tensile yielding of the slab distribution
section, N-mmover the composite cross
where
 = 
reinforcement
′
(9-22) (b) For noncompact sections
 =  
    −− (9-25)
Asr = area of adequately developed
where
longitudinal reinforcing steel within the
effective width of the concrete slab, mm2
Fysr = specified minimum yield stress of the
,    are the slenderness
determined from Table 9-2
rations
reinforcing steel, MPa My = yield moment corresponding to yielding of

(b) For the limit state of shear strength of steel the tension flange and first yield of the
headed stud or steel channel anchors compression flange, N-mm. The capacity at
the first yield shall be calculated assuming a
′
(9-23) linear elastic stress distribution with the
 = 
 
9.3.3 Encased Composite. The design flexural
strength,, b M n, of concrete-encased members shall
strength
be determined as follows:

maximum concrete compressive stress
limited to 0.70 ′ and the maximum steel
stress limited to Fy.
 = 0.9
The nominal flexural strength, Mn, shall be
( c ) For slender sections, Mn, shall be determined as
the first yield moment. The compression flange
stress shall be limited to the local buckling
determined using one of the following methods: stress, Fcr, determined using Eqs. (9-14(9-14)) or
(9-15). The concrete stress distribution shall
(9-15).
(a) The superposition of elastic stresses on the be linear elastic with the maximum
composite section, considering the effects of compressive stress limited to 0.70 f c.
shoring for the limit state of yielding (yield
moment).
(b) The plastic stress distribution on the steel 9.4—
9.4 —Shear
section alone, for the limit state of yielding
(plastic moment) on the steel section. 9.4.1 Filled and Encased Composite
Members. The design shear strength, vVn, shall ,
(c) The plastic stress distribution on the composite be determined based on one of the following:
section or the strain-compatibility method, for
SBC 306-CR-18 90
(a) The design shear strength of the steel section accordance with the requirements for force
alone as specified in Chapter 7. allocation presented in this section.
(b) The design shear strength of the reinforced
concrete portion (concrete plus steel
reinforcement) alone as defined by SBC 304

The design strength, Rn, of the applicable force
transfer mechanisms as determined in accordance
with Section 9.6.3 shall equal or exceed the
with required longitudinal shear force to be
v  0.75 transferred, ′ , as determined in accordance with
(c) The nominal shear strength of the steel section
as defined in Chapter 7 plus the nominal
strength of the reinforcing steel as defined by
SBC 304 with a combined resistance factor of
Section 9.6.2 .

9.6.2 Force Allocation. Force allocation shall
be determined based upon the distribution of
external force in accordance with the following
v  0.75 requirements:
9.4.2 Composite Beams with Formed Steel User Note: Bearing strength provisions for
Deck. The design shear strength of composite externally applied forces are provided in
beams with steel headed stud or steel channel Section 10.8.
10.8. For filled composite members,
filled
anchors shall be determined based upon the
properties of the steel section alone in accordance
with Chapter 7.
7.
the term  in Eq. (10-31
(10-31)) may be taken equal
to 2.0 due to confinement effec
effects.
ts.
9.5—
9.5—Combined Flexure and Axial
Force 9.6.2.1 External Force A
Applied
pplied to Steel Section.
When the entire external force is applied directly
The interaction between flexure and axial forces in
composite members shall accou
account
nt for stability as
required by Chapter 33.. The design compressive

to the steel section, the force required to be
transferred to the concrete, ′ , shall be determined
 =  11 
as follows:
strength and the design flexural strength shall be
determined as defined in Sections 9.2 and 9.3, 9.3, ′
(9-26)
respectively. To account for the influence of length
effects on the axial strength
strength of the member
member,, the
where
nominal axial strength of the member shall be
accordance with Section 9.2.
determined in accordance 9.2. Pno = nominal axial compressive strength without
For encased composite members and for filled consideration of length effects, determined by
composite members with compact sections, the Eq. (9-4
(9-4)) for encased composite members, and
interaction between axial force and flexure shall be (9-9)) for filled composite members
Eq. (9-9 members, N
based on the interaction equations of Section 8.1.1 Pr = required external force applied to the
or one of the methods as defined in Section 8.1.2 . composite member, N

For filled composite members with noncompact or 9.6.2.2 External Force Applied to Concrete.
slender sections, the interacti
interaction
on between axial When the entire external force is applied directly to
forces and flexure shall be based on the
interaction equations of Section 8.1.1 . 
the concrete encasement or concrete fill, the force
required to be transferred to the steel, ′ , shall be
 =   
User Note: Methods for determining the capacity
of composite beam-columns are discussed in the ′
(9-27)
Commentary.
where
9.6
9.6—
—Load Transfer Pno = nominal axial compressive strength without
consideration of length effects, determined by
9.6.1 General Requirements. When external Eq. (9-4
(9-4)) for encased composite members, and
forces are applied to an axially loaded encased or Eq. (9-9
(9-9)) for filled composite members
members, N
filled composite member, the introduction of force
to the member and the transfer of longitudinal Pr = required external force applied to the
shears within the member shall be assessed in composite member, N
SBC 306-CR-18 91
9.6.2.3 External Force Applied

Applied Concurrently
Concurrently to respectively, placed within the load
Steel and Concrete. When the external force is introduction length as defined in Section

applied concurrently to the steel section and
concrete encasement or concrete fill, ′ shall be
determined as the force required to establish
9.6.4 , N
9.6.3.3 Direct Bond Interaction. Where force is
transferred in a filled composite member by direct
equilibrium of the cross section. bond interaction, the design bond strength
between the steel and concrete shall be determined
User Note: The Commentary provides an
acceptable method of determining the
longitudinal shear force required for equilibrium
of the cross section.
as follows:
 = 0.45
(a) For rectangular steel sections filled with
9.6.3 Force Transfe

Transferr Mechanism
Mechanisms. s.
nominal strength, Rn, of the force transfer
The
 = 
concrete:
(9-30)
mechanisms of direct bond interaction, shear
connection, and direct bearing shall be determined
in accordance with this section. Use of the force where
 = 0.25
(b) For round steel sections filled with concrete:
(9-31)
transfer mechanism providing the largest nominal

strength is permitted
permitted.. Force trans
transfer
fer mechanisms Cin = 2 if the filled composite member extends
shall not be superimposed. to one side of the point of force transfer
The force transfer mechanism of direct bond = 4 if the filled composite member extends
members . shall not be used for encased composite

interaction on both sides of the point of force transfer
Rn = nominal bond strength, N
9.6.3.1 Direct Bearing. Where force is transferred
Fin = nominal bond stress = 0.40 MPa
in an encased or filled composite member by direct
bearing from internal bearing mechanisms, the B = overall width of rectangular steel section
design bearing strength of the concrete for the limit along face transferring load, mm
state of concrete crushing shall be determined as
follows: D = outside diameter of round HSS, mm
 ==1.0.765
′
(9-28) 9.6.4 Detailing Requirements
9.6.4.1 Encased Composite Members. Steel
anchors utilized to transfer longitudinal shear shall
where be distributed within the load introduction length,
2 which shall not exceed a distance of two times the
A1 = loaded area of concrete, mm
minimum transverse dimension of the encased
User Note: An example of force transfer via an composite member above and below the load
internal bearing mechanism is the use of internal transfer region. Anchors utilized to transfer
steel plates within a filled composite member
member.. longitudinal shear shall be placed on at least two
faces of the steel shape in a generally symmetric
9.6.3.2 Shear Connection. Where force is configuration about the steel sha
shape
pe axes.
transferred in an encased or filled composite Steel anchor spacing, both within and outside of
member by shear connection, the design shear the load introduction length, shall conform to
strength of steel headed stud or steel channel Section 9.8.3.5 .
anchors shall be determined as follows
follows::
where
 = 
  (9-29)
9.6.4.2 Filled Composite Members. Where
required, steel anchors transferring the required
longitudinal shear force shall be distributed within
the load introduction length, which shall not exceed
∑    , a distance of two times the minimum transverse
= sum of design shear strengths,
strengths,
dimension of a rectangular steel member or two
of steel determined
anchors, headed stud
in or steel channel
accordance with times the diameter of a round steel member both
above and below the load transfer region. Steel
Section 9.8.3.1 or Section 9.8.3.4 ,
SBC 306-CR-18 92
anchor spacing within the load introduction length (b) any number of steel headed stud anchors
shall conform to Section 9.8.3.5 . welded in a row directly to the steel shape;
9.7—
9.7—Composite Diaphragms and (c) any number of steel headed stud anchors
Collector Beams welded in a row through steel deck with the
deck oriented parallel to the steel shape and
Composite slab diaphragms and collector beams the ratio of the average rib width to rib
shall be designed and detailed to transfer loads depth 1.5
the diaphragm’s
between the
members anddiaphragm,
collector elements,
the lateral force resisting system.
boundary
and elements of = 0.85 for:
≥
(a) two steel headed stud anchors welded in a
steel deck rib with the deck oriented
User Note: Design guidelines for composite perpendicular to the steel shape;
diaphragms and collector beams can be found in (b) one steel headed stud anchor welded
the Commentary. through steel deck with the deck oriented
9.8—
9.8—Steel Anchors
≥
parallel to the steel shape and the ratio of
the average rib width to rib depth 1.5
= 0.7 for three or more steel headed stud
9.8.1 General. The diameter of a steel headed anchors welded in a steel deck rib with the
stud anchor shall not be greater than 2.5 times the deck oriented perpendicular to the steel
thickness of the base metal to which it is welded, shape
unless it is welded to a flange directly over a web.
Rp = 0.75 for:
Section 9.8.2 applies to a composite flexural
member where steel anchors are embedded in a (a) steel headed stud anchors welded
solid concrete slab or in a slab cast on formed steel directly to the steel shape;
deck. Section 9.8.3 applies to all other cas
cases.
es. (b) steel headed stud anchors welded in a
composite slab with the deck oriented
9.8.2 Steel Anchors in Composite Beams. The
length of steel headed stud anchors shall not be
less than four stud diameters from the base of the
steel headed stud anchor to the top of the stud head
≥
perpendicular to the beam and emid-ht
50 mm;
(c) steel headed stud anchors welded
after installation. through steel deck, or steel sheet used as
girder filler material, and embedded in a
9.8.2.1 Strength of Steel Headed Stud
Stud Anchors composite slab with the deck oriented
The nominal shear strength of one steel headed stud parallel to the beam
anchor embedded in a solid concrete slab or in a = 0.6 for steel headed stud anchors welded
composite slab with decking shall be determined as in a composite slab with deck oriented
 = 0.5  ≤ 
follows:
where
′ (9-32)
emid-ht
perpendicular to the beam and emid-ht < 50
mm
= distance from the edge of steel headed
stud anchor shank
shank to the stee
steell deck web,
Asa = cross-sectional area of steel headed stud measured at mid-height of the deck rib,
anchor, mm2 and in the load bearing direction of the
steel headed stud anchor (in other words, in
Ec
Fu
0.043 .. 
= modulus
= specifi
specified
′
of elasticity
, MPa
ed minimum tensile strength
of concrete
strength of a steel
the direction of maximum m
simply supported beam), mm
moment
oment for a
User Note: The table below presents values of

headed stud anchor, MPa
Rg and Rp for several cases.
Rg = 1.0 for:
Condition Rg Rp
(a) one
steelsteel
deckheaded stud anchor
rib with welded
the deck in a
oriented No decking 1.0 0.75
perpendicular to the steel shape;
SBC 306-CR-18 93
maximum bending moment, positive or negative,

Decking oriented and the adjacent section of zero moment shall be
parallel to the steel equal to the horizontal shear as determined in
shape
 ≥ 1.5
ℎ
1.0 0.75
Sections 9.3.2.3.1 and 9.3.2.3.2 divided by the
nominal shear strength of one steel anchor as
determined from Section 9.8.2.1 or Section 9.8.2.2
The number of steel anchors required between any
Decking
 < 1.5
ℎ
oriented
0.85** 0.75 concentrated
moment loadbeandsufficient
shall the nearest
to point of zero
develop
maximum moment required at the concentrated
load point.
the
perpendicular to the 9.8.2.4 Detailing Requirements. Steel anchors

steel shape required on each side of the point of maximum
Number of steel bending moment, positive or negative, shall be
headed stud anchors distributed uniformly between that point and the
occupying the same adjacent points of zero moment, unle
unless
ss specified
decking rib otherwise on the contract documents
documents..
Steel anchors shall have at least 25 mm of lateral
1 1.0 0.6+ concrete cover in the direction perpendicular ttoo the
shear force, except for anchors installed in the
2 0.85 0.6+ ribs of formed steel decks. The minimum distance
3 or more 0.7 0.6+ from the center of an anchor to a free edge in the
direction of the shear force shall be 200 mm if
normal weight concrete is used and 250 mm if
hr = nominal rib height, mm lightweight concrete is used. The provisions of SBC
wr = average width of concrete rib or haunch 304,, Chapter 17 are permitted to be used in lieu of
304
(as defined in Section 9.3.2.3 )),, mm these values.
**
for a single steel headed stud anchor The minimum center-to-center spacing of steel
headed stud anchors shall be six diameters along
+
≥
this value may be increased to 0.75 when
emin-ht 50 mm
the longitudinal axis of the supporting composite
beam and four diameters transverse to the
longitudinal axis of the supporting composite
beam, except that within the ribs of formed steel
Channel Anchors. The
9.8.2.2 Strength of Steel Channel decks oriented perpendicular to the steel beam the
nominal shear strength of one hot-rolled channel minimum center-to-center spacing shall be four
anchor embedded in a solid concrete slab shall be
determined as follows: diametersspacing
in any directi
direction.
on.anchors
The maximum center-
where
 = 0.3  0.0.55  ′ (9-33)
to-center
9.8.3 Steel
Components.
of steel
Anchors in
shall not exceed
eight times the total slab thickness or 90
9000 mm.
Composite
This section shall apply to the
la = length of channel anchor, mm design of cast-in-place steel headed stud anchors
and steel channel anchors in composite components.
tf = thickness of flange of channel anchor,
The provisions of SBC 304
304,, Chapter 17 may be used
mm
in lieu of the provisions in this section.
tw = thickness of channel anchor web, mm
User Note: The steel headed stud anchor
The strength of the channel anchor shall be
strength provisions in this section are
developed by welding the channel to the beam
applicable to anchors located primarily in the
flange for a force equal to Qn, considering load transfer (connection)
(connection) region of composite
eccentricity on the anchor.
columns and beam-columns, concrete-encased
9.8.2.3 Required Number Anchors. The
Number of Steel Anchors. and filled composite beams, composite
number of anchors required between the section of coupling beams, and composite walls, where
SBC 306-CR-18 94
the steel and concrete are working compositely

within a member. They are not intended for
Shear h/d ≥ ≥
5 h/d 7
hybrid construction where the steel and
concrete are not working compositely, such as
Tension h/d ≥ ≥
8 h/d 10
with embed plates.
Section 9.8.2 specifies the strength of steel
anchors embedded in a solid concrete slab or
Shear
Tension
and
h/d 8 ≥ N/A*
in a concrete slab with formed steel deck in a h/d = ratio of steel headed stud anch
anchor
or shank
composite beam. length to the top of the stud head, to shank
Limit states for the steel shank of the anchor
diameter
*
and for concrete
concrete breakout in shear aare
re covered Refer to SBC 304 304,, Chapter 17 for the
directly in this Section. Additionally, the calculation of interaction effects of anchors
spacing and dimensional limitations provided embedded in lightweight concrete.
in these provisions preclude the limit states of
concrete pry- out for anchors loaded in shear
and concrete breakout for anchors loaded in 9.8.3.1 Shear Strength of Steel Headed Stud
tension as defined by SBC 304
304,, Chapter 17. Anchors in Composite Components. Where
concrete breakout strength in shear is not an
For normal weight concrete: Steel headed stud applicable limit state,
state, the design shear strength,
strength,
anchors subjected to shear only shall not be less   of one steel headed stud anchor shall be
than five stud diameters in length from the base of determined as follows:
the steel headed stud to the top of the stud head
after installation. Steel headed stud anchors
subjected to tension or interaction of sshear
hear and
tension shall not be less than eight stud diameters where
 = 0.65 (9-34)
in length from the base of the stud to the top of the

stud head after installation. Qnv = nominal shear strength of steel headed stud
anchor, N
For lightweight concrete: Steel headed stud anchors
subjected to shear only shall not be less than seven Asa = cross-sectional area of steel headed stud
stud diameters in length from the base of the steel anchor, mm2
headed stud to the top of the stud head after
installation. Steel headed stud anchors subjected to
Fu = specified minimum tensile strength of a
tension shall not be less than ten stud diameters in steel headed stud anchor
anchor,, MPa
length from the base of the stud to the top of the Where concrete breakout strength in shear is an
stud head after installation. The nominal strength of applicable limit state, the design shear strength of
steel headed
of shear stud anchors
and tension subjected concrete
for lightweight to interaction
shall one
one steel
of theheaded stud anchor shall be determined by
following:
304,, Chapter 17.
be determined as stipulated by SBC 304
(1) Where anchor reinforcement is developed in
Steel headed stud anchors subjected to tension or accordance with Chapter 25 of SBC 304 on
interaction of shear and tension shall have a both sides of the concrete breakout surface
diameter of the head greater than or equal to 1.6 for the steel headed stud anchor, the
times the diameter of the shank. minimum of the steel nominal shear strength
(9-34)) and the nominal strength
from Eq. (9-34 strength of
User Note: The following table presents the anchor reinforcement shall be used for
values of minimum steel headed stud anchor the nominal shear strength, Qnv, of the steel
h/d ratios for each condition covered in the headed stud anchor.
Code.
304,, Chapter 17.
(2) As stipulated by the SBC 304
Normal
Loading Lightweight User Note: If concrete breakout strength in shear
Weight
Condition Concrete Concrete is an applicable limit state (for example, where
the breakout prism is not restrained by an
adjacent steel plate, flange or web), appropriate
SBC 306-CR-18 95
anchor reinforcement is required for the 9.8.3.3 Strength of Steel Headed

Headed Stud Anchors
Anchors
provisions of this Section to be used. for Interaction of Shear and Tension in
Composite Components. Where concrete
9.8.3.2 Tensile Strength of Steel Headed Stud breakout strength in shear is not a governing limit
Anchors in Composite Components. Where the state, and where the distance from the center of an
distance from the center of an anchor to a free anchor to a free edge of concrete in the direction
edge of concrete in the direction perpendicular to perpendicular to the height of the steel headed stud
the
thanheight of the
or equal to steel headedthe
1.5 times stud anchor
height of isthegreater
steel anchor
height ofis the
greater than or stud
steel headed equal to 1.5
anchor times the
measured to
headed stud anchor measured to the top of the st stud
ud the top of the stud head, and where the center-to-
head, and where the center-to-ce
center-to-center
nter spacing of steel center spacing of steel headed stud anchors is
headed stud anchors is greater than or equal to three greater than or equal to three times the height of
times the height of the steel headed stud anchor the steel headed stud anchor measured to the top
measured to the top of the stud head, the design of the stud head, the nominal strength for interaction
tensile strength of one steel headed stud
stud anchor shall of shear and tension of one steel headed stud anchor
be determined
determined as follows
follows:: shall be determined as follows:
 = 
 = 0.75
(9-35)    ≤ 1.0 (9-36)
where
where
Qnt = nominal tensile strength of steel headed
Qrt = required tensile strength, N
stud anchor, N
Where the distance from the center of an anchor
to a free edge of concrete in the direction
perpendicular to the height of the steel headed stud

Qct = Qnt = design tensile strength, determined
in accordance with Section 9.8.3.2 , N
Qrv = required shear strength, N
anchor is less than 1.5 times the height of the steel
headed stud anchor measured to the top of the stud
head, or where the center-to-center spacing of steel
Qcv= Qnv = design shear strength, determined
in accordance with Section 9.8.3.1 , N
headed stud anchors is less than three times the
height of the steel headed stud anchor measured to
the top of the stud
stud head, the nominal tensile strength
 = resistanc f actor for tension = 0.75
resistancee factor
= resistance factor for shear = 0.65
of one steel headed stud anchor shall be determined
by one of the following: Where concrete breakout strength in shear is a
governing limit state, or whe
wherere the distance from
1. Where anchor reinforcement is developed the center of an anchor to a free edge of
in accordance with Chapter 25 of SBC 304 concrete in the direction perpendicular to the
on both sides of the concrete breakout height of the steel headed stud anchor is less than
surface for the steel headed stud anchor, 1.5 times the height of the steel headed sstud
tud anchor
the minimum of the steel nominal tensile measured to the top of the stud head, or where
where the
strength from Eq. (9-35
(9-35)) and the nominal center-to-center spacing of steel headed stud
strength of the anchor reinforcement shall anchors is less than three times the height of the
be used for the nominal tensile strength, steel headed stud anchor measured to the top of the
Qnt, of the steel headed stud anchor
anchor.. stud head, the nominal strength for interaction of
304,, Chapter 17.
2. As stipulated by the SBC 304 shear and tension of one steel headed stud anchor
shall be determined by one of the follo
following:
wing:
User Note: Supplemental confining (a) Where anchor reinforcement is developed in
reinforcement is recommended around the accordance with Chapter 25, SBC 304 on both
anchors for steel headed stud anchors subjected sides of the concrete breakout surface for the
to tension or interaction of shear and tension to steel headed stud anc
anchor,
hor, the minimum of the
avoid edge effects or effects from closely steel nominal shear strength from Eq. (9-34
(9-34))
spaced anchors.
304,, Section
304 See the
17.4.2.9 forCommentary
guidelines. and SBC and the nominal strength of the anchor
reinforcement shall be used for the nominal
shear strength, Qnv, of the steel headed stud
SBC 306-CR-18 96
anchor, and the minimum of the steel nominal

anchor,
tensile strength from Eq. (9-35 (9-35)) and the
nominal strength of the anchor reinforcement
shall be used for the nominal tensile strength,
Qnt, of the steel headed stud anchor for use in
(9-36).
Eq. (9-36 ).
(b) As stipulated by the SBC 304
304,, Chapter 17.
9.8.3.4 Shear Strength of Steel Channel
Anchors in Composite Components. The design
shear strength of steel channel anchors shall be
based on the provisions of Section 9.8.2.2 with the
resistance factor and safety factor as specified
below.
below.
 = 0.75
9.8.3.5 Detailing Requirements in Composite
Components. Steel anchors shall have at least 25
mm of lateral clear concrete cover. The minimum
center-to-center spacing of steel headed stud
anchors shall be four diameters in any direction.
The maximum center-to-center spacing of steel
headed stud anchors
shank diameter. Theshall not exceed
maximum 32 times the
center-to-center
spacing of steel channel anchors shall be 600 mm.
User Note: Detailing requirements provided in

this section are absolute limits. See Sections
9.8.3.1 , 9.8.3.2 and 9.8.3.3 for additional
limitations required to preclude edge and group
effect considerations.
9.9—Special Cases
9.9—
When composite construction does not conform to
the requirements of Section 9.1 through Section
9.8, the strength
9.8, steel anchors
anchors
construction shall of
be established by and details of
testing.
SBC 306-CR-18 97
Table 9-1: Limiting Width-to-Thickness Ratios for Compression Steel Elements in Composite Members
Subject to Axial Compression For Use with Section 9.2.2 .
Description of element
Width-to- 
Compact/ Noncompact/
Maximum
Thickness Ratio
Walls of Rectangular 2.26 
Noncompact

Slender
3.00 
Permitted
5.00 
HSS and Boxes of
Uniform Thickness
b/ t
0.15E
 0.19E 0.31E
Round HSS D/t
Fy Fy Fy
Table 9-2: Limiting Width-to-Thickness Ratios for Compression Steel Elements in Composite Members
Subject to Flexure For Use with Section 9.3.4 .
Width-to- Maximum
Description of element Compact/
Thickness Ratio
 
Noncompact
 
Noncompact/
Slender
Permitted
Flanges of Rectangular
HSS and Boxes of
Uniform Thickness
b/ t
2.26  3.00  5.00 
Webs of Rectangular
HSS and Boxes of
Uniform Thickness
h/t
3.00  5.70  5.70 
Round HSS 0.09 E 0.31E 0.31E
D/t Fy Fy Fy
SBC 306-CR-18 98
CHAPTER 9
— DESIGN OF COMPOSITE MEMBERS

SBC 306-CR-18 99
CHAPTER 10 — DESIGN OF CONNECTIONS
10—DESIGN
CHAPTER 10—DESIGN OF CONNECTIONS
10.1.2 Simple Connections. Simple connections

This chapter addresses connecting elements,
of beams, girders and trusses shall be designed as
connectors and the affected elements of connected flexible and are permitted to be proportioned for
members not subject to fatigue loads.
the reaction shears only, except as otherwise
The chapter is organized as follows: indicated in the design documents. Flexible beam
10.1 —General Provisions connections shall accommodate end rotations of
simple beams. Some inelastic but self-limiting
10.2 —Welds deformation in the connection is permitted to
10.3 —Bolts and Threaded Parts accommodate the end rotation of a simple beam.
10.4 —Affected Elements of Members and 10.1.3 Moment Connections. End connections of
Connecting Elements restrained beams, girders and trusses shall be
designed for the combined effect of forces resulting
10.5 —Fillers from moment and shear induced by the rigidity of
10.6 —Splices the connections. Response criteria for moment
connections are provided in Section 2.3.5 (b).
10.7 —Bearing Strength
10.8 —Column Bases and Bearing on Concrete User Note: See Chapter 3 and Appendix F for
analysis requirements to establish the required
10.9 —Anchor Rods and Embedments strength for the design of connections.
10.10—Flanges and Webs With Concentrated
Forces 10.1.4 Compression Members with Bearing
Joints. Compression members relying on bearing
for load transfer shall meet the following
requirements:
User Note: For cases not included in this chapter,
the following sections apply: 1. When columns bear on bearing plates or are
finished to bear at splices, there shall be
Chapter 11 Design of HSS and Box Member sufficient connectors to hold all parts
Connections securely in place.
Appendix C Design for Fatigue 2. When compression members other than
columns are finished to bear, the splice
material and its connectors shall be
10.1—
10.1—General Provisions arranged to hold all parts in line and their
strength, ϕRn of
10.1.1 Design Basis. The design strength, required strength
strength shall be the lesser of:
connections shall be determined in accordance An axial tensile force of 50% of the
with the provisions of this chapter and the required compressive strength of the
provisions of Chapter 2.
2. member; or
The required strength of the connections shall be The moment and shear resulting from
determined by structur al analysis for the specified
structural a transverse load equal to 2% of the
design loads, consistent with the type of required compressive strength of the
construction specified, or shall be a proportion of member. The transverse load shall be
the required strength of the connected members applied at the location of the splice
when so specified herein. exclusive of other loads that act on the
Where the gravity axes of intersecting axially member.. The member shall be ttaken
member aken as
loaded members do not intersect at one point, the pinned formoments
shears and the determination
at the splice.of the
effects of eccentricity shall be considered.
SBC 306-CR-18 100
be permitted to terminate perpendicular to the

User Note: All compression joints should also
flange, providing the weld is terminated at leas
leastt a
be proportioned to resist any tension
distance equal to the weld size away from the
developed by the load combinations stipulated
access hole.
2.2..
in Section 2.2
For heavy sections as defined in Sections 1.3.1.3
10.1.5 Splices in Heavy Sections. When tensile and 1.3.1.4 , the thermally cut surfaces of weld
forces due to applied tension or flexure are to be access holes shall be ground to bright metal and
transmitted through splices in heavy sections, as inspected by either magnetic particle or dye
defined in Sections 1.3.1.3 and 1.3.1.4 , by penetrant methods prior to deposition of splice
complete-joint-penetration
complete-joint-penetrat ion groove (CJP) welds, the welds. If the curved transition portion of weld
following provisions apply: (1) material notch- access holes is formed by predrilled or sawed
toughness requirements as given in Sections 1.3.1.3 holes, that portion of the access hole need not be
and 1.3.1.4 ; (2) weld acces
accesss hole details as given in ground. Weld
Weld access holes in other shapes need not
Section 10.1.6 ; (3) filler metal requirements as be ground nor inspected by dye penetrant or
given in Section 10.2.6 ; and (4) thermal cut surface magnetic particle methods.
preparationn and inspection requ
preparatio requirements
irements as given in Placementt of Welds and Bolts. Groups of
10.1.7 Placemen
Section 14.2.2 . The foregoing provision is not welds or bolts at the ends of any member which
applicable to splices of elements of built-up shapes transmit axial force into that member shall be sized
that are welded prior to assembling the
t he shape. so that the center of gravity of the group coincides
with the center of gravity of the mem member,
ber, unless
User Note: CJP groove welded splices of heavy
provision is made for the eccentr
eccentricity.
icity. The foregoing
sections can exhibit detrimental effects of weld
shrinkage. Members that are sized for provision is not applicable to end connections of
single angle, double angle and similar members.
compression that are also subject to tensile
forces may be less susceptible to damage from 10.1.8 Bolts in Combinatio
Combinationn with Welds. Bolts
shrinkage if they are spliced using partial-joint- shall not be considered as sharing the load in
penetration PJP groove
groove welds on the flanges and combination with welds, except that shear
fillet-welded web plates, or using bolts for some connections with any grade of bolts permitted by
or all of the splice . Section 1.3.3 , installed in standard holes or short
slots transverse to the direction of the load, are
10.1.6 Weld Access Holes. All weld access holes permitted to be considered to share the load with
required to facilitate welding operations shall be longitudinally loaded fillet welds. In such
detailed to provide room for weld backing as connections the design strength of the bolts shall not
needed. The access hole shall have a length from be taken as greater than 50% of the design stren
strength
gth
the toe of the weld preparation not less than 1.5 of bearing-type bolts in the connection.
times the thickness of the material in which the In making welded alterations to structures,
hole
shall ishave
made, nor less
a height notthan
less 40 mm.
than the The accessofhole
thickness the existing rivets and high-strength bolts tightened to
the requirements for slip-critical connections
connections are
material with the access hole, nor less than 20 mm, permitted to be utilized for carrying loads present at
nor does it need to exceed 50 mm. the time of alteration and the welding need only
For sections that are rolled or welded prior to provide the additional required strength.
cutting, the edge of the web shall be sloped or 10.1.9 High-Strength Bolts in Combination
curved from the surface of the flange to the with Rivets. In both new work and alterations, in
reentrant surface of the access hole. In hot-rolled
connections designed as slip-critical connections
shapes, and built-up shapes with CJP groov
groovee welds
in accordance with the provisions of Section 10.3
10.3,,
that join
j oin tthe
he web-to-flange, w
weld
eld access holes shall high-strength bolts are permitted to be considered
be free of notches and sharp reentrant corners. No as sharing the load with existing rivets.
arc of the weld access hole shall have a radius less
than 10 mm. 10.1.10 Limitati
Limitations
ons on Bolted and Welded
Connections. Joints with pretensioned bolts or
pretensioned
In built-up shapes with fillet or partial-joint- welds shall be used for the following connections:
penetration groove welds that join the web-to-
flange, weld access holes shall be free of notches 1. Column splices in all multi-story structures
and sharp reentrant corners. The access hole shall over 38 m in height
SBC 306-CR-18 101
2. Connections of all beams and girders to

girders
User Note: The effective throat of a partial-
columns and any other beams and girders
on which the bracing of columns is joint-penetration groove weld is dependent on
dependent in structures over 38 m in the process used and the weld position. The
design drawings should either indicate the
height
effective throat required or the weld strength
3. In all structures carrying cranes of over 50 required, and the fabricator should detail the
kN capacity: roof truss splices and joint based on the weld process and position to
connections of trusses to columns; be used to weld the joint.
column splices; column bracing; knee
braces; and crane supports The effective weld throat for flare groove welds
4. Connections for the support of when filled flush to the surface of a round bar or a
machinery and other live loads that 90 bend in a formed section or rectangular HSS,
produce impact or reversal of load shall be as shown in TABLE 10-2 10-2,, unless other
effective throats are demonstrated by tests. The
Snug-tightened joints or joints with ASTM A307 effective
effective throat of flare groove welds filled less than
bolts shall be permitted except where otherwise flush shall be as shown in TABLE 10-2, 10-2, less the
specified. greatest perpendicular dimension measured from a
10.2
10.2—
—Welds line flush to the base metal surface to the weld
surface.
All provisions of AWS D1.1/D1.1M apply under
this Code, with the exception that the provisions Larger effective throats than those in TABLE 10-2
of the listed sections apply under this Code in lieu are permitted for a given welding procedure
of the cited AW
AWS S provisions as follows: specification (WPS), provided the fabricator can
establish by qualification the consistent production
1. Section 10.1.6 in lieu of AWS of such larger effective throat. Qualification shall
D1.1/D1.1M,, Section 5.17.1
D1.1/D1.1M consist of sectioning the we
weld
ld normal to its axis, at
2. Section 10.2.2 a in lieu of AWS mid-length and terminal ends. Such sectioning shall
D1.1/D1.1M,, Section 2.3.2
D1.1/D1.1M be made on a number of combinations of material
sizes representative of the range to be used in the
3. TABLE 10-2 in lieu of AWS D1.1/D1.1M
D1.1/D1.1M,, fabrication.
Table 2.1
10.2.1.2 Limitations. The minimum
4. TABLE 10-5 in lieu of AWS D1.1/D1.1M,
D1.1/D1.1M, effective throat of a partia
partial-joint-
l-joint-penetrat
penetration
ion groov
groovee
Table 2.3 weld shall not be less than the size required to
5. APPENDIX C,
C, TABLE C-1 in lieu of transmit calculated force
forcess nor the size shown in
AWS D1.1/D1.1M,
D1.1/D1.1M, Table 2.5 TABLE 10-3.
10-3. Minimum weld size is determined by
the thinner of the two parts joined.
6. Section
of AWS2.3.10 and APPENDIX
D1.1/D1.1M
D1.1/D1.1M, C inClieu
, Section 2, Part
7. Section 14.2.2 in lieu of AWS 10.2.2 Fillet
Fillet We
Weld
ldss
D1.1/D1.1M,, Sections 5.15.4.3 and
D1.1/D1.1M 10.2.2.1 Effective Area. The effective area
5.15.4.4 of a fillet weld shall be the effective length
10.2.1 Groove Welds multiplied by the effective throat. The effective
throat of a fillet weld shall be the shortest distance
10.2.1.1 Effective Area. The effective area from the root to the face of the diagrammatic weld.
of groov
groovee welds shall be considered as the length of An increase in effective throat is permitted if
the weld times the effective throat. consistent penetration beyond the root of the
The effective throat of a complete-joint-penetration diagrammatic weld is demonstrated by tests using
(CJP) groove weld shall be the thickness of the the production process and procedure variables.
thinner part joined. For fillet welds in holes and slots, the effective
The effective throat of a partial-
partial-joint-p
joint-penetrat
enetration
ion length shall be the length of the centerline of the
(PJP) groove weld shall be as shown in TABLE weld along the center of the plane through the
10-1..
10-1 throat. In the case of overlapping fillets, the
effective area shall not exceed the nominal cross-
SBC 306-CR-18 102
sectional area of the hole or slot, in the plane of the surfaces and to join components of built-up
faying surface. members. The length of any segment of intermittent
fillet welding shall be not less than four times the
10.2.2.2 Limitations. The minimum size of
weld size, with a minimum of 40 mm.
fillet welds shall be not less than the size required
to transmit calculated forces, nor the size as show
shownn In lap joints, the minimum amount of lap shall be
in TABLE 10-4.
10-4. These provis
provisions
ions do not apply to five times the thickness of the thinner part joined,
fillet weld reinforceme nts of partial- or complete-
reinforcements but not less than 25 mm. Lap joints joining plates
joint-penetrat
joint- penetration
ion groove
groove welds. or bars subsubjected
jected to axial stres
stresss that utilize
transverse fillet welds only shall be fillet welded
The maximum size of fillet welds of connected parts
along the end of both lapped parts, except where the
shall be:
deflection of the lapped parts is sufficiently
(a) Along edges of material less than 6 mm thick; restrained to prevent opening of the joint under
not greater than the thickness of the material. maximum loading.
(b) Along edges of material 6 mm or more in Fillet weld terminations are permitted to be
thickness; not greater than the thickness of the stopped short or extend to the ends or sides of parts
material minus 2 mm, unless the weld is or be boxed except as limited by the following:
especially designated on the drawings to be
built out to obtain full-throat thickness. In the 1. For overlapping elements of members in
as-welded condition, the distance between the which one connected part extends
edge of the base metal and the toe of the weld beyond an edge of another connected part
is permitted to be less than 2 mm provided the that is subject to calculated tensile stress,
fillet welds shall terminate not less than
weld size is clearly verifiable. the size of the weld from that edge.
The minimum length of fillet welds designed on the
basis of strength shall be not les
lesss than four times the 2. For connections where flexibility of the
nominal weld size, or else the effective size of the outstanding elements is required, when
weld shall be considered not to exceed one quarter end returns are used the length of the return
of its length. If longitudinal fillet welds are used shall not exceed four times the nominal
alone in end connections of flat-bar tension size of the weld nor half the width of the
members, the length of each fillet weld shall be not part.
less than the perpendicular distance between them. 3. Fillet welds joining transverse stiffeners
For the effect of longitudinal fillet weld length in to plate girder webs 20 mm thick or less
end connections upon the effective area of the shall end not less than four times nor more
connected member, see Section 4.3 4.3.. than six times the thickness of the web
For end-loaded fillet welds with a length up to 100 from the web toe of the web-to-flange
times the w
weld
eld size, it is permitted to take the welds, except where the ends of stiffene
stiffeners
rs
effective length equal to the actual length. When are welded to the flange.
the length of the end-loaded fillet weld exceeds Fillet welds that occur on opposite sides of a
100 times the weld size, the effective length shall common plane shall be interrupted at the corner
be determined by multiplying the actual length by common to both welds.
the reduction factor
factor,, , determined as follows:
User Note: Fillet weld terminations should be
 = 1.
1.22 − 0.0022  ⁄  < 1.0
0.00 (10-1) located approximately one weld size from the
edge of the connection to minimize notches in the
where base metal. Fillet welds terminated at the end of
l  actual length of end-loaded weld, mm the joint, other than those connecting stiffeners
to girder webs
webs,, are not a cause for correction.
w  size of weld leg, mm
When the length of the weld exceeds 300 times the Fillet welds in holes or slots are permitted to be
leg size, w, the effective length shall be taken as used to transmit shear and resist loads
perpendicular to the faying surface in lap joints or
180w. to prevent the buckling or separation of lapped
Intermittent fillet welds are permitted to be used to parts and to join components of built-up members.
transfer calculated stress across a joint or faying Such fillet welds may overlap, subject to the
SBC 306-CR-18 103
10.2.. Fillet welds in holes or

provisions of Section 10.2
provisions
slots are not to be considered plug or slot welds.
where
 =  (10-3)
10.2.3 Plug and Slot Welds

FnBM = nominal stress of the base metal,
10.2.3.1 Effective Area. The effective MPa
shearing area of plug and slot welds shall be Fnw = nominal stress of the weld metal,
considered as the nominal cross-sectional area of
MPa
the hole or slot in the plane of the faying surface
surface. ABM = cross-sectional area of the base
10.2.3.2 Limitations. Plug or slot welds are metal, mm2
permitted to be used to transmit shear iinn lap joints
Awe = effective area of the weld, mm2
or to prevent buckling or separation of lapped parts
and to join component parts of built-up members. The values of , FnBM and Fnw and limitations
The diameter of the holes for a plug weld shall not thereon are given in TABLE 10-5.
be less than tthe
he thickness of the part containing it Alternatively, for fillet welds the design strength is
plus 8 mm, rounded to the next larger even mm, permitted to be determined as follows
follows::
nor greater than the minimum diameter plus 3 mm
or 2.25 times the thickness of the weld.
The minimum center-to-center spacing of plug
 = 0.75
(a) For a linear weld group with a uniform leg
welds shall be four times the diameter of the hole. size, loaded through the center of gravity
(10-4)
The length of slot for a slot weld shall not exceed 10
times the thickness of the weld.
weld. The width of the
slot shall be not less than the thickness of the part
containing it plus 8 mm rounded to the next llarger
even mm, nor shall
arger
shall it be larger than 2.25 times the
 = 0.60=1.1.00.5. 
where
and
(10-5)
thickness of the weld. The ends of the slot shall be

FEXX  filler metal classification strength, MPa
semicircular or shall have the corn
corners
ers rounded to a
radius of not less than the thickness of the part   angle of loading measured from the weld
containing it, except those ends which extend to the longitudinal axis, degrees
edge of the part.
The minimum spacing of lines of slot welds in a User Note: A linear weld group is one in which
direction transverse to their length shall be four all elements are in a line or are parallel.
times the width of the slot. The minimum center-to-
(b) For weld elements within a weld group that are
center spacing
spacing in a longitudinal direction on an
anyy
analyzed using an instantaneous center of
line shall be two times the length of the slot.
rotation method, the components of the
The thickness of plug or slot welds in material 16 nominal strength, Rnx and Rny, and the nominal
mm or less in thickness shall be equal to the moment capacity, Mn, are permitted to be
thickness of the material. In material over 16 mm determined as follows:
thick, the thickness of the weld shall be at least
one-half the thickness of the material but not less  ==   (10-6)
than 16 mm.
10.2.4 Strength. The design strength, Rn of
 

  
 = ∑∑[[  ] (10-7)
(10-8)
welded joints shall be the lower value of the base
material strength determined according to the limit where
states of tensile rupture and shear rupture and the
Awei  effective area of weld throat of the
t he ith
weld metal strength determined according tto o the
limit state of rupture as follows: weld element, mm2
For the base metal . (10-9)

(10-2)
 = 
For the weld metal  = 0.60=11..00.11..90.59.. 10-10)
SBC 306-CR-18 104
Fnwi  nominal stress in the ith weld element, Rnwl  total nominal strength of longitudinally
MPa loaded fillet welds, as determined in
accordance with TABLE 10-5,
10-5, N
Fnwix  x-component of nominal stress, Fnwi,
MPa Rnwt  total nominal strength of transversely
loaded fillet welds, as determined in
Fnwiy  y-component of nominal stress, Fnwi,
accordance with TABLE 10-5 without the
MPa
pi  i /  mi ratio of element i alternate in Section 10.2.4 a, N
,
10.2.5 Combinatio
Combinationn of Welds. If two or more of
deformation to its deformation at the general types of welds (groove, fillet, plug, slot)
maximum stress are combined in a single joint, the strength of each
ri  distance from instantaneous center of shall be separately computed with reference to the
rotation to ith weld element, mm axis of the group in order to determine the strength
of the combination.
xi  x component of ri
Metal Requirements. The choice
10.2.6 Filler Metal
yi  y component of ri of filler metal for use with complete-joint-
 =  ⁄ 
deformation of the ith
weld element at an intermediate
penetration
penetration groove welds subject to tension normal
groove welds
to the effective area shall comply with the
requirements for matching filler metals given in
stress level, linearly proportioned
proportion ed to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
D1.1/D1.1M.
the critical deformation based on
distance from the instantaneous Filler metal with a specified minimum Charpy V-
center of rotation, ri, mm notch toughness of 27 J at 4 °C or lower shall be
 = 0.209 22−.−. , deformation of

the ith weld element at maximum
used in the following joints:
1. Complete-joint-penetration groove welded
T- and
and corner joints with steel backing left
stress, mm
in place, subject to tension normal to the
ucr  deformation of the weld element effective area, unless the joints are
with minimum ui /ri ratio at ultimate designed using the nominal strength and
stress (rupture), usually in the resistance factor or safety factor as
element furthest from instantaneous applicable for a partial-
partial-joint-p
joint-penetrat
enetration
ion
center of rotation, mm groove
groove weld
 = 1.087 6 6−.−. ≤ 0.17 ,
deformation of the ith weld element
2. Complete-joint-penetra
Complete-joint-penetration
tion groove welded
splices subject to tension normal to the
at ultimate stress (rupture), mm effective area in heavy sections as defined
in Sections 1.3.1.3 and 1.3.1.4
i  angle between the longitudinal axis of
ith weld element and the direction of the The manufacturer’s Certificate of Conformance
resultant force acting on the element, shall be sufficient evidence of compliance.
degrees 10.2.7 Mixed Weld Metal. When Charpy V-
(c) For fillet weld groups concentrically loaded notch toughness is specified, the process
and consisting of elements with a uniform leg consumables for all weld metal, tack welds, root
size that are oriented both longitudinally and pass and
and sub
subsequent
sequent passes deposited in a joint shall
transversely to the direction of applied load, be compatible to ensure notch-tough composite
the combined strength, Rn, of the fillet weld weld metal.
group shall be determined as the greater of
or
(i)  =   (10-11)
10.3—
10.3—Bolts and Threaded Parts
10.3.1 High-Strength Bolts. Use of high-
strength bolts shall conform to the provisions of
the Specification for Structural Joints Using High-
(ii) (10-12)
where  = 0.85 1.1.55 Strength Bolts, hereafter referred to as the RCSC
Specification, as approved by the Research Council
on Structural Connections, except as ootherwise
therwise
provided in this Code. High-strength bolts in this
SBC 306-CR-18 105
Code are grouped according to material strength as requirements of the RCSC Specification with
follows: modifications as required for the increased
diameter and/or length to provide the design
Group A ASTM A325, A325M, F1852, A354
—
pretension.
Grade BC, and A449
10.3.2 Size and Use of Holes. The maximum
Group B ASTM A490, A490M, F2280, and A354
—
sizes of holes for bolts are given in TABLE 10-8,
Grade BD
except that larger holes, required for tolerance on
When assembled, all joint surfaces, including those location of anchor rods in concrete foundations, are
adjacent to the washers, shall
shall be free of scale, permitted in column base details.
except tight mill scale.
Standard holes or short-slotted holes transverse to
Bolts are permitted to be installed to the snug-tight the direction of the load shall be provided in
condition when used in: accordance with the provisions of this Code,
(a) bearing-type connections except as noted in unless oversized holes, short-slotted holes parallel
Section 5.6 or Section 10.1.10 to the load, or long-slotted holes are approved by
the engineer of record. Finger shims up to 6 mm
(d) tension or combined shear and tension are permitted in slip- critical connections designed
applications, for Group A bolts only, where on the basis of standard holes without reducing
loosening or fatigue due to vibration or load the nominal shear sstrength
trength of the fastener to that
fluctuations are not design considerations specified for slotted holes.
The snug-tight condition is defined as the tightness Oversized holes are permitted in any or all plies of
required to bring the connected plies into firm slip-critical connections, but they shall not be used
contact. Bolts to be tightened to a condition other in bearing-type connections. Hardened washers
than snug tight shall be clearly identified on the shall be installed over oversized holes in an outer
design drawings. ply.
All high-strength bolts specified on the design Short-slotted holes are permitted in any or all plies
drawings to be used in pretensioned or slip-critical of slip-critical or bearing-type connections. The
joints shall be tightened to a bolt tension not less slots are permitted without regard to direction of
than that given in TABLE 10-6.
10-6. Installation shall loading in slip- critical connections, but the length
be by any of the following methods: turn-of-nut shall be normal to the direction of the load in
method, a direct-tension-indicator, twist-off-type bearing-typee connections. Washers
bearing-typ Washers shall be
tension-control bolt, calibrated wrench, or installed over short-slotted holes in an outer ply;
alternative design bolt. when high-strength bolts are used, such washers
shall be hardened washers conforming to ASTM
User Note: There are no specific minimum or F436.
maximum tension requirements for snug-tight
bolts. Fully pretens
pretensioned
ioned bolts such as ASTM When
used inGroup
slottedBorbolts over 25
oversized mmininexternal
holes diameter are
plies,
F1852 or F2280 are permitted unless specifically
prohibited on design drawings. a single hardened washer conforming to ASTM
F436, except with 8 mm minimum thickness, shall
When bolt requirements cannot be provided within be used in lieu of
of the standa
standard
rd was
washer.
her.
the RCSC Specification limitations because of
requirements for lengths exceeding 12 diameters User Note: Washer requirements are provided
or diameters exceeding 38 m mm,
m, bolts or threaded in the RCSC Specification, Section 6.
rods conforming to Group
Group A or Group B materials
are permitted to be used in accordance with the Long-slotted holes are permitted in only one of the
10-7..
provisions for threaded parts in TABLE 10-7 connected parts
parts of either a slip-critical or bearing-
type connection at an individual faying surface.
When ASTM A354A354 Grade BC, A354 Grade BD, or Long-slotted holes are permitted w without
ithout regard
A449 bolts and
and threaded rods araree used in slip- to direction of loading in slip-critical connections,
critical connections, the bolt geometry including but shall be normal to the direction of load in
be threadtopitch
theequal , thread
or (if larger length,
larger head and
in diameter) nut(s) shall
proportional
proportional to bearing-type connections. Where long-slotted
holes are used in an outer ply, plate washers, or a
that required by the RCSC Specification. continuous bar with standard holes, having a size
Installation shall comply with all applicable
SBC 306-CR-18 106
sufficient to completely cover the slot after exceed 24 times the thickness of the thinner part
installation, shall be provided. In high-strength or 300 mm.
bolted connections, such plate washers or (b) For unpainted members of weathering steel
continuous bars shall be not less than 8 mm thick subject to atmospheric corrosion, the spacing
and shall be of structural grade material, but need shall not exceed 14 times the thickness of the
not be hardened. If hardened washers are required thinner part or 180 mm.
for use of high-strength bolts, the hardened
washers
the plate shall
washerbeorplaced
bar. over the outer surface of
User Note: Dimensions in (a) and (b) do not
apply to elements consisting of two shapes in
continuous contact.
10.3.3 Minimum Spacing. The distance between
centers of standard, oversized or slotted holes shall
10.3.6 Tensile and Shear Strength of Bolts and
not be less than 2.67 times the nominal diameter, d,
Threaded Parts. The design tensile or shear
of the fastener; a distance of 3d is preferred.
strength, Rn of a snug-tightened or pretensioned
User Note: ASTM F1554 anchor rods may be high-strength bolt or threaded part shall be
furnished in accordance to product determined according to the limit states of tension
specifications with a body diameter less than rupture and shear rupture as follows:
the nominal diameter. Load effects such as
bending and elongation should be calculated
based on minimum diameters permitted by
 ==0.75 (10-13)
the product specification. See ASTM F1554

where
for the “Applicable
and Various Types of ASTM Specifications
Structural Fasteners,” Ab = nominal unthreaded body area of bolt or
in CHAPTER 1.
1. threaded part, mm2
10.3.4 Minimum Edge Distance. The distance Fn = nominal tensile stress, Fnt, or shear stress,
from the center of a standard hole to an edge of a 10-7,, MPa
Fnv, from TABLE 10-7
connected part in any direction shall not be less
The required tensile strength shall include any
than either the applicable value from TABLE 10-9 10-9,,
tension resulting from prying action produced by
or as required in Section 10.3.10 . The distance from
deformation of the connected parts.
the center of an oversized or slotted hole to an edge
of a connected part shall be not less than that
User Note: The force that can be resisted by
required for a standard hole to an edge of a
a snug-tightened or pretensioned high-
connected part plus the applicable increment, C2,
strength bolt or threaded part may be limited
from TABLE 10-1010-10.. by the bearing strength at the bolt hole per
Section 10.3.10 . The effective strength of an
User Note: The edge distances in TABLE
10-8 are minimum edge distances based on individual fastener may be taken as the lesser
of the fastener shear strength per Section
standard fabrication practices and 10.3.6 or the bearing strength at the bolt hole
workmanship tolerances. The appropriate per Section 10.3.10 . The strength of the bolt
provisions of Sections 10.3.10 and 10.4 must group is taken as the sum of the effective
be satisfied. strengths of the individual fasteners.
10.3.5 Maximum Spacing
Spacing and Edge Distance.
Distance.
10.3.7 Combined Tension
Tension and Shear in
The maximum distance from the center of any bolt Bearing-Type Connections. The design tensile
to the nearest edge of par
parts
ts in contact shall be 12 strength of a bolt subjected to combined tension
times the thickness of the connected part under and shear shall be determined according to the
consideration, but shall not exceed 150 mm. The limit states of tension and shear rupture as
longitudinal spacing of fasteners between follows:
elements consisting of a plate and a shape or two
plates in continuous contact shall be as follows: ′
(10-14)
(a) For painted members or unpainted members not
subject to corrosion,
corrosion, the spacing shall not where  = 0.75
SBC 306-CR-18 107
F
F nntt = nominal tensile stress modified to include  = 0.30
 = 1.3    ≤ 
the effects of shear stress, MPa For Class B surfaces (unpainted blast-
′
cleaned steel surfaces or surfaces with Class
(10-15) B coatings on blast-cleaned steel)
Fnt = nominal tensile stress from TABLE 10-7,

MPa
 = 0.50
Du  1.13, a multiplier that reflects the ratio
Fnv = nominal shear stress from TABLE 10-7, of the mean installed bolt pretension to
MPa the specified minimum bolt pretension.
The use of other values may be approved
frv = required shear stress using LR
LRFD
FD load by the engineer of record.
combinations, MPa
Tb  minimum fastener tension given in
The design shear stress of the fastener shall equal TABLE 10-6,
10-6, kN
or exceed the required shear stress, frv.
hf  factor for fillers, determined as follows:
User Note: Note that when the required
required stress, Where there are no fillers or where bolts have
f, in either shear or tension, is less than or equal
 = 1.0
been added to distribute loads in the filler
to 30% of the corresponding design stress, the
effects of combined stress need not be ℎ
investigated. Also note that Eq. (10-15
(10-15)) can be Where bolts have not been added to distribute
rewritten so as to find a nominal shear stress,
F
F nv
nv, as a function of the required tensile stress
stress,, the load in the filler:
 = 1.0
ft. (a) For one filler between connected parts
ℎ
10.3.8 High-Strength Bolts in Slip-Critical (b) For two or more fillers between
Connections. Slip-critical connections shall be connected parts
designed to prevent slip and for the limit states of
bearing-type connections. When slip-critical bolts
pass through fillers, all surfaces subject to slip sh
shall
all
ℎ = 0.85
be prepared to achieve design slip resistance. ns  number of slip planes required to permit
the connection to slip
The design slip resistance for the limit state of slip
shall be determined as follows: 10.3.9 Combined Tension
Tension and Shear in Slip-
 =     
ℎ
(a) For standard size and short-slotted holes
(10-16)
Critical Connections. When a slip-critical
connection is subjected to an applied tension that
reduces the net clamping force, the desdesign
ign slip
perpendicular to the direction of the load
(e)
 = 1.00
(b) For oversized and short-slotted holes parallel to
resistance per bolt, from Section 10.3.8 , shall be
 = 11⁄  
multiplied by the factor
factor,, ksc, as follows:
(10-17)
(f)  = 0.85
the direction of the load where
Tu  required tension force, kN
(g)
where
 = 0.70
(c) For long-slotted holes
nb  number of bolts carrying the applied
tension
10.3.10 Bearing Stren gth at Bolt Holes. The
Strength
μ  mean slip coefficient for Class A or B surfaces, strength,, Rn at bolt holes shall be
design bearing strength
as applicable, and determined as follows, or as determined for the limit state of bearing as
established by tests: follows:
For Class A surfaces (unpainted clean mill
scale steel surfaces or surfaces with Class A
coatings on blast-cleaned steel or hotdipped
galvanized and roughened surfaces)  = 0.75
The nominal bearing strength of the connected
material, Rn, is determined as follows:
SBC 306-CR-18 108
(a) For a bolt in a connection with standard, 10.3.12 Tension Fasteners. When bolts or other
oversized and short-slotted holes, independent fasteners in tension are attached to an unstiffened
of the direction of loading, or a long-slotted box or HSS wall, the strength of the wall shall be
hole with the slot
slot parallel to the direction of the determined by rational analysis.
bearing force
10.4—Affected Elements of Members
10.4—
When deformation at the bolt hole at service and Connecting Elements
load is a design consideration
 = 1.2    ≤ 2.4    (10-18)

When deformation at the bolt hole at service
load is not a design consideration
This section applies to elements of members at
connections and connecting
plates, gussets,
connecting elemen
gussets, angles and br
elements,
brackets.
ackets.
ts, such as
 = 1.5    ≤ 3.0    (10-19)

(b) For a bolt in a connection with long-slotted
10.4.1 Strength of Elements in Tensi
design strength,
on. The
Tension.
strength, Rn , of affected and connecting
elements loaded in tension shall be the lower value
obtained according to the limit states of tensile
holes with the slot perpendicular to the g and tensile rupture.
yielding
yieldin rupture.
 = 1.0    ≤ 2.0   
direction of force
(c) For connections made using bolts that pass

(10-20)
 ==0.90
(a) For tensile yielding of connecting elements
(10-21)
completely through an unstiffened box
member or HSS, see Section 10.7 and Eq. (b) For tensile rupture of connecting elements
(10-27
(10-27);
); (10-22)
where
Fu = specified minimum tensile strength of the
connected material, MPa
where  = 0.75
d = nominal bolt diameter, mm
lc = clear distance, in the direction of the  ≤ 0.0.8585
4.3,, mm2; for bolted splice plates,
4.3
.
 =
Ae  effective net area as defined in Section
force, between the edge of the hole and

the edge of the adjacent hole or edge of User Note: The effective net area of the
the material, mm connection plate may be limited due to stress
distribution as calculated by methods such as the
t = thickness of connected material, mm Whitmore section.
For connections, the bearing resistance shall be
taken as the sum of the bearing resistances of the 10.4.2 Strength of Elements in Shear. The
individual bolts. design shear strength of affected and connecting
Bearing strength shall be checked for both bearing- elements in shear sshall
hall be the lower value obtained
according to the limit states of shear yielding and
type and slip-critical connections
connections. The use of shear rupture:
oversized holes and short- and long-slotted holes
parallel to the line of force is restricted to slip-
critical connections per Section 10.3.2 .  = =0.61.000
(a) For shear yielding of the element:
(10-23)
User Note: The effective strength of an

individual fastener is the lesser of the fastener where
shear strength per Section 10.3.6 or the Agv  gross area subject to shear, mm2
bearing strength at the bolt hole per Section
10.3.10 . The strength of the bolt group is the
sum of the effective strengths of the individual
fasteners.
 = =0.0.6060.075
(b) For shear rupture of the element:
(10-24)
10.3.11 Special Fasteners. The nominal strength where

of special fasteners other than the bolts presented in Anv  net area subject to shear, mm2
TABLE 10-7 shall be verified by tests.
SBC 306-CR-18 109
10.4.3 Block Shear Strength. The design 10.5.1.2 Thick Fillers. When the thickness
strength for the limit state of block shear rupture of the fillers is adequate to transfer the applied
along a shear failure path or paths and a force between the connected parts, the filler shall
perpendicular tension failure path
path shall be taken as extend beyond the edges of the outside connected
 = 0.60   ≤ (10-25)
base metal.
metal. The welds joining the outside connected
base metal to the filler shall be sufficient to
transmit the force to the filler and the area
0.60=0.7575
where
Ant  net area subject to tension, mm2
subjected to to
be adequate theavoid
applied force in the
overstressing the filler
filler.shall
welds joining the filler to the inside connected
base metal shall be adequate to transmit the
The
applied force.
Where the tension stress is uniform, Ubs  1; where 10.5.2 Fillers in Bolted Connections. When a
the tension stress is nonuniform, Ubs  0.5. bolt that carries load passes through fillers that are
equal to or less than 6 mm thick, the shea
shearr strength
User Note: Typical cases where Ubs should be shall be used without reduction. When a bolt that
taken equal to 0.5 are illustrated in the carries load passes through fillers that are greater
Commentary. than 6 mm thick, one of the following requirements
shall apply:
10.4.4 Strength of Elements
Elements in Compression.
Compression. (a) The shear strength of the bolts shall be
The design strength of connecting elements in multiplied by the factor
the limit states of yielding and but not less than 0.85, where t is the total
compression
buckling
(a) When
shall for
be determined
⁄=≤25 as follows: thickness of the fillers; mm
10.0154
154  6 6
(b) The fillers shall be extended beyond the joint
and the filler extension shall be secured with
(b) When
⁄= >0.9250 (10-26)
, the provisions of Chapter 5

enough bolts to uniformly distribute the total
force in the connected element over over the
combined cross section of the connected
apply. element and the fillers;
10.4.5 Strength of Elements in Flexure. The (c) The size of the joint shall be increased to
design flexural strength of affected elements shall be accommodate a number of bolts that is
the lower value obtained according to the limit equivalent to the total number required in (b)
states of flexural yieldin
yielding, buckling, flexural
g, local buckling, above; or
lateral- torsional buckling and flexural rupture. (d) The joint shall be designed to prevent slip in
10.5—
10.5—Fillers accordance with Section 10.3.8 using either
10.5.1 Fille
Fillers
rs in Welded
Connecti ons.
Connections. Class B surfaces or Class A surfaces with turn-
of-nut tightening.
Whenever it is necessary to use fillers in joints
required to transfer applied force, the fillers and the 10.6—
10.6—Splices
connecting welds shall conform to the requirements Groove-welded splices in plate girders
girders and beams
of Section 10.5.1.1 or Section 10.5.1.2 as shall develop the nominal strength of the smaller
applicable. spliced section. Other types of splices in cross
10.5.1.1 Thin Fillers. Fillers less than 6 sections of plate girders and beams shall develop
mm thick shall not be used to transfer stress. When the strength required by the forces at the point of
the thickness of the fillers is less than 6 mm, or the splice.
when the thickness of the filler is 6 mm or greater 10.7
10.7—
—Bearing Strength
but not adequate to transfer the applied force
between the connected parts, the filler shall
shall be kept The design bearing strength, Rn, surfaces in
flush with the edge of the outside connected part, contact shall be determined for the limit state of
bearing (local compre

compressive
and the size
required sizeofbytheanweld
of the filler.
shallequal
amount be increased over the
to the thickness
 = 0.75
ssive yielding) as follows:
SBC 306-CR-18 110
CHAPTER 10 DESIGN OF CONNECTIONS

—
The nominal bearing strength, Rn, shall be f c = specified compressive strength of

determined as follows: concrete, MPa
(a) For finished surfaces, pins in reamed, drilled,
finished 10.9—
10.9—Anchor Rods and Embedments
or bored holes, and ends of fitted bearing
stiffenerss
stiffener Anchor rods shall be designed to provide the
required resistance to loads on the completed
(10-27) structure at the base of columns including the net
where
Fy
 = 1.8
Apb  projected area in bearing, mm2
 specified minimum yield stress, MPa

tensile components of any bending moment that
may result from load combinations stipulated in
Section 2.2
2.2.. The anchor rods shall be designed in
accordance with the requirements for threaded parts
in TABLE 10-7.
10-7.
(b) For expansion rollers and rockers
Design of column bases and anchor rods for the
When d  635 mm transfer of forces to the concrete foundation
 = 1.2 90 90  ⁄20
When d > 635 mm
(10-28)
including bearing against the concrete elements
shall satisfy the requirements of SBC 304 or ACI
349..
349
 = 30.2  90  √⁄20
where
(10-29) User Note: When columns are required to resist
a horizontal force at the base plate, bearing
against the concrete elements should be
d = diameter, mm considered.
lb  length of bearing, mm
When anchor rods are used to resist horizontal
forces, hole size, anchor rod setting tolerance, and
the horizontal movement of the column shall be
10.8—Column Bases and Bearing on
10.8— considered in the design.
Concrete
Larger oversized holes and slotted holes are
Proper provision shall be made to transfer the permitted in base plates when adequate bearing is
column loads and moments to the footings and provided for the nut by using ASTM F844 washers
foundations. or plate washers to bridge the hole.
In the absence of code regulations, the design
strength, cPp, for the limit state of
bearing strength, User The permitted hole sizes,
Note:
concrete crushing are permitted to be taken as corresponding washer dimensions and nuts are
follows: given in the AISC Steel Construction Manual,
AISC (2005b) and ASTM F1554.
follows:
 = 0.65
The nominal bearing strength, Pp, is determined as
10.10—Flanges and Webs With
10.10—
Concentrated Forces
(a) On the full area of a concrete support:
 = 0.85  ′
(10-30) This section applies to single- and double-
concentrated forces applied normal to the flange(s)
(b) On less than the full area of a concrete support:
 = 0.85/ ≤ 1.7
where
′ ′ (10-31)
of wide flange sections and similar built-up shapes.
A single-concentrated
single-concentrated force can be either tensile or
compressive. Double-concentrated forces are one
tensile and one compressive and form a couple on
A1 = area of stee
steell concentrically bear
bearing
ing on a the same side of the loaded member.
concrete support, mm2 When the required strength exceeds the design
A2 = maximum area of the portion of the strength as determined for the limit states listed in
supporting surface that is geometrically this section, stiffener
stiffenerss and/or doublers shall be
similar to and concentric with the provided and shall be sized for the difference
2 between the required strength and the design
loaded area, mm
SBC 306-CR-18 111
CHAPTER 10 DESIGN OF CONNECTIONS

—
strength for the applicable limit state. Stiffeners (b)When the concentrated force to be resisted is
shall also meet the design requirements in applied at a distance from the member end that is
Section 10.10.8 . Doublers shall also meet the less than or equal to the depth of the member, d.
design requirement in Section 10.10.9 .
 =   2.5 +  
2.5 (10-34)
User Note:
See Appendix E.3 for where
requirements for the ends of cantilever
F  specified minimum yield stress of the
yw
members. web material, MPa
Stiffeners are required at unframed ends of beams k  distance from outer face of the flange to
in accordance with the requirements of Section the web toe of the fillet, mm
10.10.7 .
lb  length of bearing (not less than k for end
10.10.1 Flange Local Bending. This section beam reactions), mm
applies to tensile single-c
single-concentra
oncentrated forces and the
ted forces
tensile component of double-concentrated forces. tw  thickness of web, mm
strength, Rn, for the limit state of

The design strength, When required, a pair of transverse stiffeners or a
flange local bending shall be determined as doubler plate shall be provided.
follows: 10.10.3 Web Local Crippling.
Cripplin g. This section
 = 6.25  (10-32) applies to compressive single-c
single-concentr
oncentrated
ated forces
forces
 = 0.90 or the compressive component of double-
where concentrated forces.

The design strength for the limit state of web local
Fyf  specified minimum yield stress of the crippling shall be determined as follows:
flange, MPa
 = 0.75
tf  thickness of the loaded flange, mm
The nominal strength, Rn, shall be determined as
If the length of loading across the member flange is follows:
less than 0.15bf, where bf is the member flange
(a) When the concentrated compressive force to be
width, Eq. (10-32)
(10-32) need not be checked. resisted is applied at a distance from the
When the concentrated force to be resisted is member end that is greater than or equal to d/ 2:
applied at a distance from the member end that is
less than 10tf, Rn shall be reduced by 50%.
  .
 = 0.80 1  3     
  (10-35)
When required, a pair of transverse stiffeners shall (b) When the concentrated compressive force to be
be provided resisted is applied at than
a distance from the
10.10.2 Web Local Yielding. This section applies
to single-concentrated forces and both components
of double-concentr
double-concentrated
ated forces.
member end
For ⁄ ≤ 0.2   .  
that is less d/ 2:

yielding shall be determined as follows:
 = 0.40 1  3     (10-36)
 = 1.00 ⁄ > 0.2  .  

For
follows:
 = 0.40 11   0.2    (10-37)
(a) When the concentrated force to be resisted is where
applied at a distance from the member end that
d  full nominal depth of the section, mm
is greater than the depth of the member, d,
When required, a transverse stiffener, a pair of
 =   5 +   (10-33) transverse stiffeners, or a doubler plate extending
at least one-half the depth of the web shall be
provided.
SBC 306-CR-18 112
CHAPTER 10 —DESIGN OF CONNECTIONS
Sideswa y Buckling. This section

10.10.4 Web Sidesway Mu  required flexural strength using LRF D
applies only to compressive single-
single-concent
concentrated
rated load combinations, N-mm
forcess applied to members where relative lateral
force
movement between the loaded compression flange bf  width of flange, mm
and the tension flange is not restrained at the point h  clear distance between flanges less the
of application of the concentrated force. fillet or corner radius for rolled shapes;
The design strength of the web for the limit state distance between adjacent lines of
of sidesway buckling
buckling shall be determined as fasteners or the clear distance between
follows: flanges when welds are used for built-up
shapes, mm
  0.85
The nominal strength, Rn, shall be determined as User Note: For determination of adequate
follows: E..
restraint, refer to Appendix E
(a) If the compression flange is restrained against 10.10.5 Web Compression Buckling. This
rotation
  ⁄⁄⁄ /≤ 2.3
When ℎ
section applies to a pair of compressive single-
concentrated forces or the compressive components
in a pair of double-concentrated forces, applied at
 =    10.4/ 
h
h
(10-38)
both flanges of a member at the same location.
buckling shall be determined as follows:
When
 ⁄⁄⁄  > 2.3
ℎ
of web sidesway buckling , the limit state
When the required strength of the web exceeds the
design strength, local lateral bracing shall be
 = 24  
 = 0.90
ℎ
(10-40)
provided at the tension flange or either a pair of When the pair of concentrated compressive forces
transverse stiffeners or a doubler plate shall be to be resisted is applied at a distance from the
provided. member end that is less than d/ 2, Rn shall be
reduced by 50%.
(b) If the compression flange is not restrained
against rotation When required, a single transverse stiffener, a pair
 ⁄⁄⁄/  ≤ 1.7
When ℎ
of transverse stiffeners, or a doubler plate extending
the full depth of the web shall be provided.
    
h
h
(10-39)
10.10.6 Web Panel Zone Shear. This section
applies to double-concentrated forces applied to
one or both flanges of a member at the same
 =  ⁄0.⁄4⁄/>1.7
When ℎ , the limit state
of web sidesway buckling does not apply.
When the required strength of the web exceeds the
location.
The design strength of the web panel zone for the
limit state of shear yielding shall be determined as
design strength, local lateral bracing shall be follows:
provided at both flanges at the point of application  = 0.90
of the concentrated forces.
(10-38)) and (10-39
In Eq. (10-38 (10-39),
), the following
follows:
definitions apply:
(a) When the effect of panel-zone deformation on
 = 6.62 × 10 MPa when Mu  My at the
frame stability is not considered in the analysis:
location of the force
 3.31 × 10 MPa when Mu
location of the force
 My at the
For  ≤ 0.4 (10-41)
Lb  largest laterally unbraced length along
either flange at the point of load, mm
(b) For
>=0.0.0.46060
SBC 306-CR-18 113
 = 0.60 1.4 

(c) When frame stability, including plastic panel-
(10-42)
between the required strength and design strength.
The stiffener to web welds shall be sized to transfer
to the web the algebraic difference in tensile force
zone deformation, is considered in the analysis: at the ends of the stiffe
stiffener.
ner.
 ≤ 0.75
For Stiffeners required to resist compressive
concentrated forces shall be designed in
accordance with the requirements in Section
 = 0.60>0.75 1   
For
(10-43) 10.4.4 and shall either bear on or be welded to
the loaded flange and welded to the web. The welds
 = 0.60 11   1.9 .  (10-44)

to the flange shall be sized for the differedifference
between the required strength and the applicable
limit state strength. The weld to the web shall be
nce
In Eq. (10-41)
(10-41) through (10-44),
(10-44), the following sized to transfer to the web the algebraic difference
definitions apply: in compression force at the ends of the stiffener. For
10.7..
fitted bearing stiffeners, see Section 10.7
Ag  gross cross-sectional area of member,
mm2 Transverse full depth bearing stiffeners for
compressive forces applied to a beam or plate
bcf  width of column flange, mm girder flange(s) shall be designed as axially
db  depth of beam, mm compressed members (columns) in accordance
with the requirements of Section 5.6.2 and
dc  depth of column, mm Section 10.4.4 . The member properties shall be
Fy  specified minimum yield stress of the determined using an effective length of 0.75h and a
cross section composed of two stiffener
stiffeners,
s, and a strip
column web, MPa of the web having a width of 25tw at interior
Pc  Py , N stiffeners and 12tw at the ends of members. The
weld connecting full depth bearing stiffeners to the
Pr  required axial strength using load web shall be sized to transmit the difference in
combinations, N compressive force at each of the stiffener
stiffenerss to the
Py  Fy Ag, axial yield strength of the column, web.
N Transverse and diagonal stiffeners shall comply
tcf  thickness of column flange, mm with the following additional requirements:
1. The width of each stiffener plus one-half
tw  thickness of column web, mm
the thickness of the column web shall not
When required, doubler plate(s) or a pair of be less than one-third of the flange or
diagonal stiffeners moment connection plate width delivering
shall
boundaries of the rigid be provided
connection within
whose webs the
lie the concentrated force.
in a common plane. 2. The thickness of a stiffener shall not be
See Section 10.10.9 for doubler plate design less than one-half the thickness of the
requirements. flange or moment connection plate
delivering the concentrated load, nor less
10.10.7 Unframed Ends of Beams and Girders.
than the width divided by 16.
At unframed ends of beams and girde rs not
girders
otherwise restrained against rotation about their 3. Transverse stiffeners shall extend a
longitudinal axes, a pair of transverse stiffeners, minimum of one-half the depth of the
extending the full depth of the web, shall be member except as required in Section
provided. 10.10.5 and Section 10.10.7 .
10.10.8 Additiona
Additionall Stiffener
Sti ffener Requirements for
Concentrated Forces. Stiffeners required to resist
10.10.9 Additional Doubler Plate Requirements
tensile concentrated force
forcess shall be designed in
accordance with the requirements of Section 10.4.1 for Concentrated Forces. Doubler plates required
for compression strength shall be designed in
and welded to the loaded flange and the web. The
accordance with the requirements of Chapter 55..
requirements
welds to the flange shall be sized for the difference
SBC 306-CR-18 114
Doubler plates required for tensile strength shall be

designed in accordance with the requirements of
4.
Chapter 4.
Doubler plates required for shear strength (see
Section 10.10.6 ) shall be designed in accordance
with the provisions of Chapter 7.
7.
Doubler
additionalplates shall comply with the following
requirements:
1. The thickness and extent of the doubler
plate shall provide the additional material
necessary to equal or exceed the strength
requirements.
2. The doubler plate shall be welded to
develop the proportion of the total force
transmitted to the doubler plate.
SBC 306-CR-18 115
TABLE 10-1 : EFFECTIVE THROAT OF PARTIAL-JOINT-PENETRATION

PARTIAL-JOINT-PENETRATION GROOVE WELDS
Welding
Position
F (flat), Groove Type (AWS D1.1/D1.1M
D1.1/D1.1M,,
Welding Process H (horizontal), Figure 3.3) Effective Throat
V (vertical),
OH (overhead)
Shielded metal arc
(SMAW) J or U groove
All
Gas metal arc (GMAW) 60° V depth of groove
Flux cored arc (FCAW)
Submerged arc (SAW) F J or U groove 60° bevel or V
Gas metal arc (GMAW)
F, H 45° bevel depth of groove
Shielded metal arc
All
(SMAW) depth of groove minus 3
45° bevel
Gas metal arc (GMAW) mm
V, OH
TABLE 10-2 : EFFECTIVE WELD THROATS OF FLARE GROOVE WELDS

Welding Process Flare Bevel Groove [a] Flare V-Groove
GMAW and FCAW-G 5/8 R 3/4 R
SMAW and FCAW-S 5/16 R 5/8 R
SAW 5/16 R 1/2 R
[a]
For flare bevel groove with R < 10 mm, use only reinforcing fillet weld on filled flush joint.
General note: R = radius of joint surface (can be assumed to be 2t for HSS), mm
TABLE 10-3 : MINIMUM EFFECTIVE THROAT OF PARTIAL-JOINT-PENETRATION

PARTIAL-JOINT-PENETRATION GROOVE
WELDS
Material Thickness of MinimumEffective

Thinner Part Joined, mm Throat, [a] mm
To 6 inclusive 3
Over13
Over 6 to
to13
19 56
Over 19 to 38 8
Over 38 to 57 10
Over 57 to 150 13
Over 150 16
[a]
See TABLE 10-1.
10-1.
TABLE 10-4 : MINIMUM SIZE OF FILLET WELDS
Material Thickness of Minimum Size of

Thinner Part Joined, mm Fillet Weld, [a] mm
To 6 inclusive 3
Over 6 to 13 5
Over 13 to 19 6
Over 19 8
[a] Leg dimension of fillet welds. Single pass welds must be used.
Note: See Section 10.2.2.2 for maximum size of fillet welds.
SBC 306-CR-18 116
TABLE 10-5: DESIGN STRENGTH OF WELDED JOINTS, MPA
Nominal
Effective
Load Type and Stress Required Filler
Pertinent Area (A B M
Direction Relative to ϕ (F nBM or Metal Strength
Metal or A we)
Weld Axis F nw) Level [a][b]
mm2
MPa
COMPLETE-JOINT-PENETRATION
COMPLETE-JOINT-PEN ETRATION GROOVE WELDS Matching filler metal shall be
used. For T- and corner joints
Tension Strength of the joint is controlled
with backing left in place, notch
Normal to weld axis by the
t he base metal
tough filler metal is required.
See Section 10.2.6 .
Filler metal with a strength
Compression Strength of the joint is controlled level equal to or one strength
Normal to weld axis by the base metal level less than matching filler
metal is permitted.
Tension or Tension or compression in parts joined parallel to level equal to or less than
compression Parallel a weld need not be considered in design
matching filler metal is
to weld axis of welds joining the parts.
permitted.
Strength of the joint is controlled by the base Matching filler metal shall
Shear
metal be used.[c]
PARTIAL-JOINT-PENETRATION GROOVE WELDS INCLUDING FLARE V-GROOVE AND
FLARE BEVEL GROOVE WELDS
Tension Base ϕ = 0.75 Fu See 10.4
Normal to weld axis Weld ϕ = 0.80 0.60FEXX See 10.2.1.1
Compression Column to
base plate and column Compressive stress need not be considered in design
splices designed per of welds joining the parts.
Section 10.1.4 (1)
Compression Base ϕ = 0.90 Fy See 10.4
Connections of
members designed to Filler metal with a
bear other than Weld ϕ = 0.80 0.60 FEXX See 10.2.1.1 strength level equal
columns as described in to or less than
Section 10.1.4 (2) matching filler metal
Compression Base ϕ = 0.90 F See 10.4 is permitted.
Connections not y
Weld ϕ = 0.80 0.90 FEXX See 10.2.1.1
finished-to-bear
Tension or Tension or compression in parts joined parallel to a
compression Parallel weld need not be considered in design
to weld axis of welds joining the parts.
Base Governed by 10.4
Shear
Weld ϕ = 0.75 0.60 FEXX See 10.2.1.1
SBC 306-CR-18 117
TABLE 10-5: (CONTINUED) DESIGN STRENGTH OF WELDED JOINTS, MP

MPaa
Nominal Effective
Load Type and Stress Area Required Filler
Pertinent
Direction Relative to ϕ (F nBM or (A B M or Metal Strength
Metal
Weld Axis F nw) A we) Level [a][b]
MPa mm2
FILLET WELDS INCLUDING FILLETS IN HOLES AND SLOTS AND SKEWED T –JOINTS
Base Governed by 10.4
Shear
Weld ϕ = 0.75 0.60 FEXX [d] See 10.2.2.1
level equal to or less than
Tension or compression Tension or compression in parts joined parallel to a matching filler metal is
Parallel to weld axis weld need not be considered in design permitted.
of welds joining the parts.
PLUG AND SLOT WELDS
Base Governed by 10.4 Filler metal with a strength
Shear Parallel to faying
surface on the surface level equal to or less than
Weld ϕ = 0.75 0.60 FEXX See 10.2.3.1 matching filler metal is
on the effective area
permitted.
[a] For matching weld metal see AWS D1.1/D1.1M
D1.1/D1.1M,, Section 3.3.
[b] Filler metal with a strength level one strength level greater than matching is permitted.
[c] Filler metals with a strength level less than matching may be used for groove welds between the webs and flanges of built-up
sections transferring shear loads, or in applications where high restraint is a concern. In these applications, the weld joint shall
be detailed and the weld shall be designed using the thickness of the material as the effective throat, where ϕ =0.80 and 0.60
FEXX is the nominal strength.
[d] Alternatively, the provisions of Section 10.2.4 a are permitted provided the deformation compatibility of the various weld
elements is considered. Sections 10.2.4 b and 10.2.4 c are special applications of Section 10.2.4 a,a, that provide for deformation
compatibility.
TABLE 10-6 : MINIMUM BOLT PRETENSION, KN*
Group A Group B
Bolt Size, mm
( e.g., A325M Bolts) ( e.g., A490M Bolts)
M16 91 114
M20 142 179
M22 176 221
M24 205 257
M27 267 334
M30
M36 326
475 408
595
* Equal to 0.70 times the minimum tensile strength of bolts, rounded off to nearest kN, as specified in ASTM
specifications for A325M and A490M bolts with UNC threads.
SBC 306-CR-18 118
TABLE 10-7 : NOMINAL STRENGTH OF FASTENERS AND THREADED PARTS , MPa
Nominal Tensile
Nominal Shear Strength in Bearing-
Description of Fasteners Strength,
Type Connections, F nv, MPa [b]
F nt, MPa [a]
A307 bolts 310 188 [c] [d]
Group A (e.g., A325) bolts, when threads are not
620 372
excluded from shear planes
Group A (e.g., A325) bolts, when threads are
620 457
Group B (e.g., A490) bolts, when threads are not
780 457
Group B (e.g., A490) bolts, when threads are
780 579
Threaded parts meeting the requirements of Section
1.3.4 , when threads are not excluded from shear 0.75Fu 0.450Fu
planes
Threaded parts meeting the requirements of Section
0.75Fu 0.563Fu
1.3.4 , when threads are excluded from shear planes
[a] For high-strength bolts subject to tensile fatigue loading, see Appendix C
C..
[b] For end loaded connections with a fastener pattern length greater than 965 mm, Fnv shall be reduced to 83.3% of the tabulated
values. Fastener pattern length is the maximum distance parallel to the line of force between the centerline of the bolts
[c] Forconnecting two
A307 bolts theparts with one
tabulated faying
values shallsurface.
be reduced by 1% for each 2 mm over 5 diameters of length in the grip.
[d] Threads permitted in shear planes.
TABLE 10-8 : NOMINAL HOLE DIMENSIONS, mm
Bolt Diameter, mm
Bolt Diameter, mm Standard Oversize Short-Slot (Width x Long-Slot
(Dia.) (Dia.) Length) (Width x Length)
M16 18 20 18 x 22 18 x 40
M20 22 24 22 x 26 22 x 50
M22 24 28 24 x 30 24 x 55
M24 27 [a]
30 27 x 32 27 x 60
M27 30 35 30 x 37 30 x 67
M30 33 38 33 x 40 33 x 75
≥ M36 d+3 d+8 (d + 3) x (d + 10) (d + 3) x 2.5d
[a] Clearance provided allows the use of a 25 mm bolt if desirable.
TABLE 10-9 : MINIMUM EDGE DISTANCE [a] FROM CENTER OF STANDARD HOLE [b] TO
EDGE OF CONNECTED PART, mm
Bolt Diameter, mm Minimum Edge Distance

16 22
20 26
22 28
24 30
27 34
30 38
36 46
Over 36 1.25d
[a] If necessary, lesser edge distances are permitted provided the appropriate provisions from Sections 10.3.10 and 10.4 are
satisfied, but edge distances less than one bolt diameter are not permitted without approval from the engineer of record.
[b] For oversized or slotted holes, see TABLE 10-10
SBC 306-CR-18 119
TABLE 10-10 : VALUES OF EDGE DISTANCE INCREMENT C2, mm
Slotted Holes
Nominal Diameter of Fastener, Long Axis Perpendicular to
Oversized Holes Long Axis Parallel to
mm Edge
Edge
Short Slots Long Slots[a]
≤22 2 3
24 3 3 0.75d 0
≥ 27 3 5
[a]
When length of slot is less than maximum allowable (see TABLE 10-8)
10-8), C2 is permitted to be reduced by one-half
the difference between the maximum and actual slot lengths.
SBC 306-CR-18 120
CHAPTER 10
— DESIGN OF CONNECTIONS

SBC 306-CR-18 121
CHAPTER 11 — DESIGN OF HSS AND BOX MEMBER CONNECTIONS
CHAPTER 11
11—DESIGN
—DESIGN OF HSS AND
AND BOX MEMBER
CONNECTIONS
Bp  width of plate, measured 90 to the

This chapter addresses connections to HSS
members and box sections of uniform wall plane of the connection, mm
thickness. D  outside diameter of round HSS, mm
User Note: Connection strength is often Fy  specified minimum yield stress of HSS
governed by the size of HSS members, member material, MPa
especially the wall thickness of truss chords, and Fyp  specified minimum yield stress of plate
this must be considered in the initial design. material, MPa
The chapter is organized as follows: Fu  specified minimum tensile strength of
HSS member material, MPa
11.1 —Concentrated Forces on HSS
H  overall height of rectangular HSS
11.2 —HSS-to-HSS Truss Connections
11.3 —HSS-to-HSS Moment Connections connection, mm
11.4 —Welds of Plates and Branches to S member,, mm3
 elastic section modulus of member
Rectangular HSS
lb  bearing length of the load, measured
parallel to the axis of the HSS member
(or measured across the width of the HSS
User Note: in the case of loaded cap plates), mm
See also Chapter 10 for additional t  design wall thickness of HSS member,
requirements for bolting to HSS. See mm
Section 10.3.10 (c) for through-bolts.
tp  thickness of plate, mm
Connection parameters must be within the
limits of applicability. Limit states
states need only 11.1.2 Round HSS.
be checked when connection geometry or The design strength of connections with
loading is within
the description thelimit
of the parameters
state. given in concentrated
11-2 shall be loads
taken and withininthe
as shown limits 11-1
TABLE in TABLE
11-1..
11.1.3 Rectangular HSS.
11.1
11.1—
—Concentrated Forces on HSS The design strength of connections with
concentrated loads and within the limits in TABLE
strength, Rn of connections shall be
The design strength, 11-4 shall be taken as the lowest value of the
determined in accordance with the provisions of 11-3.. The
applicable limit states shown in TABLE 11-3
this chapter and the provisions of Section 2.3.5 . limits of applicability in TABLE 11-2 stem
11.1.1 Definitions of Parameters primarily from limitations on tests conducted to
date.
Ag  gross cross-sectional area of member,
11.2—
11.2—HSS-to-HSS Truss Connections
mm2
strength, Pn, of connections shall be
The design strength,
B  overall width of rectangular HSS
determined in accordance with the provisions of
member,
the mm90° to the plane of
measured
connection, this chapter and the provisions of Section 2.3.5 .
HSS-to-HSS truss connections are defined as
connections that consist of one or more branch
SBC 306-CR-18 122
members that are directly welded to a continuous B = overall width of rectangular HSS main
chord that passes through the connection and shall member, measured 90° to the plane of the
be classified as follows:
follows: connection, mm
(a) When the punching load , Pr sin, in a branch Bb = overall width of rectangular HSS branch
member is equilibrated by beam shear in the member, measured 90° to the plane of the
chord member, the connection shall be connection, mm
perpendicular T-connection
classified as a to when
the chord, and the branch is
a Y-connection D = outside diameter of round HSS main
member, mm
otherwise.
Db = outside diameter of round HSS branch
(b) When the punching load, Pr sin, in a branch
member, mm
member is essentially equilibrated (within
20%) by loads in other branch member(s) on Fy = specified minimum yield stress of HSS
the same side of the connection, the connection main member material, MPa
shall be classified as a K-connecti on. The
K-connection Fyb = specified minimum yield stress of HSS
relevant gap is between the primary branch branch member material, MPa
members whose loads equilibrate. An N-
connection can be considered as a type of K- Fu = sp
specified
ecified minimum tensile sstrength
trength of
connection. HSS material, MPa
User Note: A K-connection with one branch

H = overall height of rectangular HSS main
perpendicular to the chord is often called an member, measured in the plane of the
N-connection.
N-connection connection, mm
Hb = overall height of rectangular HSS
(c) When the punching load, Pr sin, is transmitted branch member, measured in the plane of
through the chord member and is equilibrated the connection, mm
by branch member(s) on the opposite side, the
connection shall be classified as a cross- Ov =
 ∗ 100 %
connection.
(d) When a connection has more than two primary S = elastic section modulus of member, mm3
branch members, or branch members in more e = eccentricity in a truss connection,
than one plane, the connection shall be positive being away from the branches,
classified as a general or multiplanar mm
connection.
g = gap between toes of branch members in a
When branch members transmit part of their load as gapped K-connection, neglecting the
K-connections and part of their load as T-, Y- or welds, mm
cross-connections,
shall be determinedthe adequacy of the connections
by interpolation on the lb = Hb /sin , mm
proportion of the design strength of each in total. lov = overlap length measured along the
For the purposes of this Code, the centerlines of connecting face of the chord beneath the
branch members and chord members shall lie in a two branches, mm
common plane. Rectangular HSS connections are lp = projected length of the overlapping
further limited to have all members oriented with branch on the chord, mm
walls parallel to the plane. For trusses that are made
with HSS that are connected by welding branch t = design wall thickness of HSS main
members to chord members, eccentricities within member, mm
the limits of applicability are permitted without tb = design wall thickness of HSS branch
consideration of the resulting moments for the member, mm
design of the connection.
β = width ratio; the ratio of branch diameter
11.2.1 Definitions of Parameters to chord diameter = Db /D for round HSS;
Ag = gross cross-sectional area of member, mm 2 the ratio of overall branch width to chord
width = Bb /B for rectangular HSS
SBC 306-CR-18 123
β eff = effective width ratio; the sum of the For the purposes of this Code, the centerlines of the
perimeters of the two branch members in branch member(s) and the chord member shall lie
a K-connection divided by eight times the in a common plane.
chord width
γ = chord slenderness ratio; the ratio of one-
11.3.1 Definitions of Parameters
half the diameter to the wall thickness
= D/2t for round HSS; the ratio of one-half Ag  mm

gross
2 cross-sectional area of member,
the width to wall thickness
= B/2t for rectangular HSS B  overall width of rectangular HSS main
member, measured 90 ° to the plane of
η = load length parameter, applicable only to the connection, mm
rectangular HSS; the ratio of the length of
contact of the branch with the chord in the Bb  overall width of rectangular HSS branch
plane of the connection to the chord width member, measured 90 ° to the plane of
= lb /B the connection, mm
 = acute angle between the branch and D  outside diameter of round HSS main
chord (degrees) member, mm
ζ = gap ratio; the ratio of the gap between the Db  outside diameter of round HSS branch
branches of a gapped K-connection
K-connection to the member, mm
width of the chord = g/B for rectangular
HSS. Fy  specified minimum yield stress of HSS
main member material, MPa
11.2.2 Round HSS. The design strength of HSS-
to-HSS truss connections within the limits in Table Fyb  specified minimum yield stress of HSS
11-6 shall be taken as the lowest value of the branch member material, MPa
11-5..
applicable limit states shown in TABLE 11-5 Fu  specified minimum tensile strength of
11.2.3 Rectangular HSS. The design strength of HSS member material, MPa
HSS-to-HSS truss connections within the limits in
H  overall height of rectangular HSS main
TABLE 11-8 shall be taken as the lowest value of
11-7..
the applicable limit states shown in TABLE 11-7
connection, mm
Hb  overall height of rectangular HSS branch
11.3—
11.3—HSS-to-HSS Moment member, measured in the plane of the
Connections connection, mm
The design strength, Mn, of connections shall be S member,, mm3

 elastic section modulus of member
determined in accordance with the provisions of Zb  Plastic section modulus of branch about
this chapter and the provisions of Section 2.3.5 .
the axis of bending, mm3
HSS-to-HSS moment connections are defined as
t  design wall thickness of HSS main
connections that consist of one or two branch
members that are directly welded to a continuous
member, mm
chord that passes through the connection, with the tb  design wall thickness of HSS branch
branch or branches loaded
loaded by bending moments. member, mm
A connection shall be classified as: β  width ratio
(a) A T-connection when there is one branch and it  Db/D for round HSS; ratio of branch
is perpendicular to the chord and as a Y- diameter to chord diameter
connection when there is one branch but not
perpendicular to the chord.  Bb/B for rectangular HSS; ratio of overall
(b) A cross-connection when there is a branch on branch width to chord width

each (opposite) side of the chord   chord slenderness ratio
SBC 306-CR-18 124
 D/2t for round HSS; ratio of one-half Sip = effective elastic section modulus of welds
the diameter to the wall thickness for in-plane bending (TABLE 11-13 11-13)),
3
mm
 B/2t for rectangular HSS; ratio of one-
half the width to the wall thickness Sop = effective elastic section modulus of welds
for out-of-plane bending (TABLE 11-13
11-13)),
η  load length parameter, applicable only mm 3
to rectangular HSS
 lb/B; the ratio of the length of contact of le = total effective weld length of groove and
fillet welds to rectangular HSS for weld
the branch with the chord in the plane of strength calculations, mm
the connection to the chord width,
where lb=Hb /sin θ tw = smallest effective weld throat around the
perimeter of branch or plate, mm
  acute angle between the branch and
When an overlapped K-connection has been
chord (degrees) designed in accordance with TABLE 11-7 of this
11.3.2 Round HSS. The design strength of chapter, and the branch member component forces
moment connections within the limits of TABLE normal to the chord are 80% “balanced” (i.e., the
11-10 shall be taken as the lowest value of the branch member forces normal to the chord face
applicable limit states shown in TABLE 11-9
11-9.. differ by no more than 20%), the “hidden” weld
under an overlapping branch may be omitted if the
11.3.3 Rectangular HSS. The design strength of
remaining welds to the overlapped branch
moment connections within the limits of TABLE
everywhere develop the full capacity of the
11-12 shalllimit
applicable be states
taken shown
as theinlowest
TABLEvalue of. the
11-11.
11-11 overlapped branch member walls.
The weld checks in TABLE 11-13 are not required
if the welds are capable of developing the full
11.4
11.4—
—Welds of Plates and Branches to strength of the branch member wall along its entire
Rectangular HSS perimeter (or a plate along its entire length).
strength, Rn, Mn and Pn, of
The design strength, User Note: The approach used here to allow
connections shall be determined in accordance down-sizing of welds as
down-sizing assumes
sumes a constant weld
with the provisions of this chapter and the size around the full perimeter of the HSS
provisions of Section 2.3.5 . branch. Special attention is required for equal
The design strength of branch connections shall be width (or near-equal width) connections which
determined for the limit state of nonuniformity of combine partial-joint-penetration gro
groove
ove we
welds
lds
load transfer along the line of weld, due to along the matched edges of the connection, with
differences in relative stiffness of HSS walls in fillet welds generally across the main member
HSS-to-HSS connections and between elements in face.
transverse plate-to-HSS connections, as follows:
  = 
   
−− == 
Rn or   (11-1)
(11-2)
(11-3)
For interaction, see Eq. (11-71
(11-71).
).
(a) For fillet welds
 = 0.75
 = 0.80
(b) For partial-joint-penetration groove welds
where
Fnw = nominal stress of weld metal (Chapter
10)) with no increase in strength due to
10
directionality of load, MPa
SBC 306-CR-18 125
TABLE 11-1 : DESIGN STRENGTHS OF PLATE-TO-ROUND HSS CONNECTIONS
Plate Bending
Connection Type Connection Design Strength
In-Plane Out- of-Plane
Transverse Plate T- and Cross- Limit State: HSS Local Yielding Plate
Connections Axial Load
   =  −.. 
(11-4)
 = 0.5
-
Longitudinal Plate T-, Y- and Cross-

 = 0.90
Limit State: HSS Plastification Plate
  = 5.5 10.25    = 0.8

Connections Axial Load
-
(11-5)
Longitudinal Plate T-Connections  = 0.90

Limit States: Plate Limit States and
HSS Punching Shear Plate Shear
Load
For Rn , see Chapter 10. Additionally,
the following relationship shall be met: - -
 ≤   (11-6)
Cap Plate Connections Limit State: Local Yielding of HSS
 = 25  ≤ 

Axial Load
(11-7)
- -
 = 1.0
FUNCTIONS
= 1.0  0 . 31  
Qf = 1 for HSS (connecting surface) in tension
 = |   | for HSS (connecting surface) in compression (11-8)
 
where Pu and Mu are determined on the side of the joint that has the lower compression stress.
(11-9)
Pu and Mu refer to required strengths in the HSS

SBC 306-CR-18 126
TABLE 11-2: LIMITS OF APPLICABILITY

APPLICABILITY OF TABLE 11-1
Plate load angle:

HSS wall ⁄⁄ ≤≤ 5040
 ≥ 30°
for T-connections under branch plate axial load or bending
slenderness:
⁄ ≤ 0.11⁄
for cross-connections under branch plate axial load or bending
under branch plate shear loading
for cap plate connections in compression
compression
Width ratio:
Material strength:
Ductility:
0.⁄2⁄<≤≤0.⁄0.181≤⁄1.0
Fy ≤ 360 MPa
for transverse branch plate connections
Note: ASTM A500 Grade C is acceptable.
TABLE 11-3 : DESIGN STRENGTHS OF PLATE-TO-RECTANGULAR

PLATE-TO-RECTANGULAR HSS CONNECTIONS

Strength
 = 10⁄  ≤=0.95

Limit State: Local Yielding of Plate, For All 
(11-10)
Limit State: HSS Shear Yielding (Punching),

When
Transverse Plate T- and Cross-Connections, Under
Plate Axial Load
 = 0.60.285 2=1.≤20.095≤  2 2
Limit State: Local Yielding of HSS Sidewalls, When
(11-11)
=
 = 25  (11-12)
 = 1.0
k= outside corner radius of HSS ≥1.5 t
Limit State: Local Crippling of HSS Sidewalls, When
 = 1.6 11   3333=0.75 

 =1.0 and Plate is in Compression, for T-Connections
(11-13)
Limit State: Local Crippling of HSS Sidewalls, When

 =1.0 and Plate is in Compression, for Cross-
Connections
 = 483 3=0.95 (11-14)

SBC 306-CR-18 127
TABLE 11-3 (CONTINUED) DESIGN STRENGTHS OF PLATE-TO-RECTANGULAR HSS

CONNECTIONS

Strength
Longitudinal Plate T-, Y- and Cross- Connections, Under Plate Limit State: HSS Plastification
Axial Load
   = 1 22 

 41    (11-15)
Longitudinal Through Plate T- and

 = 1.00
Limit State: HSS Wall Plastification
Y-Connections, Under Plate Axial Load
2 
   =  22
 
(11-16)
1   41   

 = 1.00
Longitudinal Plate T-Connections, Under Plate Shear Load Limit States: Plate Limit States and HSS
Punching Shear
For Rn , see Chapter 10
Additionally, the following relationship
shall be met:
 ≤   (11-17)
SBC 306-CR-18 128
TABLE 11-3 (CONTINUED) DESIGN STRENGTHS OF PLATE-TO-RECTANGULAR HSS

CONNECTIONS

Cap Plate Connections, under Axial Limit State: Local Yielding of Sidewalls
Load , when
(11-18)
==25 <5  =5≥1.00

, when (11-19)
Limit State: Local Crippling of Sidewalls, When Plate is in

Compression
   . 
 = 1.6 1      
, when 5   <  (11-20)
 = 0.75
FUNCTIONS
Qf = 1 for HSS (connecting surface) in tension
(11-21)
= 1√.31 0.4 ⁄ ≤ 1.0 for HSS (connecting surface)

in compression, for transverse plate connections
for HSS (connecting surface) in
compression, for longitudinal plate and (11-22)
longitudinal through plate connections
 = |  |
where Pu and Mu are determined on the side of the joint that has the lower compression stress.
(11-23)
Pu and Mu refer to required strengths in the HSS
10
 =
⁄
≤  (11-24)
k = outside corner radious of HSS ≥ 1.5t
1.5t

Plate load angle:  ≥ 30°

HSS wall
B /t or H /t  35 for loaded wall, for transverse branch plate connections
slenderness:
B /t or H /t  40 for loaded wall, for longitudinal branch plate and through plate
 3 3⁄  3 3⁄ ≤ 1.40⁄

or
connections
for loaded wall, for branch plate shear
Width ratio:
Material strength:
0.2≤5 ≤360⁄ ≤ 1.0
MPa
loading
for transverse branch plate connections
Ductility: Note: ASTM A500 Grade C is acceptable.

 ≤ 360
SBC 306-CR-18 129
TABLE 11-5 : DESIGN STRENGTHS OF ROUND HSS-TO-HSS TRUSS CONNECTIONS
Connection Type Connection Design Axial Strength
General Check For T-, Y-, Cross- and K-

Connections With Gap, When  = 0.6 1
Limit State: Shear Yielding (Punching)
(11-25)
⁄ <  2 2

T- and Y-Connection
Y-Connectionss
 =
2  0.
 9 5
Limit State: Chord Plastification
   = 3.3.115.6 . (11-26)
 = 0.90
Cross-Connections Limit State: Chord Plastification
   =  10.5.7811  (11-27)
 = 0.90
K-Connections With Gap or Overlap
 
 
=  2.011.33    
ℎ
(11-28)
ℎ ℎ
  ==0.90 

 
(11-29)
SBC 306-CR-18 130
TABLE 11-5 (continued): Design Strengths of Round HSS-to-HSS Truss Connections
FUNCTIONS
Qf = 1 for chord (connecting surface) in tension (11-30)
= 1.
1.00 − 0.31 +   for HSS (connecting surface) in
0.3 (11-31)
compression
 =     (11-32)

where Pu and Mu are determined on the side of the joint that has the lower compression stress. Pu and Mu
refer to required strengths in the HSS
0. 0 24.
 =  1  0.5  1.331
.  (11-33)
[a] Note that exp(x) is equal to ex, where e = 2.71828 is the base of the natural logarithm.
Table 11-6: Limits of Applicability of TABLE 11-5
Joint eccentricity:
Branch angle:
0.55 ≤ ⁄ ≤ 0.25
 ≥ 30°
for K-connections
Chord wall slenderness:

Branch wall slenderness: ⁄⁄≤ ≤≤4050500.05 ⁄
for T-, Y- and K-connections
for cross-connections Branch wall
for compression branch
Width ratio: 0.0.24 <≤ ⁄⁄ ≤≤ 1.1.00

for compression branch
for T-, Y-, cross- and overlapped K-connections
Gap: 25%≥ ≤  ≤100% 

for gapped K-connections
for gapped K-connections
Overlap:
Branch thickness: ≤ 360≤  
for overlapped K-connections
for branches in overlapped K-connections
Material strength:
Ductility: ⁄ ⁄≤ 0.8
and
and
SBC 306-CR-18 131
TABLE 11-7 : DESIGN STRENGTHS OF RECTANGULAR HSS-TO-HSS TRUSS CONNECTIONS
Connection Type
T-, Y- and Cross-Connections
Connection Design Axial Strength
Limit State: Chord Wall Plastification, When
     
 ≤ 0.
(11-34)
8 5
  =  ≤ 1−−1⁄=1.0−0⁄< 10 0.85 <
Limit State: Shear Yielding (Punching), When
   = 0.62= 0.295

or
(11-35)
 =
Limit State: Local Yielding of Chord Sidewalls,
   = 25=1.00
When
(11-36)
1. 0
Case for checking limit state of shear of
chord side walls
 = 1.0
Limit State: Local Crippling of Chord Sidewalls, When
and Branch is in Compression, for T- or Y-
Connections
   = 1.6 11 −=0.75

Limit State: Local Crippling of Chord Sidewalls, When
(11-37)
 = 1.0 and Branches are in Compression, for Cross-

Connections
48 
   =  3 3  (11-38)
 = 0.90
Limit State: Local Yielding of Branch/Branches Due
to Uneven Load Distribution, When
(11-39)
 > 0.85
= =10⁄2222=0. 94≤54
where
  (11-40)
SBC 306-CR-18 132
TABLE 11-7 (CONTINUED): DESIGN STRENGTHS OF RECTANGULAR HSS-TO-HSS TRUSS

CONNECTIONS

Limit State: Shear of Chord Sidewalls For Cross-Connections
With  < 90° and Where a Projected Gap is Created (See
T-, Y- and Cross-Connections
Determine Pn sin  in Figure).
accordance with Section 7 . 5 .
Gapped K-Connections
   = 9.8= 0.9.0 
Limit State: Chord Wall Plastification, for All 
(11-41)
Limit State: Shear Yielding (Punching), when  <   2

  = 0.62=0.95 
Do not check for square branches.
(11-42)
Limit State: Shear of Chord Sidewalls, in the Gap Region

Determine Pn sin in accordance with Section 7 . 5 .
Do not check for square chords.
Limit State: Local Yielding of Branch /Branches Due to
Uneven Load Distribution.
 = 22   =0.954 4

Do not check for square branches or if .
(11-43)
⁄ ≥ 15
where
 = 10⁄   ≤  (11-44)
SBC 306-CR-18 133
TABLE 11-7 (CONTINUED): DESIGN STRENGTHS OF RECTANGULAR HSS-TO-HSS TRUSS

CONNECTIONS

Overlapped K-Connections Limit State: Local Yielding of Branch /Branches
Due to Uneven Load Distribution
When
25% <  < 50%
 = :
0. 9 5
, =  50 22 4 4   (11-45)

When 50% ≤   < 80%
, =80%≤22< 4100%4    
:
(11-46)
Note that the force arrows shown for overlapped
K-connections may be reversed;
i and j control member identification.
, = 1022 44    
When :
(11-47)
 =     ≤  (11-48)
 = 10⁄   ≤ 

Subscript i refers to the overlapping branch
(11-49)
, = ,,  

Subscript j refers to the overlapped branch
(11-50)
FUNCTIONS
Qf = 1 for chord (connecting surface) in tension (11-51)
= 1.1.3  0.4 ≤ 1 for chord (connecting surface) in

compression, for T-, Y- and K-cross- (11-52)
 connections
for chord (connecting surface) in
compression, for gapped K-connections
(11-53)
=1.1=.30.4≤ 1.0
where Pu and Mu are determined on the side of the joint that has the higher compression stress. Pu and
(11-54)
 =  
   5
Mu refer to required strengths in the HSS.
[(   /4
] (11-55)
 =  ≤  (11-56)
SBC 306-CR-18 134

Joint eccentricity: 0.55 ≤ ⁄ ≤ 0.25 for K connections

Branch angle:
Chord wall
slenderness:
⁄ ⁄ ≤ 35
 ≥ 30°
and for gapped K-connections and T-, Y- and cross-connections
Branch wall
slenderness:
⁄⁄ ≤ 3035 ⁄ ≤ 35
and
for tension branch
≤ 1.25 For compression branch of gapped K-, T-, Y- and cross-

connections
≤ 35 for compression branch of gapped K-, T-, Y- and cross-connections
≤ 1.1 For compression branch of overlapped K-connections
Width ratio:
Aspect ratio:
⁄ ⁄ ≥ 0.25
and for T-, Y- cross- and overlapped K-connections
and 0.5 ≤ H /B ≤ 2.0
Overlap:
Branch width
ratio:
Branch thickness
0.25%5⁄⁄≤≤≤≤⁄1.≤0.07≤100%
for overlapped
for overlapped K-connections,
5 2.0
K-connections
where subscript i refers to the
overlapping branch and subscript j refers to the overlapped branch
for overlapped K-connections, where subscript i refers to the
ratio:
Ductility: ⁄ ⁄≤ 0.8

Material strength: Fy and
and
MPa  ≤ 360
overlapping branch and subscript j refers to the overlapped branch

Note: ASTM A500 Grade C is acceptable
Width ratio:
  ≥ 0.1  
ADDITIONAL LIMITS FOR GAPPED K-CONNECTIONS
and
eff ≥ 0.35
Gap ratio:  = ⁄ ≥ 0.5
0.5(1
(1 −  )
Gap:    
    ℎ ℎ
Bb
BranchMaximum
Note: size:
 ≥   ≥ 0.63  
gapsmaller ( larger
size will be controlled by the),e if
/Hboth
limit.branches
If gap isare square
large, treat as two Y-connec
Y-connections.
tions.
SBC 306-CR-18 135
TABLE 11-9 : DESIGN STRENGTHS OF ROUND HSS-TO-HSS MOMENT CONNECTIONS
Connection Type Connection Design Flexural Strength

Branch(es) under In-Plane Bending T-, Y-
and Cross-Connections   = 5.39.
(11-57)

4=20.290 
 = 0.6 13  <
(11-58)
 = 0.95
  =  10. =3.0.08190 
Branch(es) under Out-of-Plane Bending T-
, Y- and Cross-Connections
(11-59)
 = 0.6 3
4=20.295  <
(11-60)
For T-, Y- and cross-connections, with branch(es) under combined axial load, in-plane bending and
 −− −− ≤ 1.0

out-of-plane bending, or any combination of these load effects:
(11-61)
−− ==  11-9,, N-mm

= design flexural strength for in-plane bending from TABLE 11-9
= design flexural strength for out-of-plane bending from TABLE 11-9
11-9,, N-mm
M r-ip = required flexural strength for in-plane bending, N-mm
M r-op = required flexural strength for out-of-plane bending, N-mm
 = 
Pr
= design axial strength from TABLE 11-5
11-5,, N
SBC 306-CR-18 136
TABLE 11-9 (CONTINUED):

(CONTINUED): DESIGN STRENGTHS OF ROUND HSS-TO-HSS MOMENT
CONNECTIONS
FUNCTIONS
Qf = 1 for chord (connecting surface) in tension
(11-62)
= 1.
1.00 − 0.31 +   for HSS (connecting surface) in compression
0.3 compression
 
=|  |
where  and
Pu
(11-63)
Mu are determined on the side of the joint that has the lower compression stress. Pu and Mu
refer to required strengths in the HSS.
TABLE 11-10: LIMITS OF APPLICABILITY OF TABLE 11-9

APPLICABILITY
Branch angle:
Chord wall slenderness: ⁄⁄ ≤≤ 5040
 ≥ 30°
for T- and Y-connections
Branch wall slenderness:  ⁄ 

for cross connections
  ≤ 50
⁄ ≤ 0.05 ⁄
Width ratio:
Material strength:
Ductility:
⁄ ≤360⁄≤ 0.8 0.2 < ⁄ ≤ 1.0
Fy and
and
MPa
SBC 306-CR-18 137
TABLE 11-11 : DESIGN STRENGTHS OF RECTANGULAR HSS-TO-HSS MOMENT

CONNECTIONS
Connection Type
Branch(es) under In-Plane Bending T-
and Cross-Connections
Connection Design Flexural Strength
Limit State: Chord Wall Plastification, When  ≤ 0.85 (11-64)
 =    −=1.>0−0.0−85 

Limit State: Sidewall Local Yielding,
 = 0.5∗=51.500
When
(11-65)
Limit State: Local Yielding of Branch/Branches Due to
 =   11   

Uneven Load Distribution, When  > 0. 8 5 (11-66)
 = 0.95
Limit State: Chord Wall Plastification,
 =  0.0.511 ≤ 0.85211 

Branch(es) under
T- and Out-of-Plane Bending
Cross-Connections When
 = 1. 0 0  > 0. 8 5
(11-67)
 =    =1.5005

∗
Limit State: Sidewall Local Yielding,When
(11-68)
 > 0.
Limit State: Local Yielding of Branch/Branches Due to
Uneven Load Distribution, When

 =   0 0.51     8 5 (11-69)
 = 0.95
SBC 306-CR-18 138
TABLE 11-11 (CONTINUED): DESIGN STRENGTHS OF RECTANGULAR HSS-TO-HSS

MOMENT CONNECTIONS
Connection Type Connection Design Flexural Strength

Branch(es) under Out-of-Plane Bending
Limit State: Chord Distortional Failure, for
T- and Cross-Connections (continued)
T-Connections and Unbalanced Cross-Connections
 = 2    =1.00

For T- and cross-connections, with branch(es) under combined axial load, in-plane bending and out-
(11-70)
 −−  −− ≤ 1.0

of-plane bending, or any combination of these load effects:
(11-71)
−− ==  11-11,,
= design flexural strength for in-plane bending from TABLE 11-11
= design flexural strength for out-of-plane bending from TABLE 11-11
N-mm
11-11,, N-mm
Mr-ip = required flexural strength for in-plane bending, N-mm
 = 
Mr-op
Pr
= required flexural strength for out-of-plane bending, N-mm
= design axial strength from TABLE 11-7
11-7,, N
FUNCTIONS
Qf = 1 for chord (connecting surface) in tension
= 1.1.3 0.4  ≤1.0
for chord (connecting surface) in compression
(11-72)
(11-73)
 =    (11-9)(11-74)

where Pu and Mu are determined on the side of the joint that , has the lower compression stress. Pu and
∗ =  for T-co

T-connections
nnections an
andd = 0.
Mu refer to required strengths in the HSS.
8
10 
for cross-connections
 = ⁄   ≤  (11-75)
TABLE 11-12: LIMITS OF APPLICABILITY OF TABLE 11-11
Branch angle:
Chord wall slenderness:
Branch wall slenderness:
⁄ ⁄⁄≤ 35≤ 35
and
B b /tb and
 ≅ 90
≤ 1.25
Width ratio:
Aspect ratio: and
 ⁄  ≥
0.5 ≤ ⁄≤ ≤3602.0 0.5 ≤ ⁄ ≤ 2.00. 2 5
Material strength:
Ductility: ⁄ ⁄≤ 0.8
Fy and
and
MPa
SBC 306-CR-18 139
TABLE 11-13 : EFFECTIVE WELD PROPERTIES FOR CONNECTIONS TO RECTANGULAR

HSS
Connection Type Connection Weld Strength

Transverse Plate T- and Cross- Connections
Effective Weld Properties
Under Plate Axial Load
 = 22 10⁄    ≤ 2 (11-76)
where le = total effective weld length for welds on both

sides of the transverse plate
T-, Y- and Cross-Connections Under Branch

Axial Load or Bending
  =2 2 2 
Effective Weld Properties
(11-77)
   (11-78)
 = =310 3  ⁄3  

(11-79)
 = ⁄   ≤  (11-80)
When  > 0.85  > 50 or , beoi/2 shall not exceed 2t.
Gapped K-Connections Under Branch Effective Weld Properties

Axial Load When :
When =≤≥222250601.1.1.1. 2222 2 1.1. 22

,
(11-81)
 =   1.1. 22 (11-82)
When 50° <  < 60 linear interpolation shall be used to

determine le .
SBC 306-CR-18 140
TABLE 11-13 (CONTINUED): EFFECTIVE WELD PROPERTIES FOR CONNECTIONS TO

RECTANGULAR HSS
Connection Type Connection Weld Strength

Overlapped K-Connections under Branch Overlapping Member Effective Weld Properties (all
Axial Load dimensions are for the overlapping branch, i )
When 25% ≤ O < 50%:
v
,, = 250 1 100100   100100  

(11-83)
,, = 21  100  

When 50% ≤ Ov < 80%:
 100      (11-84)
Note that the force arrows shown for

overlapped K-connections may be reversed; When 80% ≤ Ov ≤ 100%:

i and j control member identification
,, = 21  100100 100    (11-85)

Effective Weld: Eq. (11-88
(11-88))
 = 1010⁄   ≤  (11-86)
When ⁄ ≤ 0.85  ≤ 50

and  = ⁄    ≤ 
when Bbi /Bb > 0.85 or i > 50°, beoi /2 shall not
(11-87)
118080     > 50

exceed 2t and when Bbi /Bbj > 0.85 or
, beov /2 shall not exceed 2t
2 tbj
Subscript i refers to the overlapping branch

Subscript j refers to the overlapped branch
,,10= 2 2 2 (11-88)
When ⁄ > 0.85  > 50

and
 = ⁄   ≤  (11-89)
,, = 2 1.1. 22

When Bbj /B > 0.85 or j > 50°,
SBC 306-CR-18 141
CHAPTER 11
— DESIGN OF HSS AND BOX MEMBER CONNECTIONS

SBC 306-CR-18 142
CHAPTER 12 — SEISMIC PROVISIONS FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL BUILDINGS
12—SEISMIC PROVISIONS FOR STRUCTURAL

CHAPTER 12—SEISMIC
STEEL BUILDINGS
This chapter governs the design of earthquake- 2. ordinary concentrically braced frames
resistant steel structures. The chapter is organized 3. eccentrically braced frames
as follows:
4. composite ordinary moment frames
12.1 —General Requirements
5. composite intermediate moment frames
12.2 —General Seismic Design Requirements
6. composite ordinary braced frames
12.3 —Moment-Frame and Braced-Frame
341..
For other SFRSs refer to ANSI/AISC 341
Systems
Saudi Building Code requirements for Concrete
12.4 —Composite Moment-Frame and Braced-
Structures (SBC 304
304)), as modified in this chapter,
Frame Systems
shall be used for the design and construction of
12.5 —Fabrication and Erection reinforced concrete components in composite
construction.
12.6 —Quality Control and Quality Assurance
12.7 Prequalification and cyclic qualification User Note: SBC 301 (Table 12-1) specifically
testing provisions exempts structural steel systems assigned to
SDCs B and C, but not composite systems,
from the provision of this chapter if the seismic
12.1—General Requirements
12.1— loads are computed using a response
modification coefficient, R of 3. For Seism
Seismic
ic
The provisions of this chapter shall be applied in Design Category A, SBC 301 specifies lateral
conjunction with applicable requirements of this forces to be used as the seismic loads and
code. effects that do not involve the use of a response
12.1.1 Scope. The seismic provisions in this modification coefficient. Thus for Seismic
chapter shall apply to the design, fabrication and Design Category A it is not necessary to define
erection of steel structures in Seismic Design a seismic force resisting system that meets any
Categories (SDC) B through D. Structures assigned special requirements and the provisions of this
to Seismic Design Category E or F shall be designed chapter do not apply.
and detailed
Where, in accordance
applicable, with ANSI/AISC
the provisions 341..
341
in this chapter SBC 301 (Table 15-1) permits certain non-
building structures to be designed in
shall apply to the design of structural steel members accordance with the applicable requirements of
and connections in the seismic force resisting this Code with an appropriately reduced R
systems (SFRS), and splices and bases of columns
factor and are not required to satisfy the
in gravity framing systems of buildings and other provisions of this chapter.
structures with moment frames, braced frames and
composite systems. Other structures are defined as
those structures designed, fabricated and erected in
User Note: Composite seismic force resisting
a manner similar to buildings, with building-like
vertical and lateral force-resisting-elements. The systems include those systems with members
seismic force resisting systems shall be of structural of structural steel acting compositely with
steel or of structural steel acting compositely with reinforced concrete, as well as systems in
reinforced concrete, unless specifically exempted which structural steel members and reinforced
by other Saudi building codes. The provisions in concrete members act together to form a
this chapter covers only the following types of seismic force resisting system.
SFRSs: ordinary and intermediate moment frames
1. ordinary column cantilever systems 12.1.2 Materials
SBC 306-CR-18 143
12.1.2.1 Material Specifications. 12.1.2.2 Expected Material Strength.

Structural steel used in SFRS shall satisfy the When required in this chapter, the required strength
requirements of Section 1.3.1 , except as modified of an element (a member or a connection of a
in this chapter. The specified minimum yield stress member) shall be determined from the expected
of steel to be used for members in which inelastic yield stress, RyFy, of the member or an adjoining
behavior is expected shall not exceed 345 MPa for member, as applicable, where Fy is the specified
systems defined in Sections 12.3.2 , 12.3.3 and minimum yield stress of the steel to be used in the
12.4.2 . For systems defined in Sections 12.3.1 , member and Ry is the ratio of the expected yield
12.3.4 , 12.4.1 and 12.4.3 such limits shall not stress to the specified minimum yield stress, Fy , of
exceed 380 MPa. Either of these specified that material.
minimum yield stress limits are permitted to be
When required to determine the nominal strength,
exceeded when the suitability of the material is
Rn, for limit states within the same member from
determined by testing or other rational criteria.
which the required strength is determined, the
Exception: Specified minimum yield stress of expected yield stress, RyFy, and the expected tensile
structural steel shall not exceed 450 MPa for strength, RtFu, are permitted to be used in lieu of Fy
columns in systems defined in Sections 12.3.4 and and Fu, respectively, where Fu is the specified
12.4.3 . minimum tensile strength and Rt is the ratio of the
expected tensile strength to the specified minimum
The structural steel used in the SFRS described in
tensile strength, Fu, of that material.
Sections 12.3 and 12.4 shall meet one of the
following ASTM Specifications: The values of Ry and Rt for various steel and steel
reinforcement materials are given in TABLE 12-1 12-1..
1. A36/A36M Other values of Ry and Rt are permitted if the values
2. A53/A53M are determined by testing of specimens, similar in
3. A500/A500M (Gr. B or C) size and source to the materials to be used,
conducted in accordance with the testing
4. A501 requirements per the ASTM Specifications for the
5. A529/A529M specified grade of steel.
6. A572/A572M [Gr. 42 (290), 50 (345) or 55 User Note: The expected compressive strength
(380)] of concrete may be estimated using values from
7. A588/A588M Seismic Rehabilitation of Existing Buildings,
ASCE/SEI 41-06.
8. A913/A913M [Gr. 50 (345), 60 (415) or 65
(450)]
9. A992/A992M 12.1.2.3 Heavy Sections. For structural
10. A1011/A1011M HSLAS Gr. 55 (380) steel in the
Section SFRS,
1.3.1.3 in addition
, hot to the
t he with
rolled shapes requirements of
flanges 38
11. (A1043/A1043M mm thick and thicker shall have a minimum Charpy
V-notch toughness of 27 J at 21 °C, tested in the
The structural steel used for column base plates alternate core location as described in ASTM A6
shall meet one of the preceding ASTM Supplementary Requirement S30. Plates 50 mm
Specifications or ASTM A283/A283M Grade D. thick and thicker shall have a minimum Charpy V-
notch toughness of 27 J at 21 °C, measured at any
User Note: This section only covers material location permitted by ASTM A673, Frequency P,
properties for structural
structural steel used in the S
SFRS
FRS where the plate is used for the following:
and included in the definition of structural steel
given in Section 2.1 of the AISC Code of (a) Members built up from plate
Standard Practice, AISC (2010a). Other steel, (b) Connection plates where inelastic strain under
such as cables for permanent bracing, is not seismic loading is expected
covered. Steel reinforcement used in (c) The steel core of buckling-restrained braces.
components
Section in composite
12.1.2.5 . SFRS is covered in 12.1.2.4 Consumables
Consumables for Welding
12.1.2.4.1 Seismic Force Resisting System
Welds. All welds used in members and connections
SBC 306-CR-18 144
in the SFRS shall be made with filler metals

meeting the requirements specified in clause 6.3 of Mechanical Properties for Demand Critical
Structural Welding Code—Seismic Supplement
Welds
D1.8/D1.8M)), hereafter referred to as AWS
(AWS D1.8/D1.8M
Classification
D1.8/D1.8M..
D1.8/D1.8M
Property
User Note: AWS D1.8/D1.8M sub-clauses
480 MPa 550 MPa
6.3.5, 6.3.6, 6.3.7 and 6.3.8 apply only to Yield 400 min. 470 min.
demand critical welds.
Strength, MPa
12.1.2.4.2 Demand Critical Welds. Welds
Tensile 480 min. 550 min.
designated as demand critical shall be made with
Strength, MPa
filler metals meeting the requirements specified in
AWS D1.8/D1.8M clause 6.3.
Elongation, % 22 min. 19 min.
User Note: AWS D1.8/D1.8M requires that all
CVN 54 min. @ 20 °Cb, c
seismic force resisting system welds are to be
Toughness,
made with filler metals classified using AWS
(J)
A5 standards that achieve the following
mechanical properties: b
For LAST of +10 °C. For LAST less than
+10 °C, see AWS D1.8/D1.8M sub-clause
6.3.6.
Filler Metal Classification Properties for c
Tests conducted in accordance with AWS
Seismic Force Resisting System Welds
D1.8/D1.8M Annex A meeting 54 J min. at
a temperature lower than +20 °C also meet
Classification
this requirement.
Property
480 MPa 550 MPa
12.1.2.5 Concrete and Steel
Reinforcement. Concrete and steel reinforcement
Yield Strength, 400 min. 470 min.
MPa used in composite components in composite
intermediate SFRS of Section 12.4.2 shall satisfy
Tensile Strength, 480 min. 550 min. 304,, Chapter 18. Concrete
the requirements of SBC 304
MPa and steel reinforcement used in composite
components in composite ordinary SFRS of
Elongation, % 22 min. 19 min. Sections 12.4.1 and 12.4.3 shall satisfy the
304,, Section 18.2.1.4.
requirements of SBC 304
CVN Toughness, 27 min. @ -18 °Ca 12.1.3 Structural Design Drawings and
(J) Specifications
a
Filler metals classified as meeting 27 J min. 12.1.3.1 General. Structural design
at a temperature lower than drawings and specifications shall indicate the work
to be performed, and include items required by this
−18 °C also meet this requirement. Code, the AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel
Buildings and Bridges, AISC (2010a), and SBC
201,, in addition to the followings, as applicable:
201
User Note: In addition to the above 1. Designation of the SFRS
requirements, AWS D1.8/D1.8M requires,
unless otherwise exempted from testing, that 2. Identification of the members and
all demand critical welds are to be made with connections that are part of the SFRS
filler metals receiving Heat Input Envelope 3. Locations and dimensions of protected
Testing that achieve the following mechanical zones
properties in the weld metal:
SBC 306-CR-18 145
4. Connection details between concrete floor for the steel components of reinforced concrete or
diaphragms and the structural steel composite elements, structural design drawings and
elements of the SFRS specifications for composite construction shall
indicate the following items, as applicable:
5. Shop drawing and erection drawing
requirements not addressed in Section 1. Bar placement, cutoffs, lap and mechanical
12.5.1 splices, hooks and mechanical anchorage,
12.1.3.2 Steel Construction. In addition to placement of ties and other transverse
reinforcement
the requirements of Section 12.1.3.1 , structural
design drawings and specifications for steel 2. Requirements for dimensional changes
construction shall indicate the following items, as resulting from temperature changes, creep
applicable: and shrinkage
1. Configuration of the connections 3. Location, magnitude and sequencing of
any prestressing or post-tensioning present
2. Connection material specifications and
sizes 4. Location of steel headed stud anchors and
welded reinforcing bar anchors
3. Locations of demand critical welds
4. Locations where gusset plates are to be 12.2—General Seismic Design
12.2—
detailed to accommodate inelastic rotation Requirements
5. Locations of connection plates requiring The required strength and other seismic design
seismic design categories
Charpy V-notch
accordance (CVN)
with Section toughness in
12.1.2.3 requirements
risk categoriesfor (SDCs),
, and the limitations on height and
301..
irregularity shall be as specified in SBC 301
6. Lowest anticipated service temperature
(LAST) of the steel structure, if the The design story drift and the limitations on story
structure is not enclosed and maintained at drift shall be determined as required in SBC 301.
301.
a temperature of 10 °C or higher Load Combinations. The
12.2.1 Loads and Load
7. Locations where weld backing is required loads and load combinations shall be as stipulated
to be removed by SBC 301301.. Unless otherwise defined in these
provisions, where amplified seismic loads are
8. Locations where fillet welds are required required by this chapter, the seismic load effect
when weld backing is permitted to remain including the system overstrength factor Ωo shall be
9. Locations where fillet welds are required applied as prescribed by SBC 301. Where the
to reinforce groove welds or to improve effects of horizontal forces including overstrength,
connection geometry Emh, are defined in this chapter they shall be
10. Locations where weld tabs are required to combined

required bywith
SBCthe
301vertical
301.. seismic load effect as
be removed
11. Splice locations where tapered transitions User Note: The seismic load effect including
are required the system overstrength factor is defined in
SBC 301 Section 12.4.3. Where Emh is defined
12. The shape of weld access holes, if a shape in this chapter, it is intended to replace Emh in
other than those provided in the Code are SBC 301 Section 12.4.3.
required
13. Joints or groups of joints in which a In composite construction, incorporating reinforced
specific assembly order, welding concrete components designed in accordance with
sequence, welding technique or other the requirements of SBC 304
304,, the requirements of
special precautions where such items are Section 2.3.3 shall be used for the seismic force
designated to be submitted to the engineer resisting system (SFRS).
of record
12.1.3.3 Composite Construction. In User Note: Ωo should be determined in
accordance with SBC 301.
301.
addition to the requirements of Section 12.1.3.1 and
the requirements of Section 12.1.3.2 as applicable 12.2.2 Design Basis
SBC 306-CR-18 146
12.2.2.1 Required Strength. The required members shall have flanges continuously connected
strength of structural members and connections to the web or webs.
shall be the greater of:
Encased composite columns shall comply with the
1. The required strength as determined by requirements of Section 12.2.5.4.2.1 for moderately
structural analysis for the appropriate load ductile members and Section 12.2.5.4.2.2 for highly
combinations, as stipulated in SBC 301 ductile members.
and in Section 12.2.4 Filled composite columns shall comply with the
2. The required strength given in Sections requirements of Section 12.2.5.4.3 for both
12.3 and 12.4 moderately and highly ductile members.
12.2.2.2 Design Strength. The design Concrete sections shall comply with the
stipulated as the design strength  

strength of systems, members and connections,
, shall be
determined in accordance with applicable
requirements of SBC 304 Section 18.4 for
moderately ductile members and SBC 304 Section
18.7 for highly ductile members.
requirements of this Code, except as modified
12.2.5.1.2 Width-to-Thickness
Width-to-Thickn ess Limitations
throughout the provisions of this chapter. of Steel and Composite Sections. For members
12.2.3 System Type. The seismic force resisting designated as moderately ductile members, the
system (SFRS) shall contain one or more moment width-to-thickness ratios of compression elements
frame, braced frame or composite system shall not exceed the limiting width-to-thickness
conforming to the requirements of one of the 12-2..
ratios, λmd, from TABLE 12-2
seismic systems designated in Sections 12.3 and
12.4..
12.4 For
the members designated asratios
width-to-thickness highly ductile members,
of compression
12.2.4 Analysis. An analysis conforming to the elements shall not exceed the limiting width-to-
requirements of the SBC 301 and this Code shall be thickness ratios, λhd, from TABLE 12-2
12-2..
performed for design of the system. When the
12.2.5.2 Stability Bracing of Beams.
design is based upon elastic analysis, the stiffness When required in Sections 12.3 and 12.4,
12.4, stability
properties of component members of steel systems bracing shall be provided as required in this section
shall be based on elastic sections and those of to restrain lateral-torsional buckling of structural
composite systems shall include the effects of steel or concrete-encased beams subject to flexure
cracked sections. Additional analysis shall be and designated as moderately ductile members or
performed as specified in Sections 12.3 and 12.412.4.. highly ductile members.
When nonlinear analysis is required it shall be
performed in accordance with Chapter 12 of SBC 12.2.5.2.1 Moderately Ductile Members
301..
301 i. The bracing of moderately ductile steel
12.2.5 Member
moment frames and braced frames inMembers
Requirements. of
the seismic beams shall satisfy the following
requirements: following
force resisting system (SFRS) shall comply with
1. Both flanges of beams shall be laterally
applicable requirements of this Code and this braced or the beam cross section shall be
section. Certain members of the SFRS that are torsionally braced
expected to undergo inelastic deformation under the
design earthquake are designated in this chapter as 2. Beam bracing shall meet the requirements
moderately ductile members or highly ductile of Appendix E of the Code for lateral or
members. torsional bracing of beams, where the
required flexural strength of the member,
12.2.5.1 Classification of Sections for
Ductility. When required for the systems defined
in Sections 12.3,
12.3, 12.4 and 12.2.5.5 , members
designated as moderately ductile members or highly
ductile members shall comply with this section. where
 = 
Mr, shall be:
(12-1)
Ry = ratio of the expected yield stress to the

12.2.5.1.1 Section Requirements for specified minimum yield Stress
Ductile Members. Structural steel sections for both
moderately ductile members and highly ductile Z = plastic section modulus, mm 3
SBC 306-CR-18 147
3. Beam bracing shall have a maximum 2. The required strength of lateral bracing of
ii.
 = 0.17/
spacing of
(12-2)
The bracing of moderately ductile concrete-
each flange provided adjacent to plastic
 = 0.06/ 
hinges shall be:
ℎ (12-4)
encased composite beams shall satisfy the where
following requirements:
ho = distance between flange centroids, mm
1. Both flanges of members shall be laterally
The required strength of torsional bracing provided
braced or the beam cross section shall be
2.
torsionally braced
Lateral bracing shall meet the
requirements of Appendix E for lateral or
 = 0.06
adjacent to plastic hinges shall be:
(12-5)
3. The required bracing stiffness shall satisfy
torsional bracing of beams, where Mr = the requirements of Appendix E for lateral
Mp,exp and or torsional bracing of beams with Cd = 1.0
Mp,exp = expected flexural strength of and where the expected flexural strength of
beams, N-mm. For concrete-encased or
composite beams, Mp,exp shall be calculated
using the plastic stress distribution or the
strain compatibility method. Appropriate
 =  = 
the beam shall be:
(12-6)
For concrete-encased composite beams, such
Ry factors shall be used for different bracing shall satisfy the following
elements of the cross-section while requirements:
establishing section force equilibrium and 1. Both flanges of beams shall be laterally
calculating the flexural strength. braced or the beam cross section shall be
3. Member bracing shall have a maximum torsionally braced
 = 0.17/
spacing of
(12-3)
4. using the material properties of the steel
2. The required strength of lateral bracing
 = 0.06,,
provided adjacent
adjacent to plas
plastic
tic hinges shall be
(12-7)
section and ry in the plane of buckling of the beam, where Mp,exp is determined
calculated based on the elastic transformed in accordance with Section 12.2.5.2.1
section. (ii)(2).
12.2.5.2.2 Highly Ductile Members. In The required strength for torsional bracing
addition to the requirements of Sections 12.2.5.2.1 provided adjacent
adjacent to plas
plastic
tic hinges shall be
(i) (1) and (2), and 12.2.5.2.1 ((ii)
ii) (1) and (2), the
bracing of highly ductile beam members shallshall have Mu = 0.06Mp, exp of the beam.
a maximum spacing of Lb = 0.086ryE/Fy. For 3. The required bracing stiffness shall satisfy
concrete-encased composite beams, the material the requirements of Appendix E for lateral
properties of the steel section shall be used and the or torsional bracing of beams where Mr =
calculation for ry in the plane of buckling shall be Mu = Mp, exp of the beam is determined in
based on the elastic transformed
transformed section. accordance with Section 12.2.5.2.1 (ii)(2)
and Cd = 1.0
12.2.5.2.3 Special Bracing at Plastic Hinge
Locations. Special bracing shall be located 12.2.5.3 Protected Zones. Discontinuities
adjacent to expected plastic hinge locations where specified in Section 12.5.2.1 resulting from
required by Sections 12.3 and 12.4.
12.4. fabrication and erection procedures and from other
attachments are prohibited in the area of a member
For structural steel beams, such bracing shall or a connection element designated as a protected
satisfy the following requirements: zone by the provision o
off this chapter or ANSI/AISC
1. Both flanges of beams shall be laterally 358..
358
braced or the member cross section shall be Exception: Welded steel headed stud anchors and
torsionally braced other connections are permitted in protected zones
when designated in ANSI/AISC 358 358,, or as
SBC 306-CR-18 148
otherwise determined with a connection i. One-half the least dimension of the

prequalification or as determined in a program of section
qualification testing in accordance with Section
ii. 8 longitudinal bar diameters
12.7..
12.7
iii. 24 tie bar diameters
12.2.5.4 Columns. Columns in moment
frames, braced frames and shear walls shall satisfy iv. 300 mm
the requirements of this section. 2. This spacing shall be maintained over a
12.2.5.4.1 Required Strength. The required vertical distance equal to the greatest of the
strength of columns in the SFRS shall be following lengths, measured from each
determined from the following: joint face and on both sides of any section
where flexural yielding is expected to
1. The load effect resulting from the analysis
occur:
requirements for the applicable system per
Sections 12.3 and 12.4. Exception: Section i. One-sixth the vertical clear height of
12.2.5.4.1 need not apply to Sections the column
12.4.1 or 12.4.3 ii. The maximum cross-sectional
2. The compressive axial strength and tensile dimension
strength as determined using the load iii. 450 mm
combinations stipulated in SBC 301
including the amplified seismic load. It is 3. Tie spacing over the remaining column
permitted to neglect applied moments in length shall not exceed twice the spacing
this determination unless the moment defined in Section 12.2.5.4.2.1 (1)
results from a load applied to the column 4. Splices and end bearing details for encased
between points of lateral support. The composite columns in composite ordinary
required axial compressive strength and SFRS of sections 12.4.1 and 12.4.3 shall
tensile strength need not exceed either of satisfy the requirements of this Code and
the following: SBC 304 Section 10.7.5.3.2. The design
(a) The maximum load transferred to the shall comply with SBC 304 Sections 18.2.7
column by the system, including the and 18.2.8. The design shall consider any
effects of material overstrength and adverse behavioral effects due to abrupt
strain hardening in those members changes in either the member stiffness or
where yielding is expected the nominal tensile strength. Transitions to
reinforced concrete sections without
(b) The forces corresponding to the embedded structural steel members,
resistance of the foundation to over transitions to bare structural steel sections,
turning uplift
and column bases shall be considered
12.2.5.4.2 Encased Composite abrupt changes
Columns. Encased composite columns shall 5. Welded wire fabric shall be prohibited as
satisfy the requirements of Chapter 99,, in addition to transverse reinforcement in moderately
the requirements of this section. Additional ductile members
requirements, as specified for moderately ductile
members and highly ductile members in Sections 12.2.5.4.2.2 Highly Ductile Members.
12.2.5.4.2.1 and 12.2.5.4.2.2 , shall apply as Encased composite columns used as highly ductile
required in the descriptions of the composite members shall satisfy Section 12.2.5.4.2.1 in
seismic systems in Section 12.4
12.4.. addition to the following requirements:
12.2.5.4.2.1 Moderately Ductile Members. 1. Longitudinal load-carrying
Encased composite columns used as moderately reinforcement shall satisfy the
ductile members shall satisfy the following requirements of SBC 304 Section 18.7.4
requirements: 2. Transverse reinforcement shall be hoop
1. The maximum spacing of transverse reinforcement as defined in SBC 304 Chapter
reinforcement at the top and bottom shall 18 and shall satisfy the following
be the least of the following: requirements:
SBC 306-CR-18 149
The minimum area of tie reinforcement, 3. Encased composite columns in braced frames
Ash, shall be: with required compressive strengths, without
 = 0.09   1    

ℎ ℎ
′
(12-8)
consideration of the amplified seismic loads,
greater than 0.2Pn shall have transverse
reinforcement as specified in Section
12.2.5.4.2.2 ((2)(iii)
2)(iii) over the total element
where
length. This requirement need not be satisfied
As = cross-sectional area of the structural if the nominal strength of the concrete-
steel core, mm2 encased steel section alone is greater than the
Fy = specified minimum yield stress of the load effect from a load combination of 1.0 D
structural steel core, MPa + 0.5L
Fysr = specified minimum yield stress of the 4. Composite columns supporting reactions
ties, MPa from discontinued stiff members, such as
walls or braced frames, shall have transverse
Pn = nominal compressive strength of the reinforcement as specified in Section
composite column calculated in 12.2.5.4.2.2 ((2)(iii)
2)(iii) over the full length
accordance with this Code, N beneath the level at which the discontinuity
hcc = cross-sectional dimension of the occurs if the required compressive strengths,
confined core measured center-to-center without consideration of the amplified
of the tie reinforcement, mm seismic loads, exceeds 0.1Pn. Transverse
reinforcement shall extend into the
f ′c = specified compressive strength of discontinued member for at least the length
concrete, MPa required to develop full yielding in the
s = spacing of transverse reinforcement concrete-encased steel section and
measured along the longitudinal axis of longitudinal reinforcement. This requirement
the structural member, mm need not be satisfied if the nominal strength
of the concrete-encased steel section alone is
Equation (12-8) need not be satisfied if the greater than the load effect from a load
nominal strength of the concrete-encased combination of 1.0D + 0.5L
structural steel section alone is greater than the
load effect from a load combination of 1.0D + 5. When the column terminates on a footing or
0.5L mat foundation, the transverse reinforcement
as specified in this section shall extend into
where the footing or mat at least 300 mm. When the
D = dead load due to the weight ooff the column terminates on a wall, the transverse
structural elements and permanent reinforcement shall extend into the wall for
features on the building, N at least the
yielding length
in the required to develop
concrete-encased full
shape and
L = live load due to occupancy and longitudinal reinforcement
moveable equipment, N
12.2.5.4.3 Filled Composite Columns. This
The maximum spacing of transverse section applies to columns that meet the limitations
reinforcement along the length of the of Section 9.2.2 . Such columns shall be designed to
column shall be the lesser of six satisfy the requirements of Chapter 99,, except that
longitudinal load-carrying bar diameters the nominal shear strength of the composite column
or 150 mm. shall be the nominal shear strength of the structural
When specified in Sections 12.2.5.4.2.2 steel section alone, based on its effective shear area.
(3) and (4), the maximum spacing of 12.2.5.5 H-PILES. Design of H-piles shall
transverse reinforcement along the comply with the requirements of this Code
member length shall be the lesser of one- regarding design of members subjected to
fourth the least member dimension or 100 combined loads. H-piles shall satisfy the
mm.
spacedConfining
not more reinforcement
than 350 mm onshall be
center requirements for highly ductile members of Section

SBC 306 CR

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

SBC 306 CR

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

SBC 306 CR

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

THE SAUDI BUILDING CODE for STEEL

these administrative requirements.

SBC 306-CR-18 iii

CHAPTER 1 —GENERAL PROVISIONS.............................................................

6.13 —PROPORTIONS OF BEAMS AND GIRDERS .............................................................................................................. 71

CHAPTER 14 —FABRICATION AND ERECTION ........................................................................................

Some definitions in the list below have been simplified

Symbol Definition .............................................

ABM Cross-sectional area of the base metal, mm2 ....................

Anv Net area subject to shear,

Awe Effective area of the weld, mm2 ...................

C HSS torsional constant...........................................

EIeff Effective stiffness of composite section, N-mm2 .................................. 9.2.1.2

FSR Allowable stress range, MPa....

Is secondary members, mm4 ....................

Lpd analysis, mm ......... App. A.2.3

My Yield moment about the axis of bending, .................................. 6.10.1

Pu Required axial strength in chord,

Ru Required strength ...................................

a Clear distance between transverse stiffeners,

beoi Effective width of

d Diameter of pin, mm ..........................................

frv Required shear stress, MPa ..........................................

l Length of connection, mm .................................................................Table 4-1

weld strength calculations, mm ................................................................. 11.4

tb Design wall thickness of HSS branch member, .............................. 11.2.1

x– Eccentricity of connection, mm .........................................

y Subscript relating symbol ..................................... 8.1.1

eop Effective outside punching parameter

rw Limiting slenderness parameter for noncompact noncompact web.............................

v Resistance factor for steel headed stud anchor

A Angle cross-sectional area, mm2 ..........................................

 act Actual bracing stiffness provided..........................................

Poisson’s ratio .....................

 Rotation at service loads, rad ...........................................

Block shear rupture. In a connection , limit state of

B atten plate.. Plate rigidly connected to two parallel

Lateral-torsional buckling. Buckli ng mode of a

N omi na heii ght. In a formed steel deck, height of

Pr otected zone. Area of members or connections of

for Nuclear Facilities N690)), in

American Society of Mechanical Engineers A354-07a Standard Specification for Quenched

A500/A500M-07 Standard Specification for Cold-

AWS D1.3 -2008 Structural Welding Code—Sheet

AWS A5.25/A5.25M-1997 (R2009) Specification ASTM A529/A529M ASTM A913/A913M

ASTM A194/A194M ASTM A563M AWS A5.17/A5.17M AWS A5.28/A5.28M

User Note: Materials with other international

1.3.4 Anchor Rods and Threaded Rods. 1.4—

This page left intentionally blank

structure is subjected to all appropriate load

2.4 —Member Properties

analysis of the structure. and collectors

where 2.8—Evaluation of Existing Structures

Table 2-1 : Width-to-Thickness

CHAPTER 2 — DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

Table 2-2: Width-to-Thickness Ratios: Compression Elements Members Subject to Flexure

   ≤  5.70 

This page left intentionally blank